JP6842174B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a control means capable of generating a special gaming state that imparts a gaming value to a player when the display result of a variable display game that fluctuates and displays identification information becomes a special result.

Conventionally, there is a game machine capable of changing settings (set value, probability set value) related to game conditions (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-135843

However, in the conventional gaming machines, it was not possible to improve the working efficiency of Yu Technical field administrator.

The present invention aims to improve the working efficiency of Yu Technical field administrator.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a game provided with a control means capable of generating a special game state that gives a player a game value when the display result of the variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner is a special result. in machine, which can be displayed in the first display device that can display a display relating to a game, a configurable set Teite stage settings relating to a game condition, the display on the state display information calculated based on the number of won game media A second display device is provided, and the control means stores the information stored in the storage means even when the power is cut off, and stores the information in the storage means at the time of turning on the power before the timer interrupt becomes possible. The storage means includes a legitimacy determining means for determining whether or not the information is legitimate, and the storage means includes a game work area and a game stack area related to information related to game control, and the state display. The validity determination means includes the state display information work area and the state display information stack area related to the information, and the game work area is the target of the determination, and the game stack area, the state display information work area, and the above. the status display information stack area is excluded from the determination, the control means, in response to the set value by the setting Teite stage is a configurable state settable predetermined said first display device It is possible to display the state of.

According to an embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to improve the working efficiency of Yu Technical field administrator.

It is a perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a batch display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a figure which shows the structure of the RAM of the game microcomputer of a game control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting value change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability set value confirmation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure hold information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big prize opening switch monitoring process. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit probability and small hit probability of a special figure variation display game for each setting (each setting value). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a figure which illustrates the jackpot symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of a special figure variation display game for each setting. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the symbol variation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the external information editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the external information editing process. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 1) of the batch display device during the probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 2) of the batch display device during the probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 3) of the batch display device during the probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 4) of the batch display device during the probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 5) of the batch display device during the probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 6) of the batch display device during the probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the other configuration example of a batch display device. It is a figure which shows another configuration of a batch display device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol setting process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the chance eye stop symbol mode in the chance eye look-ahead effect which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which selects the chance eye stop symbol mode which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (No. 1) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (No. 2) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a back view of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view when the board effect device of the game board which concerns on 3rd Embodiment operates. It is a front view when the frame effect device of the glass frame which concerns on 3rd Embodiment operates. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the movable body control processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the initial operation control processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the initial operation control processing which concerns on the comparative example of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure at the time of receiving a set value which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a table for determining the initial light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect of the 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare effect setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ending effect setting process which concerns on the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the out ball number reception processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of RTC reading processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the count information setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device at the time of a big hit. In the fourth embodiment, it is a figure which shows another example of the display screen of the display device at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the display mode of the setting suggestion effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hall / player setting mode processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device at the time of a hall setting mode in 4th Embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the player setting mode. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demo setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the hold display changes during the special figure change of the hold digestion area. In the fifth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect is generated in the effect display area. In the fifth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is another example of the screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect occurs in the hold digestion area or the effect display area. Is. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interrupt processing which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the lighting pattern of the character code (character code) which concerns on 6th Embodiment and the character corresponding to it. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the initial setting command transmitted to the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment, and a latch. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the LED driver initial setting process which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the LED command transmitted to the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment, and a latch. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of LED data transmission processing which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the cascade connection of the LED driver which concerns on 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the state display device which concerns on 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 78 (B) is a diagram showing details of a discharge ball number display unit that constitutes a state display device and displays the number of discharged balls and a ball ejection rate display unit that displays the ball ejection rate. It is a timing chart which shows the initial setting command sent to the driver for combination ratio which concerns on 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, and the driver for ball ejection rate / number of ejected balls. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the initial setting process of the driver for a combination ratio and the driver for the payout rate / the number of ejected balls which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for combination ratio which concerns on 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, and the driver for ball ejection rate / number of ejected balls. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of LED data transmission processing which concerns on 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of the game machine which concerns on 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the cascade connection of the LED driver which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the initial setting command sent to the batch driver, the combination ratio driver, and the ball output rate / ejected ball number driver which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the initial setting processing of the batch driver, the combination ratio driver, and the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the batch driver, the combination ratio driver, and the ball output rate / ejected ball number driver which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of LED data transmission processing which concerns on 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting value change processing which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram at the time of displaying the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability setting value display device and the test firing test signal transmitted to the test firing test device at the time of setting change of the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram at the time of displaying the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability setting value display device, and the test firing test signal transmitted to the test firing test device at the time of setting change of the first modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting value change processing which concerns on the 2nd modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram at the time of displaying the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability set value display device, and the test firing test signal transmitted to the test firing test device at the time of setting change of the second modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example (the 1) of the game control system which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example (the 2) of the game control system which concerns on 8th Embodiment. A timing chart showing an example of the timing of external information output when the setting is changed according to the ninth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the timing of external information output at the time of setting change which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of external information output at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the timing of the external information output at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of external information output at the time of setting change which concerns on the modification of 9th Embodiment. , This is another example in which the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the modified example of the ninth embodiment is changed. In the tenth embodiment, it is a figure which illustrates the symbol number, the lighting pattern of the 1st special figure variation display unit 51 of the collective display device corresponding to the symbol number, and the lighting pattern of the probability set value. It is a figure which shows the detail of the state display device which displays the information about the payout rate which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the state display apparatus which displays the number which shows the probability setting value which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game which concerns on 11th Embodiment for each setting (each setting value). FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) illustrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game according to the eleventh embodiment for each setting (each set value). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the opening mode (small hit opening pattern) of the special variation winning apparatus in a small hit state. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a figure which illustrates the hit probability of the normal figure variation display game for each setting (each setting value). In the eleventh embodiment, it is a figure which illustrates the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display device waiting for a customer. It is a figure which shows the light emitting mode of the special figure variation display part in eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the external device which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state that the detachable part which concerns on 12th Embodiment is attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows schematic composition example of the game board and a part which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the game board and a part which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the parallel serial conversion part of the identification board which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification of the identification board (particularly the parallel serial conversion part) which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification of the identification board (particularly the parallel serial conversion part) which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 3rd modification of the identification substrate which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main processing of the effect control apparatus which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the parts collation processing which concerns on 12th Embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, it is a figure which shows the reference table which associates a model designation command with a model identification information. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of power-on (power restoration) of the gaming machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting value change processing which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure at the time of receiving a set value which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the segment LED editing process which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device at the time of setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode at the time of setting change of the state display device which concerns on the 2nd modification of 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation according to the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display screen of the display device at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display mode of the probability setting value in the game machine of 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 1st modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the game machine of 14th Embodiment. In the second modification of the display mode of the probability set value in the game machine of the 14th embodiment, the display mode of the probability set value at the time of changing the setting and the display mode of the probability set value at the time of confirming the setting are compared. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 3rd modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the game machine of 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 4th modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the game machine of 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 5th modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the game machine of 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variation pattern setting process which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2 byte distribution processing which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the distribution processing which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting processing which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end processing which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit probability and small hit probability which concerns on 15th Embodiment for each setting (each setting value). It is a figure which illustrates the jackpot symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) which concerns on 15th Embodiment for each setting. It is a figure which shows the selectivity table which defines the selectivity of the number (variation pattern group number) of the variation group table A to E which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the variation group table A (in the case of a probable change state and an outlier) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the variation group table B (in the case of a probable change state and an outlier) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the variation group table C (in the case of a probable change state and an outlier) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation group table D, D'(in the case of a probable change state and an outlier) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation group table E, E'(in the case of a probable change state and an outlier) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the variation group table A (in the case of a probable variation state and a small hit) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the variation group table B (in the case of a probable variation state and a small hit) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the variation group table C (in the case of a probable variation state and a small hit) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation group table D, D'(in the case of a probable change state and a small hit) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation group table E, E'(in the case of a probable change state and a small hit) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end processing which concerns on the modification of 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end processing which concerns on the modification of 15th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the jackpot probability and effect pattern which concerns on 16th Embodiment for each setting (each setting value). It is a figure which illustrates another example of the jackpot probability and the effect pattern which concerns on 16th Embodiment for each setting (each setting value). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variation effect setting processing which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half notice distribution group table change processing which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is another example of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half notice distribution group table change processing which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the latter half notice distribution group table which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead variation system command processing which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead effect distribution table setting processing which concerns on 16th Embodiment. This is another example of a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process according to the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the look-ahead effect distribution table which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the lucky number distribution table which concerns on 16th Embodiment. In the 16th embodiment, it is a figure which illustrates the change pattern of the lucky number distribution table set corresponding to a set value and the previous lucky number. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting processing which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variation pattern setting process which concerns on the modification of the 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variation group table change processing which concerns on the modification of the 16th Embodiment. It is another example of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the variation group table change processing which concerns on the modification of the 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the variation group table which concerns on the modification of the 16th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the game machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen by the player during the game.

[Overall view of the game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The game machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge. The opening / closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30 can be accessed. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

In the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, a decorative device 1 capable of producing light emission according to the game state 1
8a and 18b are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the game machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the game machine 10 and projects forward (on the player side) is arranged. Protruding production unit 1
Reference numeral 3 denotes an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. Protruding production unit 13
The lighting member arranged inside the frame also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25.
It is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory in advance. The variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply a variable display game, it is referred to as a special figure variable display game in this specification.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during the non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special game state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific game state, a state in which a special result (for example, a big hit) is likely to occur in a variable display game (probability change state, a probability fluctuation state), or a big hit state (a big hit state).
Special game state), small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Further, it may be possible to always generate a probabilistic state when a big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate a probabilistic state by a big hit symbol random number, or to provide a winning device or the like provided with a specific area to specify. A probabilistic state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated when a player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is a button for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the game machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 is a device that houses a lighting member such as an LED inside and performs a light emitting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on the front side portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored in the lower part of the front frame 12 below the glass frame 15 provided with the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launcher launches a game ball into the game area (speed).
The firing force can be changed in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be launched in various firing modes having different firing forces. The launch mode includes a left-handed hit (normal hit) in which the game ball is allowed to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and a right-handed hit in which the game ball is caused to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball extraction hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball extraction hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball pulling hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball pulling hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board main body 30a is used.
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of a. The game machine 10 is configured to launch a game ball from a ball launcher into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, an effect display device (variable display device) that variablely displays (variablely displays) a plurality of identification information.
Display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the displayed contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and a character that directs the variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40.
An inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the inside of the warp passage 40e and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37,
The game ball that has rolled on the stage portion 40b can easily win a prize in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper part and the right side of the center case 40, respectively. Upper effect unit 40c and side effect unit 40d
Consists of a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to these general winning openings 35 is performed by the winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35.
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided, and a second starting winning opening (second start winning area) is provided immediately below the start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36. An ordinary variable winning device 37 provided with a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts the game ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory, and rotates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. It opens and changes to an open state in which the game ball easily flows into the normally variable winning device 37 (a winning state that is advantageous for the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of a winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map variation display game and setting the hit probability of the normal map variation display game to a higher probability than usual, or a normal game state. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the above-mentioned specific game state, a time-saving state (general electric support state) is generated. In addition, the probability change state (
Even in the latent probability change state), the time saving state (Public electricity support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 at the lower right of the normal variable winning device 37, the large winning opening solenoid (39b) (
A special variable winning device 39 having an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that opens the large winning opening by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side is provided. The special variable prize device 39 converts the large prize opening from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and wins a large prize. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the mouth, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. A count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the large winning opening as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. In addition, the large winning opening is illuminated in the large winning opening of the special variable winning device 39 and in the vicinity of the large winning opening (around the large winning opening).
One or more large winning opening LEDs 39d (full color LED) are arranged.

General winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 39
When a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges a number of prize balls according to the type of the winning winning opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. In addition, the ordinary variable winning device 3
In the game area 32 below 7, the out port 30 for collecting the game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like
b is provided.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided. The batch display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state (see FIG. 2B).

FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the configuration of the batch display device 50. The batch display device 50 is a first special figure fluctuation display unit 5 for a fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like.
1 (Special Figure 1 Display, Lamp D1) and 2nd Special Figure Fluctuation Display 52 (Special Figure 2 Display, Lamp D)
2) and the fluctuation display unit 53 for the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map display, lamps D8, D10, D)
18) and a storage display unit (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, normal figure hold display 56) for starting (holding) storage number notification of each variation display game. ing. Special figure 1 The hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. Special figure 2 Hold indicator 55 is lamp D
It is composed of 13 and D14. The normal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

Further, the batch display device 50 is provided with a first game status display unit 57 (first game status indicator, lamp) that notifies that it is a right-handed hit (when it should be right-handed) or a left-handed hit (when it should be hit normally). D7),
When the time saving state occurs, the second game state display unit 58 (second game state display, lamp D17) that lights up to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and the jackpot probability state becomes a high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. Third game status display unit 59 (third game status display, probability status display unit, lamp D9) that displays the fact that the game is playing, and a round display that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 39 is opened and closed). Section 60 (lamps D3-D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variation display game is executed by the variation display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit.
It may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when a variable display is executed, all the LEDs provided as a display are all turned on and off (all LEDs are blinking at the same time) or circularly turned on (any of them). It may be turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals from one LED), or may be turned on and off (blinking) or circulated by a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs. Also in the normal diagram display 53, the variation display game is executed by the variation display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the normal figure display 53 is also a special figure 1 display 5
1. It can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later), and start of each special figure variation display game. (Hold) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of stored items. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)) as a variable display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display 53 of the batch display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 hold LED 1, special figure 1 hold LED 2) display the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) according to the combination of the off state, the lit state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 hold LED 1, special figure 2 hold LED 2) display the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) depending on the combination of the off state, the lit state, and the blinking state. To do. The lamp display unit 3-6 ends the display of the number of holds due to the occurrence of a big hit, but displays the number of holds when the display device 41 is not in the state of a big hit (including the case where the display device 41 has a reach described later). Do.

Next, the flow of the game in the game machine 10, the normal map variation display game, and the special map variation display game will be described in detail.

In the game machine 10, a game is performed by launching a game ball toward the game area 32 from a ball launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening. 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39 is won, or the ball flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 39, a number of winning balls corresponding to the type of winning winning opening is dispensed through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

The normal drawing start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state in which the normal map fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been played and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or when the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, it is normal. When the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, the storage number is added (+1) if the normal drawing start storage number is less than the upper limit number.

The hit judgment random value for determining the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored in the normal figure start memory, and when the hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal figure change display is displayed. The game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal map variation display game is executed by the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50. The normal figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (normal figure) is lit and a deviation when the normal identification information (normal figure) is off, and the normal identification information fluctuates by blinking the LED. The display is performed, and after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the normal figure display 53 stops in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game.
A game ball that has won a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The number of special figure start prize memories stored is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and the display device 4
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.
Run a variable display game.

The special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) have identification information (identification information) on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. This is performed by displaying the special symbol (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the predetermined result mode. Also,
In the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game for varyingly displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) corresponding to each special figure variation display game is executed.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started, the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various effect displays such as the appearance of characters in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol is displayed by repeating (blinking) the lighting display and the extinguishing display on the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80. fluctuate. The fluctuation display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is stopped after a predetermined time from the start by "turning off" in the case of a miss and "lighting" in the case of a big hit or a small hit.

When the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and a jackpot state (big hit state)
It becomes a special game state). Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). That is, the large winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 opens wide until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, during which the player is given the privilege of being able to acquire a large number of game balls. To.

When the game ball is won in the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result of the above, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and the small hit state is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning device 39 changes the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). Since the full opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), the game that the player can acquire in the small hit state than in the big hit state. Value (number of balls acquired)
Less is. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called the first special gaming state, and the small hit state may be called the second special gaming state.

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate indicators or the same indicator, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed in different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is prevented from being executed at the same time. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a memory of starting the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure variation display game can be executed, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36 is not particularly limited.
a, The start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch (39a) in the normal variable winning device 37 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is used as a machine. Microswitches with similar contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10.
The game control device 100 includes 0 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is a CPU unit having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
It includes a U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of a CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. , Game microcomputer 11
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and controls signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. The control signal generation unit 430 and the like are provided.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integrally with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By setting 0, it is possible to exclude from the exchange target and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power failure. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) has a setting key switch 93 that makes it possible to change a set value related to a game condition (game) by turning it on by an operator's rotation operation or the like, and according to the operator's operation. Setting value change switch 102 that can change the setting value related to the game conditions
And. In the present embodiment, the set value related to the game condition (game) is the probability set value of the jackpot probability, but the game conditions other than the jackpot probability (small hit probability, probability variation inrush rate, etc.) also depend on the probability set value. It can be changed. The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are
A setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing a setting (setting value) related to a game condition is configured. In the present embodiment, the touch switch signal of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is used as the confirmation signal for confirming the set value, but an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) is used. The signal from the confirmation button switch may be provided in the game control device 100 and used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value.

The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 and are arranged at a position (inaccessible position) that cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Will be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102. In the present embodiment, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided so as to be assembled on the game control device 100, but the front frame 1 such as on the power supply board of the power supply device 400 is provided.
2 (main body frame) may be provided at a position that cannot be accessed unless it is opened.

When the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 9 is opened.
When 3 is on, the operator can change the setting value switch 102 (setting value change button).
By operating, it is possible to change the settings (set values) related to the game conditions such as the probability of a big hit and the probability variation inrush rate. That is, when the power is turned on, the state in which the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on becomes a setting variable state in which the setting (setting value) can be changed. In a normal procedure, when the operator opens the front frame 12 and rotates the setting key switch 93 to turn it on and turn on the power, the setting becomes a variable state corresponding to the state in which the setting is being changed. The variable setting state may be notified by voice from the speaker. When the power is turned on, the state in which the glass frame 15 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on may be set as a variable setting state, or both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. The state may be set to a variable state.

In the present embodiment, the setting values related to the game conditions are defined in 6 stages, and the setting value 1 (setting 1), the setting value 2 (setting 2), the setting value 3 (setting 3), the setting value 4 (setting 4), There are a setting value 5 (setting 5) and a setting value 6 (setting 6). The setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous setting for the player, and the setting value 6
Is the most advantageous setting for the player. The setting values 1 and 2 are low settings, the setting values 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and the setting values 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the setting value change process, the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button) is used by the operator.
Each time is operated, the set value (setting) is set as set value 1 → set value 2 → set value 3 → set value 4 → set value 5 → set value 6 → set value 1 → set value 2 → ... Change to and select. Instead of operating the set value change button, the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the set value. Moreover, the set value is not limited to 6 steps. Then, the selected set values 1 to 6 are displayed on the probability set value display device 143 or the like, which is a 7-segment type display. The probability setting value display device 143 is provided with a setting value change switch 102 via an electric circuit.
The display may be changed in conjunction with the operation of. As will be described later, the selected set values 1 to 6 are displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 for the fluctuation display game of the batch display device 50. May be good.

When the operator touches the operation handle 24, the touch switch signal is transmitted to the game control device 1.
When it is input to 00, the selected (changed) set value (that is, the setting) is confirmed and stored in the probability set value area in the RWM (storage means), and the set value change process ends. Regardless of the touch switch signal, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off after the set value is changed or a predetermined time elapses after the setting is changed to the variable state, the game control device 100 determines the set value (that is, the setting) and stores it. It is also possible to configure it.

On the other hand, after the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is rotated to change from the off state to the on state, the set value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state).
become. In the set value confirmation mode, the set value displayed on the probability set value display device 143 can be confirmed. The selected set values 1 to 6 may be displayed and confirmed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 for the variation display game of the batch display device 50. .. The set value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be notified by voice from the speaker.

The setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button) is a RAM initialization switch (RA).
It can also be used as an M clear switch), and if the initialization switch is in the ON state when the power is turned on (power restoration), an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the game microcomputer 11
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in 1 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and RA that can be read and written at any time
It includes M (random access memory) 111c.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination value of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111c is a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. ROM111b or RAM11
As 1c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the game machine 10
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expected value is different), normal reach (normal reach)
N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected degree of jackpot (expected value) increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach.
In addition, the reach state is at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variation display game (
It is included in the variable display mode in (when it becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot of a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. With a random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining fluctuation patterns in symbol random numbers and special figure fluctuation display games (including execution time of fluctuation display games in various reach and fluctuation display without reach) The clock generator is provided to generate a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a is the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the start memory number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, CPU 11
1a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out.
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal drawing start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning opening 36. Switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a in the second start winning opening 37
, Connected to the winning opening switch 35a, the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39,
An interface chip (proximity I) that inputs a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.
/ F) 121 is provided.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F1
Of the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a are the third input port 1.
It is input to 24.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, the second input port 123 includes a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. A signal is input from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main body frame), and the like. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine so that the detection signal is input to the second input port 123.

Further, the second input port 123 (input port 3) takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102, and is a gaming microcomputer via the data bus 140. Supply to 111.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The game microcomputer 1 takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the out ball detection switch signal from the out ball detection switch via the data bus 140.
A first input port 122 for supplying to 11 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23. The frame radio wave invalid signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal is in a state where the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not. In this embodiment
The out-ball detection switch (not shown) detects all the game balls that have been fired into the game area and finished the game. The out ball detection switch (not shown) may detect only the game ball passing through the out port 30b.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is output from the output unit 13.
It is supplied to each port of 0. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is used for the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 is not supplied. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 receives open / close data of a solenoid (normal electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal variable winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 39b to open the special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 for output is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. On / on the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the game machine 10 such as jackpot information at the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and provides information about the game machine 10 to the outside. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 141 (probability set value display output port) for outputting information on the set value (probability set value) to the probability set value display device 143.
In the present embodiment, the probability set value display device 143 is a 7-segment type display (LED lamp), and the information of the set value (probability set value) is transmitted from the sixth output port 141 to the driver (the driver (LED lamp).
It may be output to the probability set value display device 143 via the LED driver).

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the normal electric solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
The current supply side segment of the batch display device 50 output from the first driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135 that generate and output the solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of c and the grand prize opening solenoid 39b. Second driver 1 that outputs a line on / off drive signal
38b, the third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137 supply to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d is provided to output the external information signal to be output to the external information terminal 71.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. In addition, the batch display device 50
DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the above. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. Fourth, which outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71
Since the driver 138d gives a level of 12V to the external information signal, DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 250. Photocoupler 13
Reference numeral 9 denotes a game microcomputer 111, which is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication with the inspection device 250. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives a serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and a driver 150 that drives the status display device 152. It is provided. In the present embodiment, the status display device 152 is composed of a plurality of (4) 7-segment type (8-segment type including the point portion) display (LED lamp), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

Although the status display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may be provided in another place. For example, the status display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment type (
It is an 8-segment type display including the point part), and can display the accessory ratio, the ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls. The status display device 152 is not limited to directly displaying the bonus ball ratio, the ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls, but may also indirectly display the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the bonus ball ratio. Good.
That is, the state display device 152 only needs to be able to display information on the accessory ratio, the ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls).
It is the total of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the number of game balls that have passed through the out opening 30b. The number of ejected balls is basically the same as the number of launched balls, which is the number of game balls launched from the ball launching device into the game area 32. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch. In the present embodiment, the winning opening is the general winning opening 35,
The starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and the special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) are included. The number of ejected balls is displayed as a countdown, (100-number of ejected balls) is displayed, and only up to 100 (predetermined number) are counted. The number of ejected balls may be counted up and displayed from "00" to "99".

The ball output rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of launched balls).
It is calculated by multiplying the number of acquired balls by the number of ejected balls (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 ejected balls.

In the present embodiment, the ball ejection rate is simply obtained from the number of acquired balls between the number of ejected balls from 0 to 100 each time the number of ejected balls reaches 100. That is, the number of ejected balls is counted only up to 100 (predetermined number). In addition, every time the number of ejected balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate is updated to the latest payout rate until the number of ejected balls changes from 1 to 100. As a result, if the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) is displayed as it is on the status display device 152, the payout rate will be displayed.

For example, the bonus ratio is in the jackpot state out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning a prize in the winning opening during a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (= so-called continuous character ratio) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening. The bonus ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize opening (= the large winning opening ratio) to the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large prize opening and the ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= the so-called bonus ratio (total bonus ratio) commonly used )) May be used.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
Is a block diagram of the effect control system of the game machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , A sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output is provided in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
Program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read-only memory), RAM 322 that provides a work area, Fe that can retain stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure.
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 of the output video content, and uses the sound source LSI 314.
It executes processing such as instructing the playback sound to, turning on the decorative lamp, controlling the drive of the motor and solenoid, and managing the production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, the synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I / F3
The decorative special figure hold number command, the decorative special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the game control device 100 are received as the effect control command signal (effect command). .. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5.
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at V and operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). Frame decoration LED control circuit 333, game board 3 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an provided LED (light emitting diode).
Board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41) provided at 0 (including the center case 40)
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a movable accessory (such as a movable accessory) that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display in the above. The panel decoration device 46 includes the lamp display device 8 described above.
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the 335 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the motor or the like. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. In addition, DC-
The DC converter may be usually provided in the power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPSET signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, and the like are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the game machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00 extracts a random value for hit determination in the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34 and stores it in the ROM 111b. It is compared with the judgment value that is set, and the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after displaying the identification symbol in a variable time for a predetermined time on the normal map display, a normal map variation display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example,). (0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the start winning (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is made based on the starting memory. The random value for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / miss of the special figure 1 variation display game.

Further, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is memorized based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 after the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100.
That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Let me. In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111a
For example, the large winning opening solenoid 39b opens the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 to control the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the time saving operation state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled as compared with the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operating state. Since the game is controlled so that the opening time of the game is substantially increased, the game is in the normal power support state. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the time saving state is duplicated and the normal electric support is executed.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time)
Is possible to shorten the time to make the second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is set to the first.
Second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so as to be.

Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening time (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map variation display game (normal figure probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. In addition, the movable member 3 is in a normal operating state.
It may be set so that 7b is not opened (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as "A ***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 3 (second input port 123) (A1006). As a result, the setting key switch 93,
Set value change switch 102, glass frame open detection switch 63, front frame open detection switch 6
The signal from 4 (main body frame open detection switch) can be read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 that serves as a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer.
Waiting time (for example, 3) for waiting until the program of the slave control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instruction from 00 starts normally.
Seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and delays the activation of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 3).
It serves as a waiting means for setting a predetermined waiting time for waiting for the activation of (00, etc.).

Further, the timing of the power delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, a part of R
Since it is not necessary to exclude the AM region for calculation, it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

The setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102 are input to the second input port 123 (input port 3), and the standby time By reading the state of the second input port 123 before the start of, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 is operated or the power is turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 from the time until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation, and the setting key switch 93 performed at the time of turning on the power. And the situation where the operation of the setting value change switch 102 is not accepted can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A).
1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus and checks the number of times (
For example, twice) is set (A1008), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1).
009).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on, the game control device 100 (the result of A1009 is "Y".
”), It is determined whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008 (A1010). Then, if the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal has been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 is a game machine. Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the power failure monitoring signal is not turned on (the result of A1009 is "
N "), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1011), and it is determined whether or not the timer value is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked in step A1008.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is "Y"".
), That is, when the standby time has expired, access to RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM that can be read and written is permitted (A1013), and off-data is output to all output ports (state where there is no output). (Set to) (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, the driver 15 for driving the status display device 152
Initially set to 0 (A1016).

Here, the game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED of the status display device 152. The control data corresponding to the duty ratio is used in the duty setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver). In order to save power and darken each LED, the duty ratio of the driver 150 may be made smaller than usual. Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of digits used in the status display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four. The control data corresponding to the number of digits used is used in the digit number setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017). And if it is normal (A101
The result of 7 is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. The calculation process is executed (A1019), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power failure match (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the RAM 111c is normal, and the RAM clear start address 2 is set (A1021).

FIG. 5C is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 5C, the RAM clear start address 2 is set so as to exclude the probability set value area from the RAM area to be cleared. Due to the RAM clear start address 2, the RAM area to be cleared becomes the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 2 includes a random number area, a control information area, and a game control stack area. The random number area includes an initial value random number area that stores various initial value random numbers, and an initial value random number area.
Includes a variation pattern random number area that stores variation pattern random numbers. The control information area is an area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area, and includes the power failure inspection area 1, the power failure inspection area 2, the checksum area, and the like. The random number area may be excluded from the clear area # 2. The clear area # 2 includes a status display work area for storing information to be displayed on the status display device 152 such as the accessory ratio, and a status display stack area for processing the information to be displayed on the status display device 152. I can't.

In FIG. 5C, an unused area may be provided between the game control work area and the game control stack area, which are composed of a probability setting value area, a random number area, and a control information area. Further, an unused area may be provided between the status display work area and the status display stack area. Also,
The status display stack area may be arranged at the end of the address of the RAM 111c, and the unused area at the end of FIG. 5C (the bottom of FIG. 5C) may be eliminated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state, in the setting changing state) (A1022). When the probability setting is being changed (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the process during the probability setting change in steps A1036-A1041. When the probability setting value changing flag (A1038) is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value is being changed.

When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting (the result of A1022 is "N"),
It is determined whether or not the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state (A1023). When the signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) is input, the front frame 1
It can be determined that 2 (main body frame) is in the open state. In step A1023, the front frame 1
Instead of 2, it may be determined whether or not the glass frame 15 is in the open state, or whether or not both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are in the open state may be determined. When the signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 is input, it can be determined that the glass frame 15 is in the open state.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state (the result of A1023 is “Y”) (A1024).
When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is "Y"), the setting (setting value) can be changed. Therefore, the RAM is initially set in the variable setting state of steps A1036-A1041. The conversion process (RAM clear process) and the process during setting change are executed.

In the game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is not in the open state (in the closed state).
(The result of A1023 is "N"), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (A102).
The result of 4 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the set value change switch 102 is turned on (A1).
025). When the setting value change switch 102 is not turned on (the result of A1025 is "N".
”), The normal power-on (power-restored) process of steps A1031-A1035 is executed.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the set value change switch 102 is turned on (A1).
The result of 025 is "Y"), and the process of RAM initialization (RAM clear) in steps A1042-A1045 is executed. Here, since the setting value change switch 102 is operated (pressed) and turned on when the power is turned on in the off state of the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102 is a RAM initialization switch ( It will be used as a RAM clear switch). It should be noted that there is actually no situation in which the set value change switch 102 is turned on when the front frame 12 is in the closed state (the result of A1023 is “N”). The setting value change switch 102, which can also function as an initialization switch, serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100
However, it serves as an initialization means for initializing the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is "N" or the result of A1018 is "N"), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1020 is "N"), the abnormality of the RAM 111c has occurred, and the process proceeds to the process of coping with the RAM abnormality after step A1026. First, R
AM clear start address 1 is set (A1026). As shown in FIG. 5C, since the RAM clear start address 1 is the start address of the game control work area, the probability set value area is also included in the RAM area to be cleared. R to be cleared by RAM clear start address 1
The AM area is set to the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 1 includes a game control work area (composed of a probability setting value area, a random number area, and a control information area), and a game control stack area. The clear area # 1 does not include a status display work area for storing information to be displayed on the status display device 152 and a status display stack area for processing information to be displayed on the status display device 152.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state (A1027). When a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) is input, it can be determined that the front frame 12 is in the open state.

In the game control device 100, when the front frame 12 is in the open state (the result of A1027 is "Y".
”), The setting key switch 93 determines whether or not it is on (A1028). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1028 is "Y"), the setting value can be changed. Therefore, the RAM in the setting variable state of steps A1036-A1041.
Executes initialization processing (RAM clear processing) and processing during setting change. RA in this case
The RAM area to be cleared in the M initialization process is the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C. Therefore,
RAM abnormality can be resolved.

In the game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is not in the open state (in the closed state).
(The result of A1027 is "N"), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (A102)
The result of 8 is “N”), and a command for instructing the player to change the setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1029). The effect control device 300 that has received the setting change instruction command displays a setting change instruction display on the display device 41 that prompts the player to change the setting. The setting change instruction display turns on the setting key switch 93 when the player tries to change the setting (the result of A1028 is "Y"), and the RAM clear process (A1036) at the time of setting change eliminates the RAM abnormality. it can.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (A10).
30) Wait until the power of the game machine is turned off.

Next, the process at the time of normal power-on (power restoration) in steps A1031-A1035 will be described.

The game control device 100 first saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (
A1031). The area to be initialized is the clear area # 2 (random number area, control information area, game control stack area) of FIG. 5C. Here, in the control information area, the power failure inspection area,
A checksum area and an area related to error fraud monitoring are included. The payout control device 200
The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the command can be accepted, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the game control device 100 examines an area in the RWM that stores the game state and determines whether or not the game state is a high-probability state (A1032).

Here, when the game state is not a high probability state (the result of A1032 is “N”), the game control device 100 skips the processes of step A1033 and step A1034 and shifts to the process of step A1035. If the gaming state is a high probability state (A1)
The result of 032 is "Y"), and the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1033).
For example, the on (lighting) data of the high-probability notification LED (third game state display unit 59, error display) provided in the batch display device 50 is saved in the segment area (A1034). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1035), and in step A1046. Move to processing.

Next, the RAM initialization process (RAM) in the variable setting state of steps A1036-A1041.
Clear processing) and processing during setting change will be described.

The game control device 100 first clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1036).
.. The RAM area to be cleared is the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C because the RAM clear start address 2 is set when the RAM 111c is normal (the result of A1020 is “Y”).
Will be. When the RAM 111c is abnormal (the result of A1020 is "N"), the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C is obtained. That is, RAM
The probability set value area is not cleared when it is normal, but the probability set value area is also cleared when the RAM is abnormal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1037). At this point, it is assumed that the front frame 12 is in the open state, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Make it possible to output what has been done to an external device (hall computer, etc.). If the probability set value area is cleared when the RAM is abnormal, the default value (for example, set value 1) may be saved as an initial value in the probability set value area.

Then, the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changing flag indicating that the setting can be changed (that is, the setting is being changed) (A1038).
Subsequently, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area as the initial data when the probability setting value is changed (A1039), the value in the probability setting value area is loaded, and the probability setting value is loaded. Saved in the working probability setting value area as initial data at the time of change (A104)
0). Subsequently, a command during the probability setting change indicating that the setting is in the variable state (probability setting is being changed) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1041), and step A104 is performed.
Move to the process of 6. By the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 can recognize that the setting is in the variable state (probability setting is being changed).

Next, the RAM initialization (RAM clear) process by the RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch, set value change switch 102) in steps A1042-A1045 will be described.

The game control device 100 first sets the RAM clear start address 2 (A1042), and then sets the RAM clear start address 2.
The RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A1043). Since the clear start address 2 is set, the RAM area RAM to be cleared is the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C. Therefore, the RAM is initialized by operating the RAM initialization switch (set value change switch 102).
In the process of RAM clear), the probability set value area is not cleared.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1044). Here, the area to be initialized is, for example, a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is produced by the effect control device 300.
It is transmitted to (effect control board) (A1045), and the process proceeds to step A1046.

The command at the time of power failure recovery and step A1 transmitted in the process of step A1035.
The commands at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of 045 include a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine, a decorative special figure 1 hold number command indicating the number of holds of special figures 1 and 2, and a decorative special figure 2 hold number. Includes commands and probability information commands that indicate the state of the probability. In addition, depending on the state when the power is turned off or turned on, the recovery screen command is used when the special figure fluctuation display game is running when the power is turned off, and the customer waiting demo command is used when waiting for customers when the power is turned off. Includes a power-on command to indicate that the power has been turned on. Further, depending on the model, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode, an effect number information command, and a high probability number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the high probability state are included. The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). Upon receiving the RAM initialization command (RAM clear command), the effect control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and initializes the RAM (RAM) with the sound of the LED and the speaker of the board decoration device 46 or the like. Clear) notification 3
Perform for 0 seconds.

Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery and the command at the time of RAM initialization include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information which is information on the setting value (probability setting value) of the game machine 10. Is done. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

After the processing of steps A1035, A1041, and A1045, the game control device 100 installs a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator). Start (A104
6). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process in step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (CTC) in the random number generation circuit
The setting of the code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in the update permission register) is C.
This is done by PU111a. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol). Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), random number that determines the small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (win random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (win symbol random number) Etc.) as the initial value (start value) and save it in the specified area of RWM (A1048)
), Allow interrupts (A1049). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is C
It is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the PU. CTC (C) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing
It is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on TC2)).

Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed.
That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step A1050, the game control device 100 is the power supply device 40.
The number of times to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from 0 via the port and the data bus is set (A1051), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A10).
52). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1052 is "N"), step A
The process returns to the initial value random number update process of 1050. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1050) (A1049), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on interrupt processing by making it wait by the value random number update processing. While the setting is being changed (during the variable setting state), it is not necessary to execute the processes of steps A1046, A1047, A1048, and A1050 related to the initial value random number update.

In the initial value random number update process of step A1050, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value random number is used in both cases. In order to prevent the update process from being executed, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1052 is "Y"), the game control device 10
0 determines whether or not the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1051 (A1053). Then, if the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is "N"), the process returns to step A1052 to determine whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100 interrupts once when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is "Y"), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. (A1054) and output off-data to all output ports (A105)
5).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1056), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1056).
A1057). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1058), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1059).
). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1060), and the game waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111c capable of storing data and a RAM 111c.
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111c based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, and The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from register bank 0 used in main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals, and so on.
That is, the input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). further,
Solenoid (Large winning opening solenoid 39b) based on the output data set by various processes
Output processing for performing drive control of the actuator such as (A1304) is executed. If a firing prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process,
By performing this output processing, a launch permission signal is output, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 has a random number update process 1 (A1305) and a random number update process 2 (A1).
306) is executed. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. It is not necessary to execute the random number update process 1 and the random number update process 2 when the probability setting is being changed (the setting is in the variable state).
After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a, and monitoring of errors (front frame and The winning opening switch / status monitoring process for performing (whether the glass frame is not opened, etc.) is executed (A1307).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a probability setting value changing process for changing the probability setting value (A1308). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state) (A1309). Whether or not the probability setting is being changed is indicated by the probability setting value changing flag (A103).
It can be determined by 8). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being confirmed (the setting is being confirmed) (A1310). When the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode described later is set,
It can be determined that the probability setting is being confirmed.

When the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (A131).
The result of 0 is "N"), and the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes is issued by the payout control device 2.
The payout command transmission process to be output to 00 is executed (A1311). Further, a special figure game process for performing processing related to the special figure variation display game is executed (A1312), and then a normal figure game process for performing processing related to the normal figure variation display game is executed (A1313). Game control device 10
0 is not necessary when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A1309 is "Y") or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1310 is "Y"), so the payout command transmission process (A)
1311), the special figure game process (A1312), and the normal figure game process (A1313) are not executed, and the process proceeds to the process of step A1314.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a segment LED editing process which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. (A1314).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315). For example, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, the magnet fraud generation flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area when an abnormality occurs. Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1316). For example, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, when an abnormality occurs, the board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1317). Then, the state display edit output process for editing and outputting the output data to the state display device 152 is executed (A1318). In the state display edit output process, the accessory ratio, the ball output rate, the number of ejected balls, and the like may be calculated as the output data to the state display device 152. In the status display edit output process, if the checksum of the status display work area is calculated when the power is turned on (power recovery) and does not match the checksum when the power is turned off, the status display work area and the status display are used. You may clear the stack area. afterwards,
Terminates timer interrupt processing. When returning the timer interrupt processing, the interrupt disabled state is restored and the register bank specification is restored automatically, but the CP to be used is used.
Depending on the U, after the external information editing process, a process of permitting an interrupt or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output processing (A1304) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

The game control device 100 first outputs (reset) off-data to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (A1601).
Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the large winning opening solenoid 39b is combined and output (A1602).

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output / external information output (A1606). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is loaded into the third output port 135 for segment output.
Output to (A1608).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further synthesizes the synthesized data and the output data of the launch permission (A161).
0), 5th output port 137 for outputting external information / launch permission signal from the finally synthesized data
Is output to (A1611).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the off output data of the probability set value display (A161).
2). The off output data is output data (blank data for turning off the lights) during the period when the probability set value is not displayed. Then, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value display permission flag that permits the display of the probability setting value is set (A1613). The probability set value display permission flag is set in the probability set value change process described later.

The game control device 100 has (A16) when the probability set value display permission flag is set.
The result of 13 is "Y"), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (A1614), and the loaded probability setting value display data is sent to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141). Output (A1615). When the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (the result of A1613 is "N"), the probability setting value display data is not loaded and the off output data is displayed as the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141). Output to (A161)
5). Therefore, when the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, and when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, the probability setting value display device 143 is displayed. Turns off (blank display).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, synthesizes the data, and synthesizes the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output to (A1618). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619
). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620), the output process is terminated.

After that, the game control device 100 loads the test signal output data of the probability set value (A1).
621). Here, as the test signal output data related to the probability setting value, the display data itself of the probability setting value display device 143 (7-segment type display), that is, the probability setting value display data in the probability setting value display data area is output. The test signal output data may be numerical data (1 to 6) representing a set value, or may be output data of another form. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1622). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1622 is "Y"), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (A1623), and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 6 (A1623).
A1624). On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1622 is "
N ”), the test signal output data of the probability set value is output to the test signal output port 6 as it is (N”).
A1624).

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The winning port switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state) (A2001). When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting (A2001)
The result of is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being confirmed (the setting is being confirmed) (A20).
02). When the probability setting is not being confirmed (the result of A2001 is "N"), the monitoring process from steps A2003 to A2010 is executed as usual. On the other hand, the glass frame 15 may be released when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2001 is “Y”) or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A2002 is “Y”). Since there is a possibility that a game ball can be inserted into one of the winning openings by hand and there is no point in performing monitoring processing, etc., step A20
The process proceeds to step A2011 without executing the monitoring processes from 03 to A2010.

When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting (the result of A2001 is "N"),
A winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 39) is prepared (A2003). Then, even though the large winning opening is not open, the fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting whether or not there is an illegal winning in the large winning opening is executed (A2004).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 39) (A2005).
Then, the fraudulent and winning monitoring process for monitoring the fraudulent winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2006).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2007). Then, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process for monitoring the fraudulent winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2008). Subsequently, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (A2009). The winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch (SW) 35a of the general winning opening 35.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a winning number counter update process for updating the winning number (
A2010). Then, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches for monitoring the state and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (A2011). The status scan counter is updated in the range 0-3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2012). Then, a game machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2013).
.. The details of the game machine state check process will be described later.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc. (switch abnormality) (1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (shoot ball burnout error) based on the shoot ball burnout switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. Status scan counter value is 2
If is, the monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state based on the payout abnormality status signal (payout abnormality error) is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the game machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2014). Then, a game machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2015).

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame opening error) based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch is monitored. Is set and the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (main unit frame opening error, front frame opening error) based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave invalid signal (frame radio wave invalidity) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2016). And if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (A2016)
The result of is "N"), and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the game machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

Further, the game control device 100 determines (A2) when the value of the error scan counter is 0.
The result of 016 is "Y"), the game machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (A2017), and the game machine state check process for determining the state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2018).
..

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 3, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality). 2 error) monitoring is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counters are 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2019). ), End the winning opening switch / status monitoring process.

Since the processes from steps A2017 to A2019 are executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, they are executed once every four timer interrupts. .. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, 1
The processes from A2017 to A2019 will be performed every 6 ms.

In addition, in the fraud & prize monitoring process (A2008), a large prize opening (special variable prize device 39)
) And the number of winning balls for each character (total number of winning balls) related to the normal variable winning device 37 are counted and stored, and information on the number of winnings and the number of balls acquired for each character is set as an effect command. Good.
In the winning number counter update process (A2010), the number of winnings related to the starting winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 and the number of winning balls by character (total number of winning balls) are counted and stored, and further, the number of winnings and each character Information on the number of acquired balls may be set as an effect command. Further, in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (FIG. 8), the number of out balls (number of ejected balls) is counted and stored by the out ball detection switch, and the information on the number of out balls is further output as a production command (out ball number command). May be set as. The payout rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired for each role) to the number of discharged balls. The bonus ratio is, for example, the ratio (%) (= so-called continuous bonus ratio) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls won by the bonus) obtained by winning the big prize opening out of the total number of prize balls. is there. In the state display edit output process (A1318), the accessory ratio, the payout rate, the number of ejected balls, and the like may be calculated as the output data to the state display device 152.

[Game machine status check process]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game machine state check process. The game machine status check process is performed in step A2013 in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG.
It is executed in A2015 and A2018.

The game control device 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2201). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 according to the gaming state. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (
A2202). When the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2202 is "N"), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2203), and the target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2204). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2205). The state off flag indicates a normal state for an error-type signal, and indicates a non-touch state for a touch switch signal.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (the result of A2202 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the state on flag as the state flag (A2206), acquires the target state on command, and prepares it. (A2207). Further, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2208). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or invalid state for an error-type signal, and indicates a touched state for a touch switch signal.

When the process of step A2205 or step A2208 is completed, the game control device 100
Determines whether or not the value of the target signal control region matches the state of the acquired signal (A2).
209). If they match (the result of A2209 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2212. If they do not match (A2209 result is "N"), the acquired signal status is saved in the target signal control area (A2210), and the target status monitoring timer is cleared (A2210).
A2211).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2212).
.. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated condition monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2213). If the updated status monitoring timer value is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is "N"), the game machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the updated status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the status monitoring timer by -1 and the timer comparison value-. Keep the value at 1 (A2214). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (A2215). If they match (A221)
The result of 5 is "Y"), and the game machine status check process is completed.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2215 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2216). Finally, the effect command setting process for setting the effect command is executed (A2217), and the game machine status check process is completed. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state-on command is an error-type command, the effect control device 300 is started to notify the error. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, the details of the probability set value change process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability set value changing process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability set value is being changed (the setting is in the variable state) (A2401). When the probability setting value is not being changed (the result of A2401 is "N"),
The probability set value confirmation process for confirming the probability set value is executed (A2402).

When the game control device 100 is changing the probability set value (the result of A2401 is "Y").
If the probability set value extinguishing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (A2403), and it is determined whether or not the probability set value extinguishing timer is 0 (A2404). When the probability set value extinguishing timer is 0 (the result of A2404 is "Y"), the probability set value display permission flag is set (A2405).
The process proceeds to step A2406. When the probability set value off timer is not 0 (A24)
The result of 04 is "N"), nothing is done, and the process proceeds to step A2406.

Then, in step A2406, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability set value has been changed (A2406). When the probability setting value changed flag described later is set, the probability setting value has been changed. When the probability setting value has been changed (A2)
The result of 406 is "Y"), and the process of completing the setting change in steps A2416 to A2421 is executed.

In the game control device 100, when the probability set value has not been changed (the result of A2406 is "N".
”), It is determined whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch 102 (A2407). When there is no input from the set value change switch 102 (the result of A2407 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2411.

The game control device 100 receives an input from the set value change switch 102 (A240).
The result of 7 is "Y"), and the value of the probability setting value area for work is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5 (A24).
08). In this way, each time the setting value change switch 102 is operated, the value of the working probability setting value area is increased by 1. When the setting value change switch 102 is operated after the value of the working probability setting value area becomes 5, the value of the working probability setting value area may return to 0.
The values 0 to 5 in the working probability setting value region correspond to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in 6 stages. The probability setting value is not limited to 6 steps.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2409). Next, the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability set value extinguishing timer area (A2410). This initial value corresponds to the extinguishing period (blank period) in which the probability setting value display device 143 is extinguished (blank display).

In this way, when the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0, by setting the probability setting value display permission flag, the probability setting value display data becomes the probability setting value (working probability setting value) during the setting change. It is displayed on the set value display device 143, and when the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, the probability setting value display device 143 is extinguished. Since the set value change switch 102 (set value change button) is turned off for a predetermined turn-off period after the probability set value off timer operates, even if there is only one step of setting (when the set value is only 1). , The probability setting value display device 143 can visually confirm that the setting value change switch 102 has been operated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of a touch switch signal from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (A2411). When there is no input of the touch switch signal (the result of A2411 is "N"), the probability setting value change process is terminated. When there is an input of the touch switch signal (the result of A2411 is "Y"), the value in the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (A2412). The touch switch signal is a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. Then, the values 0 to 5 corresponding to the determined probability set value are stored in the probability set value area.

It is also possible to set the probability setting value and store it in the probability setting value area when a predetermined time elapses after the setting key switch 93 is turned off or the setting is changed to the variable state. Further, an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) may be newly provided in the game control device 100, and the signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. .. That is, instead of the operation of the touch switch, the operation of the newly provided confirmation button switch may be the confirmation operation.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value in the probability set value display data area (A2413). As a result, the determined probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143. Then, the probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is set (A2414), and the command for changing the probability setting value indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is issued by the effect control device 300 (effect control). Send to (board) (A241
5), the probability setting value change process is completed.

In the process of completing the setting change in steps A2416 to A2421, the game control device 10
0 first determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A2416). When the setting key switch 93 is in the ON state (the result of A2416 is “N”), the probability setting value change process is terminated. When the setting key switch 93 is in the off state (the result of A2416 is "Y")
, The RAM clear start address 3 is set (A2417), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2418). The RAM area to be cleared here is the clear area # 3 in FIG. 5C.
Will be. The clear area # 3 is composed of a control information area (area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area) and a game control stack area, and the probability setting value area and the random number area are excluded. Note that the clear area # 3 is the clear area # 2 minus the random number area, and the random numbers updated during the setting change are not wasted. By clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0, the information and flags used for setting changes such as the information of the probability setting value area for work, the probability setting value changing flag, and the probability setting value changed flag are cleared. The flag.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A2419). Since it is the end of the setting change, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Allow output to a computer, etc.). After that, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (A2420). As a result, the probability setting value at the end of the setting change is displayed and maintained on the probability setting value display device 143.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command for ending the probability setting change indicating that the probability setting change has been completed to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2421), and the main process (A2421).
Returning to FIG. 5B), the process proceeds to step A1049. The commands to be sent here are the above-mentioned model specification command, decoration special figure 1 hold number command, decoration special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command, setting value information command (probability setting value information command), and probability setting change completion. It is a command (a command for initializing RAM may be used). Depending on the model, the effect mode information command, the effect count information command, and the high probability count information command are transmitted. Upon receiving the command to end the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays, for example, a customer waiting demo on the display device 41.
30 notifications of RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the sound of the LED and speaker of the board decoration device 46, etc.
Do it for a second.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability set value confirmation process (A2402) in the above-mentioned probability set value change process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability set value confirmation process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in the probability set value confirmation mode (in the set value confirmable state), which is a mode in which the probability set value can be confirmed (A2501). When the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode described later is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress. When the probability set value confirmation mode is in effect (the result of A2501 is “Y”), the processes of step A2509 and subsequent steps are executed.

When the game control device 100 is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is "
N "), clear the probability set value display permission flag (A2502). Then, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (A2503). For example, if the variable display game is being executed or the jackpot is in progress, it can be determined that the game is in progress. When the game is in progress (the result of A2503 is "Y"), the probability setting value confirmation process is terminated so that the probability setting value cannot be confirmed. When not in the game (A
The result of 2503 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is ON (A2).
504). When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2504 is "N"), the probability setting value confirmation process ends.

The game control device 100 sets the probability set value confirmation mode flag (A2505) when the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2504 is “Y”). This will
When the probability setting value is not being changed (setting variable state) (the result of A2401 is "N")
When the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value confirmation mode (setting value confirmation state) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is set. Next, set the probability setting value display permission flag (A2).
506). As a result, the probability set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 143 based on the probability set value display data loaded from the probability set value display data area by the output process (FIG. 7).

Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value in the security signal control timer area in order to enable the output of the security signal (A2507). When the set value is confirmed, a security signal is output, and it becomes possible to output to an external device (such as a hall computer) that the front frame 12 has been opened. The command for confirming the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2508), and the probability set value confirmation process is completed.

When the game control device 100 is in the probability set value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is "
Y ”), the setting key switch 93 determines whether or not it is on (A2509). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2509 is "Y"), the probability setting value confirmation mode continues, and the probability setting value confirmation probability setting value confirmation process ends.

The game control device 100 clears the probability set value confirmation mode flag (A2510) when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2509 is “N”). Therefore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends. And
In order to prevent the probability set value from being displayed on the probability set value display device 143, the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (A2511). Subsequently, a command for completing the probability set value confirmation indicating that the probability set value confirmation is completed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2).
512).

In the above, the set value change switch 102 is configured to be usable as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch), but a RAM initialization switch may be provided separately from the set value change switch 102. In this case, when the power is turned on (power restoration),
If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are on, the setting is variable (setting change state), and if the setting key switch 93 is on and the RAM initialization switch is off, the setting confirmation state (setting value confirmation state). If the setting key switch 93 is off and the RAM initialization switch is on, RAM initialization (RAM clear) is possible, and the setting key switch 93
If the RAM initialization switch is off, it may be configured to be in a normal power-on (power recovery) state. Further, the set value (setting) may be fixed when the setting key switch 93 is turned from on to off.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game processing. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

First, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins a game ball in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and a special figure variation display based on the winning is displayed. Predetermine the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the game. The game result pre-judgment is performed. In addition, it should be noted.
The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a large winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (1).
Only subtract) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "".
Y "), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (A2605). .. Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired by using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with the special figure game processing number to execute the game branching process according to the special figure game processing number (A2607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special figure change display Monitors the change start of the game, sets the change start of the special figure change display game, sets the effect, sets the information necessary for processing during the special figure change, etc. Execute (A2608). The details of the special figure normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like is executed (A2609). For details of the processing during special figure fluctuation, see FIG.
It will be described later in 8.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, the fanfare time is set according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and the fanfare / interval processing is performed. The special figure display processing for setting the necessary information for the above is executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, necessary information such as a big hit fanfare command (directing command), a big hit fanfare time, and a probability information command (low probability) is set. Set the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing and save it in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, set the necessary information such as the small hit fanfare command (directing command) and the small hit fanfare time, and set the processing number "7" related to the processing during the small hit fanfare. Save to the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit or a small hit, the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The fanfare / interval processing is executed to set the opening time of the large winning opening, update the number of opening times, set the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the large winning opening, and the like (A2611). For example, in the fanfare / interval processing, necessary information such as the round command (directing command) corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the large winning opening is set, and the processing number related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Set "4" and save in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the information necessary for processing the remaining ball of the jackpot is set. The middle process is executed (A2612). For example, in the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command or an ending command as an effect command is set, and the processing number "5" related to the processing of the remaining ball of the large winning opening is set and the special figure game processing number area is set. Save to.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, the process of setting the information necessary for performing the jackpot end process, etc. Execute (A2613). For example, in the large winning opening remaining ball processing, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing is set, and the special figure game processing number area is set. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "6" related to the jackpot end processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "6" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special figure Execute the jackpot end processing that sets the information necessary for executing the normal processing (A)
2614). For example, in the big hit end process, necessary information such as the probability state after the end of the big hit state and the normal power support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state is set, and these probability states and the time saving state are set by the probability information command (directing). Set as a command), set the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing, and save it in the special figure game processing number area. Probability information commands include the number of continuous games (number of time reduction fluctuations, number of electric support) of the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the jackpot state and the normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state. Information etc. are included.

When the game processing number is "7" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The small hit fanfare processing is executed (A2615), in which the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and the information necessary for performing the small hit processing is set. For example, in the small hit fanfare middle processing, necessary information such as the small hit opening time of the big winning opening is set, the processing number "8" related to the small hit middle processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "8" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Execute the small hit medium processing that sets the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing (A2)
616). For example, in the small hit middle processing, necessary information such as the small hit remaining ball processing time is set, the processing number “9” related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "9" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Execute the small hit remaining ball processing that sets the information necessary for performing the small hit end processing (A)
2617). For example, in the small hit remaining ball processing, necessary information such as the small hit ending time is set, the processing number “10” related to the special figure small hit end processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "10" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure normal process (the small hit end process).
A2618).

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2619), and then the special figure 1 display. The symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2620). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2622). The details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and starts the starting winning opening 36.
It is determined whether or not there is a prize in (A2703). When there is no prize in the starting prize opening 36 (
When the result of A2703 is "N"), the processes after step A2709 are executed. On the other hand, when there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is shortened (during the normal electric support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during the special time reduction (during the normal electric support state) (A)
The result of 2704 is "N"), and the processes after step A2707 are executed. On the other hand, when the special figure time is shortened (the result of A2704 is "Y"), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and the effect command setting process is executed (A2705). A2706).

That is, in the normal electric support state (time saving state), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. .. In the case of the present embodiment, the starting winning opening 36 is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 unless it is hit right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 during the normal power support state (that is, during the normal power support state). When left-handed), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 gives an instruction to right-handed (when it is left-handed).
Warning) is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information of the hold by the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure starting opening switch common process (A2).
708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning in the second starting winning opening is determined. Judgment (A2711). When there is no prize in the 2nd start prize opening (
When the result of A2711 is "N"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when there is a prize in the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning can be won (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"
), The process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the illegal electric power is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent prizes to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the Fuden fraud is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) when the normal electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , The special figure start port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, even when it is determined in A2713 that an illegal operation is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second
Prevents the start memory from being generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the special figure start port switch common process (A2708, A) in the start port switch monitoring process.
The details of 2715) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a procedure for common processing of the special drawing start port switch. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output number of times is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number of times overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N")
Save the updated value in the RWM start port signal output count area (A2904), and step A.
The process proceeds to 2905. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, in the game control device 100, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the number of special figure reservations (start memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) has won a prize (A2912). If the starting prize opening 36 is not won (the result of A2912 is "N""
), The process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, when the starting winning opening 36 is won (the result of A2912 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2913).
Save in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (A2914).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2915), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2).
916). Then, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as the effect command (A2917), and the effect command setting process (A291) is prepared.
8) is executed to end the common processing of the special figure start port switch.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing a predetermined number as a start memory up to an upper limit. Also,
The start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. , Various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2916) in the start port switch common process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination process.
The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead (pre-determination) process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

The game control device 100 first checks the start opening winning flag saved in step A2907, and determines whether or not the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) has won a prize (A300).
1). If the starting winning opening 36 is not won (the result of A3001 is "N"), step A3
Move to the process of 004. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is shortened (during the normal electric support state) (A300).
2).

The game control device 100 ends the special figure reservation information determination process when the special figure time reduction is in progress (the result of A3002 is “Y”). On the other hand, if the special time is not shortened (A3)
When the result of 002 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit is in progress (A30).
03). When the big hit or the small hit is in progress (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the big hit or the small hit (the result of A3003 is "N"), the big hit determination process determines whether the big hit is a big hit depending on whether the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. Is executed (A3004). And when the judgment result is a big hit (
When the result of A3005 is "Y"), the jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (A3006), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A2910 is acquired (). A3007), the process proceeds to step A3014.

When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the player has won the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) (A3008). If the start winning opening 36 is not won (the result of A3008 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to the process of step A3014.

When the game control device 100 wins a prize in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "Y".
”), The small hit determination process for determining whether or not the large hit random value matches the small hit determination value is executed (A3009). And when the judgment result is not a small hit (A30)
The result of 10 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (A3013), and step A3
It shifts to the process of 014. On the other hand, when the judgment result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is "Y".
In "), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and step A143.
The stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in the above is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes the effect command setting process (A3015). Next, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed (A3016), and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is executed (A3017). ).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game as production commands (A3018). ), Performs the effect command setting process (A3019), and ends the special figure hold information determination process. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) Make a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time for determining the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start winning prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Great winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the large winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether or not the processing is in progress while the large winning opening is open (A3101). If the process is in progress while the large winning opening is open (the result of A3101 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3105. In addition, when the processing is not in progress while the large winning opening is open (the result of A3101 is "N"), whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether or not the remaining ball of the large winning opening is being processed. Judgment (A3102
).

When the game control device 100 is in the process of processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening (the result of A3102 is "Y"".
), The process proceeds to step A3105. In addition, when the remaining ball of the big winning opening is not being processed (A)
It is determined whether the result of 3105 is "N") and the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, whether or not the small hit middle processing is in progress (A3103). When processing during small hit (A310)
The result of 4 is “Y”), and the process proceeds to step A3105. Further, when the small hit during processing is not in progress (the result of A3103 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "9", that is, whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress ( A3104). Since the special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer becomes 0, the progress state of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number in this way.

When the game control device 100 is not processing the small hit remaining ball (the result of A3104 is "N").
, Finish the big winning opening switch monitoring process. In addition, when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (A31)
When the result of 04 is “Y”), the process proceeds to the process of step A3105. Then, 0 is set in the winning counter (A3105), and the large winning opening switch 1 (one of the large winning opening switches 39a) is set.
) Is determined (A3106).

In the game control device 100, when there is no input to the large winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is ".
N ”), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the large winning opening switch 2 (the other large winning opening switch 39a) (A3110). Further, when there is an input to the large winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is "Y"), the large winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107).
The effect command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (
A3109), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the big winning opening switch 2 (the other big winning opening switch 39a) (A3110).

In the game control device 100, when there is no input to the large winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is ".
N "), it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). Further, when there is an input to the large winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is "Y"), the large winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111), and the effect command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

In the game control device 100, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is "Y"".
) Ends the large winning opening switch monitoring process. Also, if the value of the winning counter is not 0 (
The result of A3114 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the remaining ball of the large winning opening is being processed (A311).
5). When the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3115 is "Y"), when the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed and the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3115 is "N").
It is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (A3116).

When the game control device 100 is processing the small hit remaining ball (the result of A3116 is "Y").
When the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed and the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3116 is "N"), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the large winning opening count number (A31).
17), the number of large winning openings is the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, "9"
") It is determined whether or not the result is equal to or greater than that (A3118).

In the game control device 100, when the number of winning openings is not equal to or higher than the upper limit (A31).
The result of 18 is "N"), and the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed. In addition, when the number of large winning openings exceeds the upper limit (the result of A3118 is "Y"), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether or not the processing is in progress during the small hit (A3121).

When the game control device 100 is not in the process of small hits (the result of A3121 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the large winning opening switch monitoring process and is in the process of processing small hits (the result of A3121 is "Y").
”), Save the value of the end of the small hit opening operation in the large winning opening control pointer area (A3122).
, Finish the big winning opening switch monitoring process. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is 0 (A3205). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (the result of A3205 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has started (A3209), and when the customer waiting demo has not started (A3209). The result of (A3210) is that the customer waiting demo flag area is set with the customer waiting demo flag indicating that the customer waiting demo state (customer waiting demo is in progress) (A3210).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a production command (
A3211), the effect command setting process is performed (A3212), and "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (A3213). On the other hand, even when the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A3209 (the result of A3209 is "Y"), "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (A3213). After that, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A3214), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216).
, Special figure Ends normal processing.

In this way, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) are 0, and the customer wait demo command is received. The effect control device 300 is set to display the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like. The game control device 100 can also be configured to transmit a customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 becomes an off signal.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N".
”), The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is executed (A3202), and the decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3203).
), Executes the effect command setting process (A3204), and ends the special figure normal process.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is not 0 (the result of A3205 is "N".
”), The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is executed (A3206), and the decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 1 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3207).
), Executes the effect command setting process (A3208), and ends the special figure normal process.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, the game control device 100 is the second start storage means (game control device 100).
When there is a second start memory, it serves as a priority control means for executing the variation display game based on the second start memory with priority over the variation display game based on the first start memory.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3206) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variable symbol determination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting the jackpot flag 1 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Further, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405). ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern, which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the variation start information setting process (A3407) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game, and ends the special figure 1 variation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, with respect to the special figure 1 variation display game, variation commands (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern numbers are prepared as effect commands, and the effect command setting process is performed.

Then, the game control device 100 sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 18 for the second start memory. It is something to do.

First, the game control device 100 uses the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
The special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the above is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 2 setting process for setting the jackpot flag 2 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set, is prepared (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Then, the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3507). In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, regarding the special figure 2 variation display game, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command.
Performs production command setting processing.

Next, the game control device 100 first sets "1" related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area.
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 variation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag area (A360).
1), the big hit flag 1 area is saved and the information is saved (A3602). Next, load the jackpot random number from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM and prepare (A360).
3), the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3604). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3605).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is a jackpot (the result of A3606 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the loss information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3605) is not a big hit (A)
The result of 3606 is "N"), and the small hit determination process for determining whether or not the prepared large hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value is executed (A3608).

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is "Y"), the game control device 100 transmits the small hit information to the small hit flag area in which the loss information is saved in step A3601. Overwrite and save (A3610), and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (A3).
When the result of 609 is “N”), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated while saving the information that is out of the jackpot flag 1 region and the small hit flag region. Thus, in this embodiment,
The result of the special figure 1 variable display game is one of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing".
[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.
In this process, the same process as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 20 is performed for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the information that the game control device 100 is out of the jackpot flag 2 area (A37).
01). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3704).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3704) is not a big hit (A)
The result of 3705 is "N"), and the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information that the jackpot flag 2 is out of alignment. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the jackpot determination process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and the like (
Details of A3605 and A3704) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a table of upper limit determination values (upper limit determination value table) corresponding to the probability setting value (A3801). The upper limit determination value table determines the upper limit determination value according to the probability setting value for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. Then, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (A3802), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3803). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

In the game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A380).
The result of 3 is "Y"), a deviation (other than a big hit) is set as a judgment result (A3808), and the big hit judgment process is completed.

Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (A3).
The result of 803 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is a high probability state (probability variation state) (A3804). Then, in the case of a high probability state (the result of A3804 is "Y"".
), The upper limit judgment value in high probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value using the upper limit judgment value table (A3805). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3804 is "N"), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value using the upper limit judgment value table (A).
3806).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3807). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3807 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A3808). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3807 is "N"), and a big hit is set as the determination result (A3809). When the judgment result is set, the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value (A).
3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (Special Figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A3902). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure variation display game is a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment. It does not overlap the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In this embodiment, it should be noted that
A small hit random number is not provided independently, and a large hit random number is used for determining a small hit, but a configuration in which an original small hit random number is provided is also possible.

When the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A3904).
The small hit determination process ends.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3902 is "N"), the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether or not it is larger (A3903). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is "Y"), a deviation is set as the judgment result (A3904).
.. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is "
N "), a small hit is set as a determination result (A3905). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability]
24 (A), (B), and (C) show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as a result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (FIG. 22) and small hit determination process (FIG. 23). Each setting (
It is a table illustrated for each setting value).

In the example of FIG. 24A, a case where the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each setting (each set value) is shown. The jackpot probability (at low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability increase as the set value increases (the setting becomes higher), and the larger the set value, the more likely the jackpot to occur, which is advantageous to the player. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value in FIG. 22 by the range of the value of the jackpot random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value by changing the range of the lower limit determination value or the value of the jackpot random number corresponding to the set value in addition to the upper limit determination value.
In another example, only one of the jackpot probability at the low probability and the jackpot probability at the high probability may be configured to increase as the set value increases. By changing the jackpot probability and the small hit probability according to the setting (set value), the player enjoys estimating the setting (set value) from the jackpot probability and the small hit probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the example of FIG. 24 (B), the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the settings 1, 2, 3 (set values 1, 2, 3) and the settings 4, 5, 6 (set values 4, 5, 6) are the same. It is set. In addition, in the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 4 to 6, the big hit probability and the small hit probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (the setting becomes higher). In the example of FIG. 24 (B), it is more difficult for the player to estimate the setting (set value) from the jackpot probability and the small hit probability than in the case of FIG. 24 (A), and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

In the example of FIG. 24C, the jackpot probability (at low probability and high probability) regardless of the setting (set value).
And the small hit probability is the same. In this case, the player estimates the setting (setting value) from other setting discriminating elements.

Other setting discriminating factors include the probability variation inrush rate (described later), the number of times the normal power support continues after the jackpot ends (described later), the number of times the probability variation state continues on the ST machine, the number of jackpot rounds (upper limit of the number of rounds), and special features. There are fluctuation patterns (variation time values) of the figure fluctuation display game, various times (stop display time, fanfare time, etc.) set in the special figure game processing. If the probability that a predetermined content of these setting discriminating elements is selected is made different for each set value, the player can estimate the set value from these setting discriminating elements.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A4001).
, When it is a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4002). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (A4003).

Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). Type of special result (type of jackpot) by this processing
Is selected.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4).
005), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4007).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number, and obtains the time reduction determination data.
Save in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

The effect mode transition information is information for shifting the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y") and is used in the big hit end process. That is, it is possible to shift the effect mode with the big hit as an opportunity by the effect mode transition information. Further, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the jackpot stop symbol pattern (probability variation jackpot symbol / normal jackpot symbol, etc.), so the jackpot ends depending on the type of jackpot symbol (type of jackpot). The destination of the production mode that will be transferred later will change. In addition, since the effect mode transition information is set according to the probability state as described above,
The transition destination of the production mode is also affected by whether or not the special figure is currently in the high probability state (probability change state).

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N") (A4010), and when it is a small hit (A4010).
The result of A4011 is "Y"), and the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4011). Next, set the special figure 1 small hit symbol table (A4)
012), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4013).

After that, the game control device 100 acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and obtains the stop symbol pattern.
It is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is "Y"), and the effect mode can be shifted with the small hit as an opportunity. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A40).
18).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4016), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved as the stop symbol pattern. Save to the area (A4017) and prepare the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (A4019), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4020). This decorative special figure command is the effect control device 30.
It is sent to 0. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure 1 small hit. Clear the symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) to 0 (A40)
23), the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A4101).
, When it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4102). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (A4103). Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). This process selects the type of special result (type of jackpot).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4).
105), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number, and obtains the time reduction determination data.
Save in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The production mode transition information here is for a big hit (
The result of A4101 is set to "Y") and used in the jackpot end processing. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).
).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4110).
), The detached stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (A4113), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4114). This decorative special figure command is the effect control device 30.
It is sent to 0. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (A4116), and the special figure 2 stop symbol is used. End the setting process.

[Example of special figure jackpot symbol distribution]
FIG. 27 is a table illustrating the jackpot symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure variation display game controlled by the above-mentioned special figure game processing for each setting.

FIG. 27 illustrates a jackpot symbol number 1 to 6 (stop symbol number) indicating the type of jackpot and a jackpot symbol table that defines the distribution rate for each setting. As shown in FIG. 27, the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol number (type of jackpot, symbols 1 to 6) can be changed according to the setting (set value), and the probability variation inrush rate becomes higher as the set value becomes larger for the player. It will be advantageous. The probability variation inrush rate is the ratio of the probability variation jackpot symbols that the probability state after the jackpot ends to a high probability to all the symbols.
In addition, the number of times of normal power support after the end of the big hit is, in particular, as the set value becomes larger in settings 1 to 3 or settings 4 to 6, with respect to the normal big hit (the probability state after the end of the big hit becomes a low probability). growing. Settings 1, 2, 3 (setting values 1, 2, 3) and settings 4, 5, 6 (setting values 4,
The number of times of Fuden support in 5 and 6) is set to be the same. It should be noted that the ST machine can be configured to increase the number of continuations of the probabilistic state as the set value increases.

Further, in FIG. 27, the number of rounds (upper limit value of the number of rounds, for example, 2R, 6R, 16R) given by one big hit does not change with respect to the set value, but the number of rounds is increased as the set value becomes larger. Configuration is also possible. Further, in FIG. 27, the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable display game is more likely to be given a larger number of rounds than the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game is more likely to be given a special figure. 1 It is more advantageous to the player than the variable display game.

As in FIG. 24C, it is possible to configure the jackpot symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) to be the same regardless of the setting (set value).

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure fluctuation processing (A2609) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during special figure fluctuation.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a symbol stop command (special symbol 1 symbol stop command or special symbol 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the changing symbol as an effect command (A4701).
, The effect command setting process is executed (A4702). The fluctuating symbol can be discriminated from the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag (special figure 1 fluctuation flag or special figure 2 fluctuation flag). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decorative special figure variation display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game or decorative special figure 2 variable display game).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, a large hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is 600 in common.
Set msec.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the process number "2" related to the process during display of the special figure (A4).
705), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A4706).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707). A4708).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 has a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in the symbol fixed number signal control timer area used when outputting the symbol fixed number signal related to the execution number of the special figure variation display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. Save to (A4710). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4711). , Ends the process transition setting process during special figure change.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
FIG. 29 shows the symbol fluctuation control processing (A2620, A2622) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing.
), The symbol fluctuation control process in the general map game process described later is shown. The symbol fluctuation control process includes control of fluctuations in special symbols (first special figure, second special figure, etc.) and ordinary symbols (ordinary symbols) of the variation display game in the variation display unit of the batch display device 50, and special symbols and ordinary symbols. This is a process for setting the display data of the symbol.

First, the game control device 100 checks whether the fluctuation control flag related to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the normal figure) is changing (A7501). In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value, and the display table 2 ( Address (for stop), display table 1
The (variable) address is defined.

In the game control device 100, when the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is changing (A).
The result of 7502 is "Y"), and the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (A7503). In the case of this embodiment, step A2619, step A2621,
The address of the symbol display table (for variation, display table 1) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A7614.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer of the controlled object by -1 (A7504).
, It is determined whether the blinking control timer after updating is 0 (A7505), and when the blinking control timer after updating is not 0 (the result of A7505 is "N"), the value is set to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled. Acquire the corresponding display data (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

If the updated blinking control timer is 0 (the result of A7505 is "Y"), the initial value of the blinking control timer corresponding to the target blinking timer area is saved (A7506), and the variable symbol number of the controlled object is saved. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the control target is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (the result of A7502 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled. (A7509). In the case of this embodiment, step A2619, step A2
The address of the symbol display table (for stop, display table 2) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A7614 in 621. Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

As the initial value of the blinking control timer saved in step A7506, the value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer. The initial value of the blinking control timer is an interval for updating the lighting pattern during the fluctuation time in the batch display device 50.

Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 to (variable symbol number upper limit determination value -1). ) Will be updated sequentially. In steps A7508 and A7511, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. Is performed, the display that goes around is repeated.

By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed in this way, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 are completed. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (A1313) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal figure game processing. In the normal map game processing, monitoring the input of the gate switch 34a and controlling the entire processing related to the normal map fluctuation display game,
Set the display of the normal map.

First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general electric winning switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (1).
Only subtract) (A7603). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer becomes 0 (A7604).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is set to the normal figure game processing number. A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the game process number of the game based on the set game sequence branch table of the game (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made based on the game processing number of the game, and the game branching process according to the game processing number of the game is executed (A7607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Monitoring the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game, setting the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game, setting the effect, setting the information necessary for processing during the normal map fluctuation, etc. Execute (A7608). The details of the normal processing will be described later in FIG. 32.

Further, when the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal map changing process for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing (the game control device 100). A7609). For example, in the normal map fluctuation processing, in order to shift to the normal map display process, "2" is set as the game processing number and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map display time is set to the normal map game. Save to the processing timer area.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, if the result of the normal map variation display game is a hit, the normal power according to whether or not the time is shortened. The normal map display processing is executed (A7610), in which the opening time is set, the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per-game processing is set, and the like. For example, in the normal map display process, when the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, "3" is set as the game process number and the normal map game process number area is set in order to shift to the normal map hit process. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, in order to shift to the normal game processing number, "0" is set as the game processing number and the game is saved in the normal game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the game control device 100 normally continues the processing during the normal drawing or sets the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing. The middle process per figure is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal processing per figure, after setting to open the normal variable winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game processing number in order to shift to the normal electric remaining ball processing. Save to the normal game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal electric remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing (A7612). ). For example, in the Fuden remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the Fuzu hit end processing, "5" is set as the game processing number and saved in the Fuzu game processing number area, and the Fuzu ending time is set to the Fuzu game. Save to the processing timer area.

Further, when the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal drawing end processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the normal figure per end process, "0" is set as the game process number and saved in the normal figure game process number area in order to shift to the normal figure normal process.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal map fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal map display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (A7604).
If the result of is "N"), that is, the time is not up, the processing of step A7614 and subsequent steps is executed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the normal map game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A7701). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "
Y "), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (A7702). The right-handed game state is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a time saving state (general electric support state). If the game is in a right-handed game state (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705.
When the game is not in a right-handed game state (the result of A7702 is "N"), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7704). Production control device 300 that received the left-handed instruction notification command
Executes a notification (warning) instructing to hit left by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the number of reserved normal figures and determines whether or not the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A7705). When the number of reserved figures is less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the number of reserved figures by +1 (A).
7706), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved normal figures after the update is calculated (A).
7707). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of RWM (A77).
08), the hit symbol random number is extracted, saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 has no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), or when it is determined that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (A770).
The result of 5 is "N"), and the gate switch monitoring process is completed.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (A7608) in the normal drawing game processing will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a procedure for normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of reserved figures is 0 (A7901).
.. If the number of reserved figures is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the hit random number is loaded from the random number storage area per RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per symbol of RWM. (
The hit symbol random number is loaded from (for 1 hold number), and the random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) and the symbol random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) after loading are cleared to 0 (A7902). .. Furthermore, whether or not the probability of winning in the normal map fluctuation display game is higher than usual in the normal map high probability (in the high probability state), that is, whether or not the time is shortened (normal power support state). (A7903). The probability of hitting a normal figure in a high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a normal figure in a low probability is 0/251.

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability of the normal figure (the result of A7903 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (251 in this case) which is the lower limit judgment value in the low probability of the normal figure (A7904).
), When the high probability of the normal figure is in progress (the result of A7903 is "Y"), the high probability lower limit judgment value (1 in this case), which is the lower limit judgment value in the high probability of the normal figure, is set (A7905), and step A7906 Move to the processing of.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7906). The upper limit judgment value here is common to the high probability of the normal map and the low probability of the normal figure. When the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), that is,
In the case of a loss, the process proceeds to step A7908. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7907).

In the game control device 100, when the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "
Y "), that is, in the case of a loss, the loss information is saved in the hit flag area (A7908).
.. Further, the out-of-order stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A7909), the out-of-order symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

In the game control device 100, when the winning random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "
N "), that is, in the case of a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7911), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (A7912), and the hit corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is set. The stop symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. In addition, there may be several kinds of hit stop symbols, and there are two in this embodiment.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A791).
4), save the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shift the random number storage area per normal figure (A7916), and clear the free area after shift to 0 (A7917).
), The number of reserved figures is updated by -1 (A7918).

That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the rankings of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 that are held after the normal figure holding number 1 are moved up one by one.
By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 of the random number storage area per the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the normal figure game processing timer area (A7).
920). For example, the fluctuation time is 500 msec with a probability of 200/256 and a probability of 40/25.
It is distributed to 1500 msec with 6 and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. Then, the process transition setting process during the change of the normal figure is executed (A7921), and the normal process of the normal figure is terminated. For example, in the normal map changing process transition setting process, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure changing process, and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area. Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area, and the initial value (0 in this case) is saved in the ordinary figure variation symbol number area. To save.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the number of reserved figures is 0 (the result of A7901 is "".
Y ”), set“ 0 ”as the processing number for shifting to normal processing (A7922),
The processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (A7923). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the Fuden fraud monitoring period flag area (A7294), and the normal processing of the normal map is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1317) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. FIG. 33A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 33B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, payout command transmission process (A1311), winning opening switch / status monitoring process (A1307), magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316)
Based on the monitoring result in, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (
A9501). If no glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501 result is "N")
Determining whether or not a main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502)
.. When the main body frame opening error is not occurring (A9502 result is "N"), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the off data of the security signal is saved as the external information output data. Save to area (A9504).

When the glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9501 is "Y"), or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 is
The on-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether or not the time is up). Judgment (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to RAM by operating the initialization switch (set value change switch 102) or the like.
When the data stored in is initialized or when the setting change is completed, a predetermined time (for example, 256)
msec) is set (main processing A1044, A2419). Then, the security signal control timer is clocked from the time when the RAM is initialized or the time when the setting change is completed. Also,
The initial value of the security signal control timer is the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 1.
Variable setting state (setting change mode) and setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) by the operation of 02, etc.
It is set when becomes (A1037, A2507 of the main process), and the flag for changing the probability setting value is set. The flag is set during the setting change (during the variable setting state) or during the probability setting value confirmation mode. The security signal may be output all the time during the confirmation state. The security signal control timer is set to 0 when the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), not when the probability setting value changing flag is cleared (A2418), and the security signal is output. It is also possible to configure it to end.

When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the on-data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A).
9509), the process proceeds to step A9510. That is, it is output as external information that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). When the magnet fraud generation flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring. When the magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (A9511). When the board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio wave fraud is occurring.

In the game control device 100, when the board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9511 is "N").
Further, it is determined whether or not the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9512). When the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the Fukuden fraud is occurring (A9513). When the general electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the large winning opening fraud is occurring (A9514). If the fraudulent winning flag for the large winning slot is saved in the fraud flag area by the fraud & winning monitoring process, it can be determined that the fraudulent winning slot is occurring. If the big prize opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is "N"), it is judged whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (
A9515).

When a switch abnormality error (the above-mentioned switch abnormality 1 error) such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (the result of A9515 is "N"), the game control device 100 tests off-data of the game machine error status signal. Save to the output data area (A9516). When a switch abnormality error is occurring (the result of A9515 is "Y"), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518).

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9510 is "Y".
”), When the board radio wave fraud is occurring (A9511 result is“ Y ”), when the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9512 result is“ Y ”), and when the general electric wave fraud is occurring (" The result of A9513 is "Y"), or when the big prize opening fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is "Y").
, Save the on-data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9517),
Save the on-data of the game machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9518)
). Depending on the on-data setting of the security signal, the security signal is output to an external device (hall computer, etc.) as external information.

After steps A9516 and A9518, the game control device 100 executes a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9519). Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a start port signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the start port (A952).
0).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the symbol confirmation number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the execution number of the special figure variation display game is not 0 (A9521). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is 0 (A9522). When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is 0 (the result of A9522 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is output as external information output data. Save to the area (A9523) and end the external information editing process.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is not 0 (A952).
If the result of 2 is “N”), that is, the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9524), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Display of batch display device during setting change]
FIG. 34 shows the display of each display unit of the batch display device 50 during the probability setting change (during the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed), that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamp D1-D18) of the batch display device 50.
) Is a diagram for explaining the light emitting mode (lighting / extinguishing mode).

While the probability setting is being changed, the game control device 100 displays a predetermined display for the special figure variation display game of the batch display device 50 regardless of the state (game state, etc.) of the game machine 10 when the power is turned off before the power is turned on. Is displayed on the display units 51 and 52 of. For example, even if the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed when the power is turned off before the power is turned on, the game control device 100 collectively displays a predetermined display regardless of the state when the power is turned off of the batch display device 50 while the probability setting is being changed. Display units 51, 5 of the display device 50
Can be displayed in 2. Therefore, while the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state), the probability setting is being changed by a predetermined display on the display units 51 and 52 for the special figure variation display game that is easy to see from the front of the game machine 10. It can be suggested that the game machine 10 is in a state where it cannot play a game (for example, a variable display game).

In FIG. 34A, while the probability setting is being changed (during the variable setting state), the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the batch display device 50 is designated. The probability set value (6 in this case) is displayed as a display. In this way, while the probability setting is being changed, the game machine 10 cannot play a game (for example, a variable display game) by displaying a different display (display different from the normal display) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 when the fluctuation is stopped. Can be clearly indicated on the front of the game machine 10. It should be noted that the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability set values are not used in the stop display when the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 is stopped.

For example, the game control device 100 has a probability setting value display data corresponding to a work probability setting value (
Based on A2409) and the probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value.
Output data is output to the 3rd output port 135 and the 4th output port 136, and the working probability setting value and the probability setting value are lit or blinked on the 1st special figure variation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1). Good (A1603-A1608 for output processing).

The probability set value may be lit or blinked on the second special figure variation display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variation display game of the batch display device 50. Further, the probability set value may be displayed by lighting or blinking by using both the first special figure variation display unit 51 and the second special figure variation display unit 52.

Furthermore, even if the brightness is made weaker than usual and the probability setting value is lit or blinking so that a person who does not have the authority to change the setting can hardly see the probability setting value at a place away from the game machine 10. Good.

In FIG. 34B, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) is being changed while the probability setting is being changed.
), As a predetermined display, a changing information display (for example, the letter “P”) suggesting that the probability setting is being changed (setting is in the variable state) is displayed. In this way, while changing the probability setting,
By displaying a display different from that when the fluctuation is stopped (display different from the normal one) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51, it can be clearly shown on the front of the game machine 10 that the game machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played. Note that the same identification information (special symbol) as the changing information display (for example, the letter "P") is not used in the stop display when the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 is stopped. It shall be.

For example, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (A240).
The result of 1 is "Y"), and the process of generating output data related to the information display being changed to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed (a processing step is added to FIG. 10), and the process is being changed. The information display may be lit or blinked on the first special figure variation display unit 51 (A of output processing).
1603-A1608). Further, for example, the game control device 100 has a front frame 12 (main body frame).
Is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is "Y").
When the probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), the output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the changing information display is displayed in the first special figure variation display unit 51.
(LED lamp D1) may be lit or blinking.

The changing information display may be lit or blinked on the second special figure variation display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variation display game of the batch display device 50. Further, the changing information display may be lit or blinked by using both the first special figure variation display unit 51 and the second special figure variation display unit 52.

In FIG. 34C, while the probability setting is being changed, the first special figure variation display unit 51 displays the same display as the stop result (missing result) of the variation display game other than the special result (other than the big hit) as a predetermined display. .. In the present embodiment, the detachment result (disengagement symbol) is a display in which the central segment of the first special figure variation display unit 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) is lit.
In this way, by performing a predetermined display on the first special figure variation display unit 51 while the probability setting is being changed, it can be suggested in front of the game machine 10 that the game machine 10 is not executing the game. Further, although the RAM area is cleared to 0 at the end of the setting change (A2418), by displaying the loss result (missing symbol) from the time when the probability setting is being changed, the initial data to be displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 is displayed. The value setting (A2419) may not be necessary.

For example, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (A240).
The result of 1 is "Y"), and the process of generating output data related to the display of the result of deviation (disengagement symbol) to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed (a processing step is added to FIG. 10). ), The display of the deviation result may be lit and displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 (output processing A1603-A1608). Further, for example, in the game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is "Y".
”), When the probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), the third output port 13
Output data may be output to the 5th and 4th output ports 136, and the display of the disconnection result may be lit and displayed on the 1st special figure variation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1).

The second special figure variation display unit 52 (LED) for the special figure 2 variation display game of the batch display device 50.
The display of the disconnection result may be lit on the lamp D2). Further, the display of the deviation result may be lit up by using both the first special figure variation display unit 51 and the second special figure variation display unit 52.

In FIG. 34D, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) is being changed while the probability setting is being changed.
), The off display is displayed as a predetermined display. In this way, while the probability setting is being changed, the game machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played by displaying the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 different from the display when the fluctuation is stopped (display different from the normal display). It can be specified in front of 10. It should be noted that the extinguishing display is not used in the stop display when the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 is stopped.

For example, the game control device 100 has the first feature to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 from the time when the power is turned on (power restoration) until the probability set value is changed (the result of A2406 is "Y"). The output data for the figure variation display unit 51 may not be generated, and the extinguishing display may be displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51.

In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the batch display device 50 may be turned off. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 5
It may be turned off on both the 1 and the 2nd special figure variation display unit 52.

In FIGS. 34A to 34D above, LED lamps (for example, LED lamps D3-D) other than the display units 51 and 52 (D1, D2) for the special figure fluctuation display game while the probability setting is being changed.
18) may be turned off, or may be turned on cyclically to display an animation.

In FIGS. 34E and 34F, all the display units (that is, all the light emitting units: LED lamps D1-D18) of the batch display device 50 are lit or blinked to be displayed as predetermined displays while the probability setting is being changed. , All-lit display or all-blinking display is displayed on the batch display device 50. In this way, while the probability setting is being changed, the batch display device 50 is displayed differently from when the fluctuation is stopped (
By performing a display different from the usual one, it can be clearly shown on the front of the game machine 10 that the game machine 10 is in a state where it cannot play a game.

The all-blinking display of FIG. 34F is executed by repeating the all-off display and the all-on display of the batch display device 50 at predetermined time intervals.

For example, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (A240).
The result of 1 is "Y"), the process of generating output data related to the all-lit display or all-blinking display to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed, and the all-lit display or all-blinking display is collectively displayed. It may be displayed on the display device 50 (output processing A1603-A1608). Further, for example, the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is “Y”). Occasionally (A1038), output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the full lighting display or the full blinking display may be displayed on the batch display device 50 (LED lamps D1-D18). ..

FIG. 34G shows another configuration example of the batch display device 50 of FIGS. 34A-34F. In FIG. 34G, the performance of the game machine 10 (in the vicinity of the LED lamps D1-D18 of the batch display device 50) (
The performance display related to (specs) is displayed. Although the performance display is printed, L
It may be displayed by light emission from an ED lamp, a liquid crystal display, or the like. As a performance display, display of jackpot probability at low probability in setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting) 85
a "1/300 and 1/200", prize ball number display 85b "3 & 2 & 10 &14", round number upper limit display 85c "2, 6, 16", model (official name) display 85d "CRxxx"
xx ”, display of presence / absence of limit regarding probability variation jackpot 85e (here,“ no limit ”)
Is displayed.

In the display of the number of prize balls 85b, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning opening 35,
And the number of prize balls of the special variable winning device 39 is displayed in order. The limit regarding the probability variation jackpot means that the number of consecutive probability variation jackpots is limited to a predetermined limit number (one jackpot can generate a predetermined limit number of jackpots (number of consecutive villas)). Become).

Since the display 85a of the jackpot probability at the time of low probability is displayed only for setting 1 (minimum setting) and setting 6 (highest setting), it can be displayed so as to fit in the free area around the batch display device 50. The jackpot probability display 85a at low probability is displayed only for setting 3 (intermediate setting), and the jackpot probability display 85a at low probability is set 1 (minimum setting) and setting 6 (highest setting). Only one of them (one of the lowest value 1/300 and the highest value 1/200) may be displayed, or the range of the jackpot probability at the time of low probability (1/300 to 1/200) may be displayed.

In addition, among the jackpot probabilities at the time of low probability, the LED lamps D1-D of the batch display device 50
Items that cannot be displayed around 18 (big hit probabilities such as settings 2, 4, 5, etc.) may be displayed outside the game area 32 in an empty area of a member separate from the batch display device 50. It should be noted that what is displayed on the batch display device 50 may be duplicated on this separate member. For example, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. is displayed on the empty area of the upper right, lower left, upper left of the game board of FIG. 2A, the member (guide rail 31) that divides the game area 32, and the like. You may. Alternatively, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. may be displayed in the empty area in the game area (for example, the surface of the general winning opening 35 in the lower left). Further, the display 85e of the presence / absence of the limit regarding the probability variation jackpot is displayed as "with limit" only when there is a limit, and nothing may be displayed when there is no limit. In this way, the LED lamps D1-D1 of the batch display device 50
Items to be displayed as a performance display around 8 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display 85c of the upper limit of the number of rounds at the time of a big hit may be displayed in another area or the display device 41, and some or all items to be displayed as a performance display may be displayed on the batch display device 50 as needed. It does not have to be displayed.

Further, the effect control device 300 may display the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. on the display device 41 while changing the setting, confirming the setting, and / or waiting for the customer. .. The effect control device 300 previously stores the jackpot probability at the time of low probability (program ROM).
It may be stored in 321 etc.). It should be noted that the display device 41 may duplicate what is displayed on the batch display device 50. To switch the display of the jackpot probability of each setting, use the effect button 2
It may be executed by operating an operation unit such as 5 or a cross key.

35 (A) and 35 (B) show a predetermined display on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 of the batch display device 50 (here, the probability setting value 6) while the probability setting is being changed. Indicates a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display from an oblique direction other than the front of the game machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a person who does not have the authority to change the setting from visually recognizing a predetermined display (particularly the probability setting value) from the oblique direction of the game machine 10 while changing the probability setting.

In FIG. 35 (A), two recesses 51a and 51b (recesses) are provided in front of the batch display device 50, and the first special figure variation display section 51 or the second special figure is provided in the recesses 51a and 51b, respectively. The variation display unit 52 is arranged. In FIG. 35B, an annular wall portion 50a (convex portion) surrounding the first special figure variation display unit 51 and the second special figure variation display unit 52 is provided in front of the batch display device 50. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display of the first special figure variation display unit 51 or the second special figure variation display unit 52 from an oblique direction.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 36
Is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (directing microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the game machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (
B0001). Next, the initial settings of CPU311 and VDP312 are executed (B0002, B).
0003) Allow interrupts (B0004). When the interrupt is enabled, the game control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 is ready to be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0).
008). The WDT is started with the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002), and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 uses the RTC (real-time clock) 3 as a timekeeping means.
The RTC reading process for reading the time information from 38 is executed (B0009).

The RTC reading process may be configured to read the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process shifts to step B0009. Further, the RTC reading process may be executed only once when the power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, the power is turned on to the game machine 10) (the position of the RTC reading process may be changed, for example, step B0003). And B0004 may be executed). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on, the time is set from the RTC 338 only once. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of RTC338. Then, the effect control device 300 may execute various processes by using the time timer instead of the RTC 338. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, ...), A predetermined effect may be executed, but a plurality of predetermined times may be executed. The player can estimate the set value from this time interval by drawing a lottery for the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate at long time intervals becomes smaller as the set value is larger. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing a lottery for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, the lottery may be drawn so that the selection rate for a long execution period increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (the signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). continue,
The hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of LEDs and liquid crystals by the person in charge of the game hall (game store) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode processing, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process for adding or clearing the effect points (B0012). In the effect point control process, the effect points are added by executing the effect or operation for which the effect points are to be added, and at the end of the game so that the effect points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on production points and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode processing. The player can estimate the set value from the added value by drawing a value (added value) to be added to the effect points with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate of the large addition value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The effect display editing process to be performed is executed (B0015). As for the drawing data set at this time, the image of the display device 41 can be updated without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B).
0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "N"), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0
018). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), for example. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44, frame effect device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B002).
1). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of B0021 described above, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. After that, the processes from B0008 to B0021 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 36) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of command receptions in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of commands received is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of commands received (B1103)
), Copy the contents of the receive command buffer of RAM to the command area for analysis (B11)
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer contains 32 received commands.
It is configured to store up to one. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the analysis command area. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing direct analysis in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is "Y".
]), The received command content of the command area for analysis is loaded (B1107), and the received command analysis process for analyzing the content is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 below. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the step. The processing of B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y]), the reception command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 37) will be described. FIG. 38 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the received command analysis processing executed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are the MODE unit (MODE command) and A.
It is composed of a CTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from a MODE unit indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower levels of the received command are M.
The ODE section and the ACTION section are configured in this order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type) that can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific production instruction, etc.) is determined. Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (B1203)
The result is "Y"), and the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by a command of the type specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for instructing a variable pattern of the special decorative symbol, and includes a variable command (set by the variable start information setting process in FIG. 42). And
When the MODE section represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 05 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the jackpot command (
B1207). The jackpot command is a command that commands an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to the production during a jackpot. For example, a fanfare command (set by processing during special figure display) and a round command (fanfare / interval). These include intermediate commands (set in processing while the large winning opening is open), ending commands (set in processing while the large winning opening is open), and so on. Then, when the MODE section represents a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the jackpot command processing is executed (B1).
208), the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a jackpot command, the effect control device 300 is (B1).
The result of 207 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the symbol command ("."
B1209). The symbol-based commands include a decorative special figure 1 command (A4018) and a decorative special figure 2 command (A4112) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE unit represents a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 09 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of one-shot commands (B).
1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 11 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). The look-ahead symbol command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead stop symbol command (FIG. 15).
There is A3014). Then, when the MODE section represents a look-ahead symbol command, (B)
The result of 1213 is "Y"), the pre-reading symbol system command processing is executed (B1214), and the reception command analysis processing is completed.

When the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead symbol command, the effect control device 300 (
The result of B1213 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (B1215). The look-ahead variation command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead variation pattern command (A3018 in FIG. 15). Then, when the MODE section represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216).
), Ends the received command analysis process.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. If the MODE section is not in the normal range (B1202 result is "N"), the ACTION section is not in the normal range (B1203 result is "N"), or AC for the MODE section.
Even if the TION unit is not the correct combination (the result of B1204 is "N"), the reception command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the game machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE section represents a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the game machine is executed (B).
1302), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the model designation command, the effect control device 300 is (B1).
The result of 301 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the RAM initialization command (B1303). And when the MODE part represents the command of RAM initialization, (
The result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1305). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery, the effect control device 300 (
The result of B1305 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (B1307). Then, when the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1)
The result of 307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1307 is "N"), then the MODE section is decorated with special figure 1 hold number command (A2917)
, A3207) is determined (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then the MODE section sets the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (A2).
It is determined whether or not it represents 917, A3203) (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is “Y”), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B1312), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). Then, when the MODE section represents a probability information command, (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the probability information command, the effect control device 300 is (B1).
The result of 313 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents an error / invalid command (B1315). In addition, as error / fraudulent commands, for example, fraud occurrence command (set by fraud & prize monitoring process when fraud occurs), fraud release command (set by fraud & prize monitoring process when fraud is canceled), There is a state off command (A2204) and a state on command (A2207). As a status on command, the glass frame open detection switch 63
There are commands indicating the generation of a signal from (glass frame opening error) and the generation of a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) (main body frame opening error, front frame opening error). In addition, the state off command indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, when the MODE section represents an error / invalid command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error / invalid setting process for notifying or canceling the error or invalidity is executed ().
B1316), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the MODE unit then issues a command for switching the effect mode (processing during special figure display). Etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 does not represent a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an out-ball count command. (B1319). Then, when the MODE unit represents the out-ball number command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out-ball number reception processing is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the out-ball number command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1319 is "N"), then the MODE section is the count command (A3107, A3).
It is determined whether or not it represents the large winning opening count command of 111) (B1321). And
When the MODE unit represents a count command (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a count command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1321 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the set value information command (probability set value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is in step A of FIG. 5B.
It is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery of 1035 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1045. Further, as described above, in accordance with the command for ending the probability setting change in step A2421, the set value information command is issued to the game control device 10 at the end of the probability setting change.
It is transmitted from 0. Then, when the MODE section represents a set value information command (B132)
The result of 3 is "Y"), the processing at the time of receiving the set value is executed (B1324), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the set value reception processing, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as RAM and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE unit does not represent the set value information command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1323 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a setting change type command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a setting change instruction command (A1)
029), command for changing probability setting (A1041), command for changing probability setting value (A2)
415), there is a command (A2421) to end the probability setting change. Then, when the MODE unit represents a setting change system command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are memorized and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for setting change instruction is received, in the setting change system information setting process, a setting change instruction display prompting the player to change the setting is displayed on the display device 41. Further, when the command during the probability setting change is received, in the setting change system information setting process, the setting changing display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

When the MODE unit does not represent a setting change system command, the effect control device 300 is (
The result of B1325 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a command of the setting confirmation system (B1327). As the command of the setting confirmation system, for example, there is a command (A2508) in which the probability setting value is being confirmed and a command (A2512) in which the probability setting value confirmation is completed. And MOD
When the E part represents a setting confirmation system command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are memorized and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for confirming the probability setting value is received, the setting confirmation system information setting process displays a setting confirmation display on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a command to stop the symbol (B1329). The symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 and a symbol stop command of special figure 2. Then, when the MODE section represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command (". B1330).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y")
, The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols have stopped (B1332), and ends the one-shot command process. In the process of B1332, the game state flag is set to the normal state as an example, but the game state flag is a flag of "changing", "big hit", and "small hit" depending on the timing when this process is executed. Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N".
”) Or when the command in the MODE section is not normal (the result of B1330 is“ N ”).
The effect control device 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

[Look-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the details of the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (B1214) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 40 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead symbol system command processing executed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold information is the information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is the information of special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is set to the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold. Save (B1602).

In the effect control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception wait flag indicating that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B160).
4). This is because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are set, and the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variable command following the look-ahead symbol command. After that, the look-ahead symbol command processing is terminated.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the details of the look-ahead variable command process (B1216) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 41 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing executed by 0.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B1701). When the above-mentioned look-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. When waiting for reception of a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1701 is "
Y ”), clear the look-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) has the latest hold information symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2).
Set the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds (B1703), and acquire the look-ahead variation command MODE section in the sub corresponding to the MODE section of the look-ahead variation command (B1703).
B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead variation system command is set.
Acquire a part (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and ACT unit) are both other than 0 (B1707).
.. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a command other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
When both CT parts are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command composed of the CT unit is saved in the read-ahead fluctuation command area (special figure 1 look-ahead fluctuation command area or special figure 2 look-ahead fluctuation command area) corresponding to the latest hold information and the number of holds (B1708). Then, the look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B170).
9), it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710).
).

It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is changed and the display game is started. Hold changes When starting a display game, if there are no other holds, the first half will be longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half fluctuation is changed, the MODE section of the received look-ahead fluctuation command is converted into the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half change corresponding to the sub-internal look-ahead change command ACT section does not depend on the number of holds. However, because there are different types of reach for the same system,
Temporarily, the effect control device 30 does not convert the ACT unit (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command.
If 0 is used as it is, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. For example, for normal reach
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop off and normal reach +1 stop off.
Therefore, by converting the ACT unit showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the burden of the check processing such as the pre-reading command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, in the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and the ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and the ACT unit) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or , When the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171)
The result of 0 is "N"), and it is assumed that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (B).
The result of 1710 is "Y"), the hold information (latest hold information) to be read ahead is loaded from the look-ahead variable command area (B1711), and the look-ahead lottery process related to the look-ahead effect of the latest hold is executed (B1712). The look-ahead effect includes, for example, a continuous advance notice effect (including a chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a hold change advance notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead notice effect (hold change notice, etc.) occurs (B1713). When the latest hold look-ahead notice effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect (hold change notice) that occurs is an effect that immediately starts (B1715). When the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1716). Then, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, when the latest hold look-ahead notice effect does not occur (B171).
If the result of 3 is "N"), or if the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (
The result of B1715 is "N"), as it is. Ends the look-ahead variable command processing.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 receives a symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2).
Set the special figure type corresponding to the MODE section of the command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT) of the design command.
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of (part) and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol type is an outlier symbol, a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol (2R-A1 etc.) shown in FIG. 27, and a 2R normal jackpot symbol (2).
R-A2 etc.), 6R probability variation jackpot symbol (6R-A1 etc.), 6R normal jackpot symbol (6R-A2 etc.)
Etc.), 16R probability variation jackpot symbol (16R-A1 etc.), 16R normal jackpot symbol (16R-A2 etc.)
Etc.).

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 is a special figure type (special figure 1) of the received variable system command (variable command).
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is undecided (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in the production, such as when a design command of a jackpot symbol is received even though a variable command of an outlier is received. When the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, Ends variable command processing.

When the variable system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variable pattern type from the variable system command (variable command) (B1).
904), the variable effect setting process for setting the variable effect, which is the effect being changed, is executed (B19).
05). There are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous advance notice effect (the remaining number of continuous advance notice effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. (B1907)
).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 43) described above will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the special figure type, effect mode, and set value (probability set value) (B2002), and correspond to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reserved special figure types. First half notice Get the address of the distribution group table (B200)
3). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

When the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is reach fluctuation, the effect control device 300 includes the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode. Set the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and set value (probability set value) (B2004), and set the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the variable pattern type. Get the address of (B2005).

The effect control device 300 draws a lottery for advance notices that appear during the first half fluctuation (before reach) after steps B2003 and B2005 (B2006). The lottery probability of the advance notice depends on the set value. Next, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and set value (probability setting value) (B2007), and set the variable command. The address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT section is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). The lottery probability of the advance notice depends on the set value. After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE section and the ACT section of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010). In addition, the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). After that, a stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol of the decorative special symbol variation display game is executed according to the content of the variation effect such as the reach effect or the advance notice effect (B20).
12). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of the out-of-order symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the variable effect such as the reach effect (B2013).
), Set the display of the notice effect (B2014). Then, the pending decrease corresponding to the special figure type (
The display of the hold shift) is set, and for example, a display in which the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that fluctuates this time is reduced is set (B2015). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B).
2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.) and emits light in a light emitting mode (color, light emitting timing, etc. of each LED) defined by a decoration number. ..

It is possible to set the voice number and the decoration number not only based on the effect content but also by drawing with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability setting value). In this way, the player can see the light emitting mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).
You can enjoy guessing the set value (probability set value) of.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B).
2017), in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate in the display device 41, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). In addition, it should be noted.
The fourth symbol variation is the lamp display unit 1 of the above-mentioned lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.
, 2 (LED) is displayed.

[Big hit command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the jackpot command process (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a procedure of jackpot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit of the received jackpot command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the jackpot command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is a fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare effect is executed (B2102). .. The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Then, the game state of the current game machine 10 (P machine state)
The game status flag indicating is set to during fanfare (B2103), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the jackpot command represents a round when the MODE section of the received jackpot command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"). B2104). When the MODE part represents a round (B210
When the result of 4 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process and indicates the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10. The game status flag is set during the round (B2105, B2106), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE section of the received jackpot command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the jackpot command represents an interval (the result of B2104 is "N"). B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B21
When the result of 07 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process and indicates the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10. Set the game status flag to be in interval (B2108, B2109)
), End the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE section of the received jackpot command does not represent the interval (B210)
7), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit of the jackpot command represents the ending (B2110). When the MODE part represents the ending (B)
When the result of 2110 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, and the current gaming state of the game machine 10 is executed. Ending is set in the game status flag indicating (P machine status) (B2111, B2112), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received jackpot command does not represent the ending (B)
The result of 2110 is "N"), and the effect control device 300 ends the jackpot command process without executing any process.

[Action / effect of the first embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the game machine 10 satisfies the starting condition (for example, winning a prize in the starting winning opening).
A game control means (game control device 100) capable of displaying a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the above on a display unit (for example, a first special figure variable display unit 51 or a second special figure variable display unit 52).
When the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) can change the setting related to the game condition (or the setting related to the game) when the power is turned on to the game machine 10. The game control means (game control device 100) can shift to a variable setting state in which the setting can be changed when the power is turned on to the game machine 10, and when the power is cut off before shifting to the variable setting state. A predetermined display is displayed on the display unit regardless of the state of the game machine 10 (FIG. 34).

Therefore, in the variable setting state (setting is being changed), the setting is being changed or the game machine 1 is being changed by a predetermined display on the display unit for the special figure variation display game which is easy to see from the front of the game machine 10.
It can be suggested that 0 is a state in which a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be played.
Even in the variable setting state, the state of the game machine 10 when the power is cut off is maintained, and the normal display (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) when the fluctuation is stopped is displayed on the display unit for the special figure fluctuation display game. Then, for example, if the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed before the setting change is completed,
It may be misunderstood that it is in a state where it can be played.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a starting condition, such as LED lamps D1 and D.
It can be displayed in 2). The game machine 10 includes this light emitting unit and a display device (collective display device 50) including another light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit. The game control means may blink all the light emitting units of the display device in the variable setting state in which the setting can be changed (FIG. 34F).
..

Therefore, in the variable setting state (setting is being changed), it is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the game machine 10 that the game machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played by displaying a display device (batch display device 50) different from the usual one. ..

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays information suggesting that the setting is in the variable state (for example, the first special figure variation display) in the setting variable state (setting is being changed). It may be displayed on the section 51 or the second special figure variation display section 52) (FIG. 34B).

Therefore, in the variable setting state (setting is being changed), the game machine 10 is in a state where the game cannot be played by displaying a display unit different from the normal display on the display unit for the variable display game.
Can be specified in front of.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) has a display unit (for example, a first special figure variation display unit 51 and a second special figure variation display unit 5) in a variable setting state (setting is being changed).
2) may be turned off (Fig. 34D).

Therefore, in the variable setting state (setting is being changed), the game machine 10 is displayed by displaying a different display (display different from when the variable display game is stopped) on the display unit for the variable display game.
Can be clearly shown on the front of the game machine 10 that is in a state where the game cannot be played.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the same display as the stop result (missing result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) in the variable setting state (for example, the display unit (for example). , The first special figure variation display unit 51 or the second special figure variation display unit 52) may be displayed (FIG. 34C).

Therefore, it can be suggested in front of the game machine 10 that the game machine 10 is not executing the game by performing a predetermined display on the display unit for the variable display game in the variable setting state (setting is being changed). By displaying the stop result (missing result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) from the setting change, the data to be displayed on the display unit for the variable display game is initially set at the end of the setting change. No need to set values.

[Second Embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

The first embodiment relates to a chance look-ahead effect (chance look-ahead notice) by an outlier symbol. The chance eye, which is a specific stop result mode (specific out-of-order stop symbol mode) of the decorative special figure variation display game, can be drawn or selected according to the set value (probability set value), and the set value is suggested or notified by the chance eye. to enable.

[Stop symbol setting process]
The stop symbol setting process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 shows the effect control device 30 in the variation effect setting process (FIG. 44) when the special figure variation display game is executed.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the stop symbol setting process (B2012) executed by 0. In the stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol (stop result) of the decorative special symbol variation display game is determined.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure variation display game related to the received variable command is a big hit (B2301). When the special figure variation display game is a big hit (the result of B2301 is "Y"), the big hit stop symbol ("2") according to the symbol type (B1802).
, 2, 2 ", etc.) will be drawn by lottery (B2302).

When the special figure variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B2301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 has a chance as a continuous advance notice effect, and the number of look-ahead effects (the remaining number of continuous advance notice effects) is 0. It is determined whether or not there is (B2303). When the number of pre-reading effects (remaining number of continuous advance notice effects) is 0 (the result of B2303 is "Y"), step B2308
Move to the processing of. The initial value of the number of pre-reading effects (remaining number of continuous advance notice effects) depends on the expectation of the jackpot of the hold of the look-ahead target, that is, the expectation of the jackpot of the special figure variation display game executed by the hold of the look-ahead target. May be set.

When the number of pre-reading effects (remaining number of continuous advance notice effects) is not 0 (the result of B2303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 pre-reads the chance eye stop symbol mode (chance eye mode, missed symbol group). It is set according to the expected degree of the jackpot on hold (B2304). The chance eye stop symbol mode includes a normal mode in which the set value cannot be suggested or notified, a special mode in which the set value can be suggested (setting suggestion mode), and a definite mode in which the set value can be definitively notified. (Setting notification mode) (see FIG. 47).

For example, when a special 1 reach (SP1 reach) occurs in the special figure variation display game related to the hold (starting memory) of the look-ahead target, the chance eye stop symbol mode is set to the normal mode, and the special 2 reach (SP2 reach). Can be set in a special mode when a special 3 reach (SP3 reach) occurs, and can be set in a definite mode when a special 3 reach (SP3 reach) occurs. As described above, since the expected degree (expected value) of the jackpot is in the order of SP1 reach <SP2 reach <SP3 reach, the chance eye stop symbol mode can be set according to the expected degree of the jackpot of the hold to be read ahead. In addition, it should be noted.
On the contrary, when SP3 reach occurs in the special figure variation display game related to the hold of the look-ahead target, the chance eye stop symbol mode is set to the normal mode, and when SP2 reach occurs, it is set to the special mode and SP3 reach. May be set in a definite mode when

As described above, by setting the chance eye stop symbol mode corresponding to the reach type (reach effect system) of the hold of the look-ahead target, the chance eye stop symbol mode is set according to the expectation of the jackpot of the hold of the look-ahead target. Can be set. Therefore, it is possible to notify the expectation of the jackpot of the hold of the look-ahead target as the look-ahead effect depending on the chance eye stop symbol mode. The reach type that occurs in the special figure variation display game related to the hold of the look-ahead target is the look-ahead variation command (B121).
It can be understood from the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command as 5) and the content of the fluctuation effect (B2010).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect (setting-related effect) that suggests or notifies the set value (B2305). When the chance eye stop symbol mode is the normal mode and the setting suggestion effect is not executed (the result of B2305 is "N"), the missed symbol mode (missing symbol group) of the normal mode is deviated from the set value regardless of the set value. Lottery (B2
306), the stop symbol setting process is terminated. When the chance eye stop symbol mode is a special mode or a definite mode and the setting suggestion effect is executed (the result of B2305 is "Y"), if it is a special mode, from the missed symbol mode (missing symbol group) of the special mode. A lottery stop symbol is drawn with a lottery probability according to a set value, and if it is a confirmed mode, a missed stop symbol is determined (determined) according to a set value from the missed symbol mode (missing symbol group) of the confirmed mode (B2307). ..

The effect control device 300 executes a setting suggestion effect (setting-related effect) that suggests or notifies a set value when the number of pre-reading effects (remaining number of continuous advance notice effects) is 0 (the result of B2303 is “Y”). It is determined whether or not to do so (B2308). For example, if you win a lottery
It may be determined that the setting suggestion effect is executed. When the setting suggestion effect is not executed (B2308)
The result is "N"), and a lottery for the stop symbol is drawn regardless of the set value (B2309). When the setting suggestion effect is executed (the result of B2308 is "Y"), the deviation stop symbol is drawn with the lottery probability according to the set value (B2310). In this way, even when the number of look-ahead effects (the remaining number of continuous advance notice effects) is 0 and the chance look-ahead effect is not executed (the result of B2303 is "Y"), the setting suggestion effect is independent of the chance look-ahead effect. Can be executed.

The processes from steps B2308 to B2310 are optional and may not be executed.

[Chance stop design mode]
FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a chance eye stop symbol mode in the chance eye look-ahead effect. The chance eye stop symbol mode includes a normal mode, a special mode (setting suggestion mode), and a definite mode (setting notification mode).

For example, "2,4,6" (blue), "1,5,9" (green), and "3,7,7" (red) are out of the normal mode. There is a stop symbol. For the out-of-design mode (out-of-design group) of the special aspect, for example, "2, 4, 6" (green),
There are "1,5,9" (red) and "3,7,7" (blue) out-of-order stop symbols. "○, 1,1" and "○, 2," are not related to the color of the outlier symbol aspect (outlier symbol group) of the definite mode.
There are two, "○, 3, 3", "○, 4, 4", "○, 5, 5", and "○, 6, 6" out-of-order stop symbols. In addition, ◯ indicates an arbitrary symbol different from the two aligned symbols (doublet) in the three decorative identification symbols (identification information) in the left and right.

It should be noted that the out-of-order stop symbol in the definite mode (setting notification mode) has a color (for example, gold or rainbow color other than blue, green, red) and a shape that are not used in the normal mode and the special mode, and can be understood. It may be distinguished for ease of use.

In the normal aspect, the selection rate (distribution rate) in the lottery of each out-of-order stop symbol is set to the same value regardless of the setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probabilities (expectations) of each setting when one of the normal modes of the out-of-order stop symbol is selected are the same (100/6 ≈ 17%).
Will be. The probability of FIG. 47 is the expected degree of each set value that can be estimated by the player when a specific out-of-order stop symbol is displayed. Therefore, the normal mode is a mode in which the player cannot estimate the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value cannot be suggested or notified. Note that FIG. 47
In the example of, the selection rate of the out-of-order stop symbol in the normal mode in one lottery is 100 /
It is 3 (≈33.3)%.

In a special aspect, the selection rate in the lottery of each out-of-order stop symbol is set to be different depending on the setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probabilities (expectations) of each setting when one of the special modes of the out-of-stop symbol is selected are different (the same may be applied in some settings).
.. Therefore, the special aspect is an aspect in which the player can estimate the set value, that is, an aspect in which the set value can be suggested.

In the definite mode, the selection rate in the lottery of each out-of-order stop symbol is set to 100% only for one predetermined setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, 1 of the definite mode
When one out-of-order stop symbol is selected, the probability (expectation) of one predetermined setting is 10.
It becomes 0%, and the probability (expectation) of other settings becomes 0%. Therefore, the definite mode is a mode in which the player can recognize the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value can be definitively notified.

It should be noted that the three decorative identification symbols of the special aspect can suggest the set value by having a specific color. For example, the out-of-order stop symbol "2, 4, 6" (blue) in the normal mode is
Cannot suggest the setting value. However, the disengagement stop symbol "2,4,6" (green) in the special aspect, which has the same number part but only the color, is different from the disengagement stop symbol "2,4,6" (blue) in the normal mode.
Having a specific color (green) can suggest a set value. It should be noted that the three decorative identification symbols of the special aspect may suggest a set value by having a specific shape.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing another example of selecting the chance eye stop symbol mode (chance eye mode, out-of-order symbol group) in step B2304. In the example of FIG. 48, the chance eye stop symbol mode is set by lottery with a different selection rate (partsper notation rate) depending on whether the special figure variation display game related to the hold of the look-ahead target is a big hit or not. Therefore, similarly to the case where the chance eye stop symbol mode is set corresponding to the reach type of the hold of the look-ahead target, in the example of FIG. 48, the jackpot of the hold of the look-ahead target is set as the look-ahead effect depending on the chance eye stop symbol mode. The degree of expectation can be notified. Whether the hold of the look-ahead target is a big hit or a miss is determined by the symbol type (B18).
You can see from 02).

As shown in FIG. 48 (A), the expectation of the jackpot of the hold of the look-ahead target may increase in the order of the normal mode <special mode <determined mode. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the expectation of the jackpot of the hold of the look-ahead target may increase in the order of the definite mode <special mode <normal mode. In the case of FIG. 48 (B), even if the confirmation mode or the special mode is selected and the player recognizes that the expectation of the jackpot of the hold of the look-ahead target is low, the setting (setting value) is determined by the confirmation mode. The player will not be discouraged because he / she will be notified.

If the selection rate of the normal mode, the special mode, and the definite mode of FIG. 48 is the same as the selection rate of the SP1 reach, the SP2 reach, and the SP3 reach, the special figure variation display game related to the hold of the look-ahead target can be obtained as described above. It is the same as setting the normal mode, the special mode, and the definite mode in response to the cases where the SP1 reach, the SP2 reach, and the SP3 reach occur.

In addition, as the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the number of big hits from the start of the game, the number of consecutive villas of big hits from the start of the big hit to the return to the normal game state (the number of consecutive chans), and the operating time of the game machine 10 increase, It is also possible to increase the selectivity of the definite mode. Since the determination mode is a privilege for the player, the operation of the game machine 10 can be increased by this configuration.

As described above, the chance eye stop symbol mode is associated with the expected degree of the jackpot of the hold to be read ahead, and the out-of-order stop symbol of the chance eye stop symbol mode (particularly special mode, fixed mode) is drawn with a probability according to the set value. it can. As a result, the missed stop symbol is drawn with the result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game related to the hold of the look-ahead target and the probability (selection rate) according to the set value.

〔Screen transition〕
49A and 49B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order with respect to the second embodiment.

(A) of FIG. 49A is a display screen during execution of the decorative special figure variation display game. The variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variable display area 610, and the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) is being executed in the variable display area 615. In the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 are respectively designated with the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number. The indicated number "0" is displayed.

The hold display unit 630 (start memory display unit) displays the first hold display unit 630a for displaying the first start memory as the first hold display (first start memory display) and the second hold display unit 630a for displaying the second start memory as the second hold display (first hold display). It is composed of a second hold display unit 630b to be displayed as (2 start memory display). 1st hold display unit 630a
Two hold displays 633 are displayed as the first hold display. At present, the hold display 633 is not displayed on the second hold display unit 630b. In addition, the reserved digestion area 64 of the rectangular frame
0 is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen. The variable hold display 633a indicating the hold related to the special figure change display game being executed (starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure change display game) is displayed.
It is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

After that, in (a), a hold (first start memory) is generated by winning a prize in the start winning opening 36, and the hold display 633 (black) corresponding to the generated hold is changed from the normal mode to the mode (black) by the hold change notice. The color) is changed to the hold display. Then, a chance look-ahead effect (continuous notice effect) is set with the hold that has a high expectation of a big hit as the hold for the look-ahead target (B1712, B1716). Further, the number is increased to the number "3" indicating the number of special figure 1 reserved in the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650.

Then, in (c), the decorative special figure variation display game ends, and the first chance look-ahead effect is executed with the display of the out-of-order stop symbol "2, 4, 6" (blue) in the normal mode. .. Here, the whole or a part of the disengagement stop symbol may be blinked so as to make the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect. At the end of the decorative special figure variation display game, the variable pending display 633a is deleted. In the normal aspect, the player cannot estimate the setting (set value).

After that, in (d), the next decorative special figure variation display game is being executed. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold display unit 630a moves to the hold digestion area 640.
The hold display 633 at the right end of is moved. In addition, the number indicating the number of special figure 1 reserved in the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 is reduced to "2".

Then, in (e), the decorative special figure variation display game is completed, and the second chance look-ahead effect is the out-of-order stop symbol "1, 5, 9" (red) in the special mode (setting suggestion mode). Run on display. Here, the whole or a part of the missed stop symbol may be blinked so that the player recognizes that it is a chance look-ahead effect. The setting (set value) is suggested by the out-of-order stop symbol of the special aspect, and the player can estimate the setting (set value) (the probability of setting 4 is high according to FIG. 47).

After that, in (f), the next decorative special figure variation display game is being executed. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold display unit 630a moves to the hold digestion area 640.
The hold display 633 at the right end of is moved. In addition, the number indicating the number of special figure 1 reserved in the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 is reduced to "1".

Then, in (G) of FIG. 49B, the decorative special figure variation display game is completed, and the third chance look-ahead effect is the out-of-order stop symbol "1, 6, 6" in the confirmation mode (setting notification mode). Run on display. Here, the whole or a part of the missed stop symbol may be blinked so that the player recognizes that it is a chance look-ahead effect. The setting (set value) is definitively notified by the out-of-order stop symbol of the confirmation mode, and the player can recognize the setting (set value) (according to FIG. 47, the setting 6 is confirmed).

Further, in the case of the definite mode, the dialogue 635 as a character image may be displayed. The dialogue 635 is selected according to the setting (set value) to be determined by the out-of-order stop symbol in the determination mode. For example, when the setting 6 (set value 6) is confirmed by the disengagement stop symbol "○, 6, 6" as in (G), "Congratulations!" Is displayed, but the disengagement stop symbol "○, 1" is displayed. If setting 1 (setting value 1) is confirmed by ", 1", "sorry" may be displayed.

After that, in (h), the next decorative special figure variation display game is being executed due to the hold of the look-ahead target. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the hold digestion area 640
The hold display 633 (black) to be read ahead at the right end of the first hold display unit 630a moves to. In addition, the number indicating the number of special figure 1 reserved in the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 is reduced to "0".

After that, in (ke), the decorative special figure variation display game ends, the pending display 633a is erased, and the jackpot stop symbol "5, 5, 5" is displayed. And in (ko)
A big hit round starts as a special game state.

With respect to the above screen transition, the dialogue as a character image may be displayed even in the special aspect (e) of FIG. 49A. The dialogue may be selected according to the special aspect of the out-of-stop symbol. In addition, a configuration that suggests a setting is also possible by combining the dialogue and the out-of-order stop symbol of a special aspect. For example, in the combination of the detached stop symbol "1,5,9" (red) and the dialogue "Congratulations!", The probability of setting 6 (set value 6) is increased, and the detached stop symbol "1,5" is set.
, 9 ”(red) and the line“ sorry ”may increase the probability of setting 1 (setting value 1).

Further, with respect to the screen transition of FIG. 49 above, only when the disengagement stop symbol in the definite mode is displayed, the entire or part of the disengagement stop symbol may be blinked conspicuously. Furthermore, FIG. 49
Then, although the chance eye stop symbol mode in the three chance eye look-ahead effects is different each time, the chance eye stop symbol mode may be the same each time. And this same aspect
It may be decided according to the expectation of the jackpot of the hold to be read ahead.

[Action / effect of the second embodiment]
According to the second embodiment, the game machine 10 satisfies the starting condition (for example, winning a prize in the starting winning opening).
A variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) that fluctuates to display a plurality of identification information (decorative special symbols) based on the above is provided on the display device 41 with an effect control means (effect control device 300). When the stop result mode is the special result mode (big hit result mode), a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) can change the setting (setting value) related to the game condition. The start storage means (for example, the game control device 100) can store the start memory that is the execution right of the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition. The pre-determination means (for example, the game control device 100) provides execution information (for example, a variation display game) of the variation display game related to the start memory before the variation display game based on the start memory stored by the start storage means is executed. (Results, fluctuation patterns, etc.) are determined before the fluctuation display game based on the start memory is executed.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is concerned when the stop result mode of the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) does not become the special result mode (big hit result mode). By setting the stop result mode to a specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode or a definite mode), it is possible to execute a notice effect (chance look-ahead effect, chance look-ahead notice) based on the determination result of the pre-determination means. Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300).
Can execute a setting-related effect (setting suggestion effect) that suggests or notifies a setting (set value) using the specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode, a definite mode).

Therefore, it is possible to suggest or notify the setting (set value) in the advance notice effect based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, so that the player not only guesses whether or not it will be a big hit but also sets (set value). Can also be inferred, and it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the advance notice production, even if the expectation of the big hit is low, the player has more fun in guessing the setting (set value), and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting-related effect by having a plurality of identification information (decorative special symbols) of a specific stop result mode have a specific color. .. Therefore, the player pays attention to the color of the identification information (decorative special pattern) of the stop result mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) applies a plurality of identification information (disengagement stop symbols) of a specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode, a definite mode) to the specific stop result mode. Select when executing the variable display game to be derived (FIGS. 43, 44, 46).
.. Therefore, since a plurality of identification information (disengagement stop symbols) can be selected when executing the variable display game instead of at the time of pre-determination, the burden of processing (control) at the time of pre-determination is reduced.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to the initial operation of the accessory (movable member) when the power is turned on.

[Back side of game machine]
First, with reference to FIG. 50, the configuration of the game control device 100 (main board) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a back view of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

On the back surface of the game board 30, a game control device 100 (main board) that collectively controls the game via the switch base 738 is arranged, and the game control device 100 is arranged via the control base 733 above the switch base 738. An effect control device 300 that controls the display device 41 and the like based on the effect control command (effect command) transmitted from is arranged. Behind the effect control device 300 is a protective cover 737 that covers the back surface of the effect control device 300 and the upper part of the back surface of the game control device 100.
Is provided. When the game board 30 configured in this way is housed in the storage portion of the front frame 12, the protective cover 737 and the game control device 100 arranged on the back surface of the game board 30 project to the rear of the front frame 12. To do.

In the upper part of the back surface of the front frame 12, the storage unit 750 that stores the game balls replenished from the replenishment device (not shown) provided in the island facility and arranges the stored game balls to flow down.
Is arranged. A payout unit 790 that pays out the game balls that have flowed down from the storage unit 750 to the upper plate 21 (see FIG. 1) is arranged on one inner portion of the front frame 12.

Further, on the lower part of the back surface of the front frame 12, a payout control device 200 that controls the operation of the payout unit 790 based on the data transmitted from the game control device 100, and a game ball based on the rotation operation of the operation handle 24 are placed. A ball launching device 742 for firing, a connection terminal 743 for connecting to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices are arranged.

Further, on the lower part of the back surface of the game control device 100, a setting key switch 93 (key switch) and a setting value changing switch 102 (setting value changing button switch) of the setting changing device 42 (setting changing means) capable of changing the setting related to the game condition , Button switch) and a 7-segment type probability setting value display device 143 (display, LED lamp) are arranged. As described above, the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the probability setting value display device 143 are provided inside the game machine 10, and cannot be operated (accessible) unless, for example, the front frame 12 is opened. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting changing device 42, and cannot confirm the display of the probability setting value display device 143. Further, the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the probability setting value display device 143 are the game machine 10.
Since it is provided inside, it is not concealed (overlapping) by the initial operation of the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessories 95a described later.

The probability setting value display device 143 may be provided at a position that is not concealed by the initial operation of the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a, and may be provided exclusively on the front surface of the game board 30, for example. Further, when the probability set value is visually displayed from the front of the game board 30, the display (LED lamp) or the like of the batch display device 50 may be used as the probability set value display device 143, and the display device 41 may be used. May be used as the probability set value display device 143. Further, even when the probability setting value display device 143 is provided so as to be visible from the front surface of the game board 30, it is preferable that the probability setting value display device 143 is not visible to the player and only the operator can see it. For example, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 may be made visible by the operator performing a specific operation on the effect button 25. Further, the display of the probability set value display device 143 may be made visible by the player by using a special member (for example, a polarizing filter) or by receiving a specific signal from a hall computer (not shown). Similarly, the setting changing device 42 is made accessible when the front frame 12 is opened, but it is provided on the front surface of the game board 30 or on the display device 41 or the like so that the operator can perform a specific operation or the like. It may be made operable.

Further, the accessory ratio display unit 68 of the status display device 152 that displays the accessory ratio described later in FIG. 78A may be used as the probability set value display device 143, and the state display device as the probability set value display device 143. When the accessory ratio display unit 68 of 152 is used, the four 7-segment types of the accessory ratio display unit 68 (8-segment type including the point portion) while the setting is being changed or the setting is confirmed.
The probability set value may be displayed on any one of the indicators 900 (for example, the leftmost or rightmost indicator 900). The accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display unit 68 except when the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. Therefore, the accessory ratio display unit 68 can be used together with the display of the accessory ratio and the display of the set value.

Further, a cover member may be provided so as to cover the front surface of the setting key switch 93. By providing the cover member in this way, it is possible to prevent the operation of the setting key switch 93 by a person who does not have the setting key or a person who commits fraud, and it is possible to enhance the crime prevention effect. further,
When the cover member is provided, a detection sensor may be provided to detect whether or not the cover member covers the setting key switch 93. By inputting the detection signal from the detection sensor to the second input port 123 as shown in FIG. 3, for example, the game control device 100 can determine whether or not the cover member covers the setting key switch 93. .. For example, when the front frame 12 is closed but the cover member does not cover the front surface of the setting key switch 93, the game control device 100 sends an error notification to the display device 41 and the speaker 19.
, LEDs, lamps, etc. can be used to take security measures and fraud measures.

[Production control device according to the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the effect control system of the game machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

In the effect control device 300 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the effect control device 300 of the first embodiment is provided with the movable body control circuit 334a instead of the board effect movable body control circuit 334. (See FIG. 4).

The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46.
And the frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls the frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.)
At the same time, a movable body control circuit 334a is provided.

The movable body control circuit 334a drives and controls the board effect device 44 provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and the frame effect device 9 provided on the glass frame 15.
5 is driven and controlled.

As shown in FIG. 52A, for example, the board effect device 44 includes internal accessories 44a and 44b (inner movable members) that enhance the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41, a motor (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 52A is a front view when the board effect device 44 of the game board 30 according to the third embodiment operates.

The internal accessory 44a of the board effect device 44 is housed in the back surface of the center case 40 so as not to be visible to the player, and is located in front of the display device 41 by moving to cover the upper side of the display device 41. .. On the internal accessory 44a, the characters "super heat" are drawn to inform that the expectation of a big hit is particularly high. Similarly, the internal accessory 44b of the board effect device 44 is located in front of the display device 41 by moving, and covers the lower left side of the display device 41. In addition, the character "♪" is drawn on the internal accessory 44b to notify that the expectation of a big hit is high. Sound may be generated from the speaker along with the moving operation of the internal accessory 44b.

In addition, in the advance notice lottery of steps B2006 and B2009 of FIG. 44, the effect control device 300 sets the set value when the internal accessories 44a and 44b are drawn by lottery with a selection rate (probability) according to the set value. Can be suggested. And the player has more fun guessing the set value,
The interest of the game is improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52B, for example, the frame effect device 95 includes an external accessory 95a (outer movable member) that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41, a motor (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 52B is a front view when the frame effect device 95 of the glass frame 15 (open portion) according to the third embodiment operates.

The external accessory 95a of the frame effect device 95 is housed inside the glass frame 15 so as not to be visible to the player, and when the frame effect device 95 is driven, it becomes a hemispherical member above the glass frame 15. Protruding. On the external accessory 95a, a character 95b is drawn to notify that the expectation of a big hit is high. The frame effect device 95 is not limited to the glass frame 15, but the front frame 1
It may be provided in 2.

The effect control device 300 can suggest the set value by drawing the external accessory 95a at a selection rate (probability) according to the set value in the advance notice lottery in steps B2006 and B2009 of FIG. 44. .. Then, the player has more fun in guessing the set value, and the interest of the game is improved.

Then, the effect control device 300 executes the movable body control process in order to drive and control the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 95 using the movable body control circuit 334a.

[Movable body control process]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the movable body control process according to the third embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is turned on (B3001). It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not the power failure is restored.

When the effect control device 300 determines that the power is not turned on (the result of B3001 is ".
N ”), the normal control process according to the effect content set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44) and the like is started (B3003). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power is turned on (the result of B3001 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the command for which the probability setting is being changed is received (B3002).

It is determined that the command whose probability setting is being changed has been received when the MODE section represents the setting change system by the command whose probability setting is being changed in the one-shot command processing (FIG. 39) (the result of B1325 is "Y"). Will be done. That is, the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is opened (the result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting changing device 42
Is turned on (the result of A1024 or A1028 is "Y"), and the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A in FIG. 5B).
1041). When the setting value change switch 102 of the setting change device 42 is pressed during the probability setting change, the setting value related to the game condition is changed. Further, the information of the set value regarding the changed game condition is displayed on the probability set value display device 143.

When the effect control device 300 determines that the command for which the probability setting is being changed is being received (the result of B3002 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the command for completing the probability setting change is being received ( B3004).

The command for ending the probability setting change is when the MODE section represents the setting change system by the command for ending the probability setting change in the one-shot command processing (FIG. 39) (the result of B1325 is "Y").
It is determined that it is being received. That is, the probability set value has been changed (A2406 in FIG. 10).
When the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A2416 is "Y"), the command to end the probability setting change is issued from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 30.
It is transmitted to 0 (A2421).

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command during the probability setting change has not been received (the result of B3002 is "N"), that is, when the power is normally turned on, a main body frame opening error occurs. It is determined whether or not it is occurring (B3006). For example, when a state-on command indicating a main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is received as an error / illegal command (B1315), it can be determined that a main body frame opening error is occurring.

When the effect control device 300 determines that it has received the command to end the probability setting change (
When the result of B3004 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting change is completed, it is determined whether or not a main body frame opening error is occurring (B3006). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for completing the probability setting change has not been received (the result of B3004 is "N").
), That is, when the probability setting is being changed, the initial operation control process is started only for the internal accessories 44a and 44b (B3005).

In the initial operation control process (B3005) of the internal accessories 44a and 44b, for example, the motor for moving the internal accessory 44a and the motor for moving the internal accessory 44b of the board effect device 44 are driven to drive the internal accessories 44a and 44b, respectively. Is operated in front of the display device 41, and then controlled to operate to the initial position (initial operation control). Further, for example, the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b is performed after the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44a is completed. In this way, the internal accessory 44
The initial operation control of a and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b are executed in order. Similarly, when other internal accessories different from the internal accessories 44a and 44b are further attached, the initial operation control of each internal accessory is executed in order. The initial operation control of the internal accessory 44a and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b may be executed in parallel at the same time.

When the effect control device 300 determines that an error in opening the main body frame is occurring (the result of B3006 is "Y"), that is, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open, the internal accessory The initial operation control process is started only for 44a and 44b (B3005). As described above, when the setting changing device 42 is operated or the front frame 12 is opened, the effect control device 300 starts only the initial operation control processing of the internal accessories 44a and 44b, and starts the external combination. It functions as a regulatory means that regulates the initial operation of the object 95a so that it is not executed.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the main body frame opening error is not occurring (B3).
When the result of 006 is "N"), that is, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed, the regulation of the initial operation of the external accessory 95a is released, and the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessory are removed. Thing 95a
The initial operation control process of (B3007) is started.

In the initial operation control processing (B3007) of the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a, the internal accessories 44a and 44b of the board effect device 44 perform the same initial operation control as the processing of the B3005. In the external accessory 95a of the frame effect device 95, the motor for moving the external accessory 95a is driven so as to project the external accessory 95a from above the glass frame 15 (open portion), and then to the initial position. Control to operate is performed (initial operation control). In this way, the effect control device 300 functions as a control means for controlling the operations of the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a. When another external accessory different from the external accessory 95a is further attached, the initial operation control of the external accessory 95a and the initial operation control of the other external accessory are executed in order.

Further, in the initial operation control process (B3007) of the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a, the time required for the initial operation control of the internal accessories 44a and 44b having a large number of movable accessories is longer than the time required for the initial operation control of the external accessories 95a. It takes longer than the time required for the initial operation control of. In addition, regardless of the number of movable accessories, even when there are a plurality of production modes of the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the operation is complicated, the time required for the initial operation control of the internal accessories 44a and 44b is the external combination. It is longer than the time required for the initial operation control of the object 95a. In addition, the center case 40 and the glass frame 15 (
Between (open portion) (for example, a position between the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a),
For example, when a movable accessory that moves toward the center of the game machine 10 is provided, it is desirable to perform initial operation control on the movable accessory in the same manner as the external accessory 95a. That is, when the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is open, the initial operation of the movable accessory is regulated and not executed in the same manner as the initial operation of the external accessory 95a.

When the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is open, the initial operation of the external accessory 95a is regulated so as not to be executed, but the external accessory 95a (first effect unit, first). Only the initial operation of the entire movable member) is regulated, that is, without executing the initial operation of the entire external accessory 95a.
The operation mode (for example, vibration, rocking, etc.) of the movable member (second effect unit, second movable member, character 95b) of the external accessory 95a other than the initial operation, and the light emitting member (second effect unit, second movable member). ) (For example, the eyes (LED) of the character 95b emit light) may be feasible. That is, such a second effect unit can switch the effect mode to the initial mode in the initial state before executing the predetermined operation (normal operation) of the second effect unit. By doing so, the external accessory 95a has the second effect unit inside the opened front frame 12 (main body frame, body unit) even when the initial operation of the first effect unit is restricted and not executed. The initial aspects of can be executed in advance.

[Timing chart of initial operation control processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 54A and 54B, the timing of the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54A is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 54B is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process of the comparative example.

First, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54A.

When the power is turned on at time T1, the probability setting value changing flag and the front frame open detection switch 6
When the signal of 4 (main body frame open detection switch) is turned on, the initial operation of the internal accessory 44a is started. Before turning on the power, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on, but since the game control device 100 and the like are not operating, the probability is set until the power is turned on. The value changing flag and the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) are not turned on. In addition, the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44a is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53). The initial operation of the external accessory 95a is regulated and is not executed.

By setting the probability setting value changing flag in the main process (Fig. 5B) (A1038)
, The flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is set in the probability setting value confirmation process (FIG. 11) (A2505), and is turned on. Commands corresponding to these flags are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B and A2 in FIG. 11).
508). Further, when the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) is turned on (A2202), a state on command indicating a main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (). A2207, A2217).

When the operator finishes changing the probability set value at time T2 (A2414 and A24 in FIG. 10).
15), the probability setting value changing flag is cleared and turned off, and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set and turned on (A2505 in FIG. 11). In the first embodiment, the flag for changing the probability setting value was on until the setting key switch 93 was turned off, but the third embodiment.
In the embodiment, it is assumed that the probability setting value changing flag is turned off and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is turned on when the change of the probability setting value is completed. As in the first embodiment, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag may be omitted, and the probability setting value changing flag may be turned on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time T3, the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is cleared and turned off (A2510 in FIG. 11).

At time t1 after time T3, the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44b is executed by ending the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44a (B3005 in FIG. 53).

In the present embodiment, the time required for the initial operation of the internal accessory 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a (initial operation time) is set to the same time, but different times may be used. For example, the initial operation time of the internal accessories 44a and 44b, which tend to be complicated operation modes, is the external accessory 9
It may be longer than the initial operation time of 5a. Further, the effect control device 300 increases the motor output to increase the speed of the initial operation of the internal accessories 44a and 44b, thereby increasing the internal accessories 44a and 44.
The initial operation time of b may be shorter than the initial operation time of the external accessory 95a.

When the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed at time T4, the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) is turned off, and the state off command (A2204) indicating that the main body frame open error has not occurred. ) Is an error / illegal command, and the effect control device 300
Will be sent to. Then, the regulation of the initial operation of the external accessory 95a is released, and the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is executed (B3007 in FIG. 53). As described above, in the initial operation control process of the present embodiment, the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is not executed when the front frame 12 is open.

At time t2 after time T4, the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44b ends. As described above, in the initial operation control process of the present embodiment, the initial operation control process of the internal accessories 44a and 44b is performed.
It is started before the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a and ends before the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a.

After that, at time t3, the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is completed, so that the game machine 1
You will be able to play at 0.

Next, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the comparative example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54B. The signals of the probability setting value changing flag, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag, and the front frame opening detection switch 64 in the comparative example are also from time T1 to time T4 at the same timing as the initial operation control process of the third embodiment. It is turned on and off.

Here, the internal accessory 44a of the comparative example does not execute the initial operation control process even when the power is turned on at the time T1, and the initial operation is performed by closing the front frame 12 (main body frame) at the time T1. Control processing is executed. Therefore, the internal accessory 44a and the external accessory 95a of the comparative example
The initial operation control process of is started at the same timing (time T4).

After that, at time t3, when the initial operation control processing of the internal accessory 44a and the external accessory 95a is completed, the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44b is executed. On the other hand, the time t3 is the time when the game machine 10 can play the game according to the initial operation control process according to the present embodiment as described above.

Then, at time t4, the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44b is completed, so that the game machine 10 of the comparative example can also be played. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example, the time when the game becomes possible is later than that of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.

The internal accessories 44a and 44b of the present embodiment were subjected to the initial operation control process when the power was turned on at time T1, but when the front frame 12 was closed at time T4, the external accessories 95a
An internal accessory that executes the initial operation control process at the same timing as the above may be provided. For example, the operation mode of the movable member (internal accessory) that affects the game, such as the opening / closing door 39c of the large winning opening and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, may be changed according to the set value. Is
After the set value is set, the initial operation control process according to the operation mode of the set value may be executed. By executing the initial operation control process after the set value is set in this way, the movable members having an influence on the game (the opening / closing door 39c of the large winning opening and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37,
It can be confirmed whether the V winning opening (movable member that opens and closes the predetermined area) operates normally according to the operation mode of the set value. The V winning opening (predetermined area) is a winning device that may be provided in the special variable winning device 39, and when a game ball enters the V winning opening, a V winning notification is given and the big hit ends. The later probabilistic state (high probability state, specific game state, one of predetermined game states) is determined. In addition, the initial operation control process of the movable member that affects such a game is
It may be executed not only when the front frame 12 is closed at the time T4 but also when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time T3. Further, the initial operation control process of the movable member may be executed when the change of the probability setting at the time T2 is completed.

Further, for the command during the probability setting change, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened (A1 in FIG. 5A).
When the result of 023 or A1027 is "Y") and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is turned on (the result of A1024 or A1028 is "Y"), the game control device 1
Although it was decided to be transmitted from 00 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B), even if it is transmitted by turning on the setting key switch 93 of the setting changing device 42 regardless of the open state of the front frame 12. Good. Further, after the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the command during the probability setting change may be transmitted at the timing when the setting value change switch 102 is first pressed.

Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on or the front frame 12 is opened after the power is turned on, the probability setting value changing flag is set (the command during the probability setting change is transmitted). State) The probability setting value may be changed in a variable setting state, and the probability setting value may be confirmed by setting the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode in this variable setting state. Then, when the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is set, the operations of both the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a may be restricted so as not to be executed, or may be returned to the initial position. .. It should be noted that the initial operation control processing of the internal accessories 44a and 44b is executed when the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is set in the same manner as when the command during the probability setting change of the present embodiment is transmitted. On the other hand, the initial operation of the external accessory 95a may be restricted so that it is not executed.

[Action / effect of the third embodiment]
The game machine 10 provided with an openable frame (for example, a glass frame 15 or a front frame 12 (main body frame)) on which the game board 30 having the game area 32 according to the third embodiment is arranged is predetermined inside the frame. (Internal accessory 44a, 44b) that executes the operation of, and an outer movable member (external accessory 95a) that executes a predetermined operation on the outside of the frame, and the setting related to the game is changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It includes a possible setting changing means (setting changing device 42) and a control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member. The control means can execute the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member when the power is turned on to the game machine 10, and the setting can be changed when the power is turned on to the game machine 10. When it is in the state, the initial operation of the outer movable member is not executed, and the initial operation of the inner movable member can be executed.

According to such a game machine 10, when the control means (effect control device 300) is in a state where the setting can be changed when the power is turned on to the game machine 10 (for example, the setting changing means). When is being operated (when the setting key switch 93 is on) or when the frame is open), the initial operation of the outer movable member is not executed. Therefore, when operating the setting changing means or opening / closing the frame, it is possible to prevent the outer movable member from coming into contact with the operator or interfering with the frame, and the initial operation of the movable member is appropriate in the gaming machine. Can be executed.

Further, the game machine 10 according to the third embodiment further includes a setting display device (probability setting value display device 143) capable of displaying a setting value corresponding to a setting related to the game. The setting display device is provided at a position that is not concealed by the initial operation of the inner movable member (internal accessory 44a, 44b) and the outer movable member (external accessory 95a). According to such a game machine 10, it is possible to prevent the setting display device from being concealed by the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member during the probability setting change, so that the operation of the operator is suppressed from being interrupted. it can.

In the game machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (effect control device 300) releases the regulation regarding the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) when the state in which the setting can be changed ends. Make it possible. According to such a game machine 10, when operating the setting changing means,
When opening and closing the frame, it is possible to prevent the outer movable member from coming into contact with the operator or interfering with the frame.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (effect control device 300) takes longer than the time required for the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) to take longer than the time required for the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a). The initial operation of the accessories 44a, 44b) is executed. According to such a game machine 10, the initial operation of the inner movable member, which requires a long time for initial operation control, is started during the probability setting change, and the initial operation of the outer movable member, which requires a short time for initial operation control, is It is started by closing the frame (front frame 12, main body frame) after the probability setting change is completed. Therefore, as compared with the case where the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member is started at the same time after the frame is closed, the initial operation of the inner movable member, which takes time, can be started in advance, so that the game can be started. It is possible to shorten the time until.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, is the control means (effect control device 300) operating the setting changing means (setting changing device 42) even when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10? Alternatively, when the frame (front frame 12, main body frame) is open, a regulating means (effect control device 300) for restricting the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) is provided. According to such a game machine 10, since the outer movable member does not move when the probability setting is changed or the frame is opened, it is possible to prevent the outer movable member from coming into contact with the operator or interfering with the frame. ..

Further, the game machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes an open portion (glass frame 15) that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body portion (front frame 12, main body frame). The game machine 10 has a first effect unit (external accessory 95a, first movable member) that executes a predetermined operation outside the open portion, and a setting changing means (setting) that can change the setting related to the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It includes a changing device 42) and a control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the first effect unit. The first effect unit has a second effect unit (character 95b, second movable member) capable of switching the effect mode in the initial state before executing a predetermined operation (normal operation). The control means can execute the initial mode of the second effect unit and the initial operation of the first effect unit by turning on the power to the game machine 10, and changes the setting as the power is turned on to the game machine 10. If it is possible, the first
It is possible to execute the initial mode of the second effect unit without executing the initial operation of the effect unit. According to such a game machine 10, the second effect unit (character 95b, second movable member), which is unlikely to come into contact with the operator or interfere with the frame, is the first effect unit (external accessory 95a, first). 1 It can be initialized in the initial mode prior to the initial operation of the movable member).

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 67. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. The fourth embodiment relates to a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a set value.

[Processing when receiving set value]
First, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the set value reception processing (B1324) in the single-shot command processing (FIG. 39) described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the set value reception processing according to the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received set value is a normal command (B4001). If the command is not normal (the result of B4001 is "N"), the processing at the time of receiving the set value is terminated. When the command is normal (the result of B4001 is "Y"), the set value is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4002). Then, the effect control device 300 draws a light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value in order to perform the setting suggestion effect that can suggest the set value in the predetermined light emitting unit (B4003). .. The predetermined light emitting part is
For example, the projecting effect unit 13 (see FIG. 1) has a light emitting mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit.
It is a setting discriminating element that causes the player to estimate the setting (setting value). The predetermined light emitting unit (effect device) is not limited to the protrusion effect unit 13, but is a lighting member (frame decoration device 18, decoration device 22, board decoration device 46, grand prize opening LED 39d, etc.) and a display device 41 that can emit light. You can use the display screen of.

[Lottery table for initial light emission mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the selection rate of the initial light emission mode (initial color) of the setting suggestion effect drawn by the effect control device 300 when the set value is received will be described. FIG. 56 is a table for determining the initial light emission mode (initial color determination) of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 56, the initial color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from, for example, six types of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, and is set according to the received setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6). The selection rate and selectable types change.

First, it will be described that the types of initial colors that can be selected change according to the received setting value. When the received setting values are settings 1 to 3, the initial color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from white, blue, and green. On the other hand, when the received setting value is setting 4, green can be selected as the initial color, in the case of setting 5, red can be selected together with green, and in the case of setting 6, all types can be selected. It will be possible. Therefore, the player sets the setting 4 or more when the initial color of the predetermined light emitting portion of the game machine 10 is green, the setting 5 or more when it is red, and the setting when it is a rainbow. It can be estimated to be 6.

Next, it will be described that the selection rate of the initial color selected by the lottery changes according to the received set value.

When the received setting value is setting 1, the selection rate of white is 80%, the selection rate of blue is 15%, and the selection rate of yellow is 5% as the initial color. The selection rate of white as the initial color is set to 75% in the case of setting 2, 70% in the case of setting 3, and so on, so that the selection rate decreases as the received set value increases. .. In the present embodiment, the white selectivity is set to decrease in 5% increments each time the received set value is increased by one, but a range of certain set values (for example, settings 4 to 6) is set. May be set to be the same. As described above, the lower the set value, the higher the selection rate of white as the initial color. Therefore, when the player finds the game machine 10 in which the initial color of the predetermined light emitting portion is white, the game machine is concerned. It is easy to estimate that 10 is likely to be a low setting platform.

On the other hand, the selectivity of yellow as the initial color is 5% in the case of setting 1 and 10 in the case of setting 2.
%, 15% in the case of settings 3 to 6, and the selection rate is set to increase as the received set value increases. In the present embodiment, the selection rate of yellow in the cases of settings 3 to 6 is fixed at 15%, but the selection rate may be set higher as the set value becomes higher.

The selection rate of the initial color (green, red) that can be selected in setting 4 or 5 and the initial color (green, red, rainbow) that can be selected in setting 6 is set to 5%, respectively. Therefore, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that a color other than white is selected as the initial color. Therefore, when the player finds the game machine 10 in which the initial color of the predetermined light emitting portion is other than white, the player concerned. It becomes easy to estimate that the game machine 10 is likely to be a platform with a high setting.

The selectivity of each initial color is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 56, and the value may be changed as appropriate. For example
The rainbow selectivity in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. In this case, the selection rates of other colors are appropriately adjusted so that the overall selection rate becomes 100% in accordance with the change in the selection rate of the rainbow.

[Fanfare production setting process]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) in the above-mentioned jackpot command process (FIG. 45) will be described as an aspect in which the light emitting mode of the setting suggestion effect changes. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare effect setting process according to the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received fanfare command is a normal command (B4101). If the command is not normal (the result of B4101 is "N"), the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. When the command is normal (B4)
The result of 101 is “Y”), and the number of jackpots stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 is updated by +1 (B4102).

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of big hits has reached a predetermined number (B).
4103). When the number of big hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4103 is "Y"),
The effect control device 300 draws a light emitting mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (B4104), and sets the fanfare display on the display device 41 and the fanfare sound from the speaker according to the set value. (B4105). The prescribed number of times is 3, 6, 9 ...
Can be set for each multiple of a specific (for example, 3). The predetermined number of times may be a natural number, for example, every odd number (1 time, 3 times ...) or every integer (2 times, 4 times ...).
), Or a specific sequence (for example, a Fibonacci sequence of 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, ...).

On the other hand, when the number of big hits is not the predetermined number (the result of B4103 is "N"),
The effect control device 300 sets the fanfare display and the fanfare sound according to the set values (B4105). Here, the fanfare display and the fanfare sound may be set by lottery with a selection rate (probability) according to the set value. After that, when the processing of B4105 is completed, the effect control device 300 ends the fanfare effect setting process.

[Promotion lottery table for light emitting mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, regarding the selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by the promotion (step-up) lottery of the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process at the start of the big hit. explain. FIG. 58 is a table for determining the light emitting mode (determining the color of the promotion lottery) by the promotion lottery of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment. Figure 5
8 (A) is a table for determining the promotion lottery color when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white, and FIG. 58 (B) is a table for determining the promotion lottery color when the current color is blue. is there.

As shown in FIG. 58 (A), the promotion lottery colors of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white are, for example, no promotion (white continuation), blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow. It is selected from 6 types, and the selection rate and selectable types change according to the current setting values (settings 1 to 6).

First, it will be described that the types of promotion lottery colors that can be selected change according to the current set value. When the current set value is set 1 to 3, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from no promotion, blue, and yellow. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 4, green can be selected as a promotion lottery color, if setting 5, red as well as green can be selected, and if setting 6, all types can be selected. It becomes selectable. Therefore, the player sets the setting 4 or higher when the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting portion of the game machine 10 is green, the setting 5 or higher when the color is red, and the setting when the color is rainbow. It can be estimated to be 6.

Next, it will be described that the selection rate of the promotion lottery color selected by the lottery changes according to the current set value.

When the current setting value is setting 1, the selection rate of no promotion (white continuation) as the promotion lottery color is 8.
The selectivity of blue is 0%, the selectivity of blue is 15%, and the selectivity of yellow is 5%. Then, the selection rate without promotion as the promotion lottery color is set to 75% in the case of setting 2, 70% in the case of setting 3, and so on, so that the selection rate decreases as the current setting value increases. Will be done. In the present embodiment, each time the current set value is increased by one, the selection rate without promotion is set to decrease in increments of 5%, but a range of certain set values (for example, settings 4 to 6) is set. ) May be set to be the same.
In this way, the lower the set value, the higher the selection rate of no promotion (white continuation) as the promotion lottery color, so that the player is in a state where the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting portion is not promoted during the game. By confirming that, it becomes easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 being played is likely to be a platform with a low setting.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is 5% in the case of setting 1, 10% in the case of setting 2, and 15% in the case of settings 3 to 6, which are high current setting values. The selection rate is set to increase as the color increases. In the present embodiment, the selection rate of yellow in the cases of settings 3 to 6 is fixed at 15%, but the selection rate may be set higher as the set value becomes higher.

The selection rate of the promotion lottery color (green, red) that can be selected in setting 4 or 5 and the promotion lottery color (green, red, rainbow) that can be selected in setting 6 is set to 5%, respectively. .. Therefore, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that a color other than no promotion (white continuation) will be selected as the promotion lottery color. Therefore, the player changes the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting portion due to the promotion during the game. By confirming that the game machine 10 is in the game, it becomes easy to estimate that the game machine 10 is likely to be a high setting table. Further, by the promotion lottery, it can be estimated that the gaming machine 10 being played is likely to be a high setting platform, which can be linked to the motivation of the player to continue the game.

Subsequently, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is blue is shown in FIG. 58 (
As shown in B), for example, it is selected from five types: no promotion (continue blue), yellow, green, red, and rainbow.
Similar to the case where the current color is white described above, the selection rate and selectable types change according to the current setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6).

First, it will be described that the types of promotion lottery colors that can be selected change according to the current set value. When the current setting value is setting 1 or setting 2, either no promotion or yellow is selected as the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 3, green can be selected as a promotion lottery color, if setting 4 or setting 5, red as well as green can be selected, and if setting 6, red can be selected. All types can be selected. Therefore, the player has set 3 or more when the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting portion of the game machine 10 is green, and setting 4 when the color is red.
With the above, in the case of a rainbow, it can be estimated that the setting is 6.

Next, it will be described that the selection rate of the promotion lottery color selected by the lottery changes according to the current set value.

When the current setting value is setting 1, the selection rate of no promotion (blue continuation) as the promotion lottery color is 9.
5%, yellow selectivity is 5%. The selection rate without promotion as the promotion lottery color is 80% in the case of setting 2 and setting 3, 75% in the case of setting 4, and the selection rate decreases as the current setting value increases. Is set. In the present embodiment, the selection rate without promotion is set to be the same value or decrease each time the current set value is increased by one. In this way, the lower the set value, the higher the selection rate of no promotion (blue continuation) as the promotion lottery color.
By confirming that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit is in the state of no promotion during the game, the player estimates that the game machine 10 during the game is likely to be a low setting table. It becomes easier to do.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is 5% for setting 1, 20% for setting 2, 15% for setting 3 or setting 4, and setting 5 or setting 6. In some cases, it is set to 20%. Here, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is set 3 or 4 (15%).
In the case of setting 2 (20%), which is a low setting, the selection rate is higher than that in the case of setting 2. However, in the case of setting 3, the selection rate with promotion is the selection rate of yellow (15%) and the selection rate of green (20).
%), Which is equivalent to the selection rate with promotion in the case of setting 2. In addition, setting 2
Compared to the case of, in the case of setting 3, there is a possibility that it will be promoted by two steps at once and become green, so setting 4
In the case of, there is a possibility that it will be promoted by 3 levels and become red. In the case of setting 5, the promotion lottery color may be promoted to red in three stages at once, and in the case of setting 6, it may be promoted to rainbow in four stages. Therefore, it is easy for the player to estimate that the gaming machine 10 during the game is likely to be a high-setting platform by confirming that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit has been promoted in multiple stages during the game. Become.

In addition, the promotion lottery color (not shown) of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting part is green or later is also promoted or promoted to a higher color as in the case where the current color is blue. It is possible to determine the color of the promotion lottery to see if it changes to. According to such an aspect, the player confirms that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit has been promoted to a higher rank (red or rainbow) during the game, so that the game machine 10 during the game is set high. It is easy to estimate that it is likely to be the platform of.

In the present embodiment, the case where the promotion lottery is performed in the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process has been described, but the demotion lottery may be performed. By performing the demotion lottery, for example, when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is blue, it can be changed to white.

Further, in the case where the demotion lottery is performed, for example, after being promoted to the rainbow, the demotion lottery may not be performed. By not performing the demotion lottery after reaching the rainbow in this way, the player can continue to obtain a sense of accomplishment that the setting suggestion effect of the high setting (setting 6) has been reached, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be made to.

Further, in the promotion lottery, it was possible to promote in multiple stages, but in the demotion lottery, it may be demoted to a lower color one step at a time. In this way, in the demotion lottery, by avoiding the mode of demotion in multiple stages, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from suddenly dropping to a low setting and disappointing the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the selection rate of each promotion lottery color is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 58 and can be appropriately changed in the same manner as the selection rate of the initial color described with reference to FIG. 56. For example, the selection rate of the rainbow in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. Further, as the current color becomes a higher color, the selection rate of the higher color may be further increased. Specifically, for example, setting 6
In the case of, the selection rate of the rainbow is set to 10% when the current color is green, and the selection rate of the rainbow is set to 35% when the current color is red. The selection rate of is high.

[Ending effect setting process]
The mode in which the light emitting mode of the setting suggestion effect in the above-mentioned jackpot command process (FIG. 45) changes is not limited to the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) (see FIG. 57), and the ending effect setting is shown in FIG. 59. It may be generated by the process (B2111). FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ending effect setting process according to the modified example of the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received ending command is a normal command (B4201). When the command is not normal (the result of B4201 is "
N "), the ending effect setting process is completed. When the command is normal (B420
The result of 1 is "Y"), and the number of jackpots stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 is increased by +1.
Update (B4202).

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of big hits has reached a predetermined number (B).
4203). When the number of big hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4203 is "Y"),
The effect control device 300 draws a light emitting mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (B4204), and sets the ending display on the display device 41 and the ending sound from the speaker according to the set value. (B4205). Here, the ending display and the ending sound may be set by lottery with a selection rate (probability) according to the set value. The predetermined number of times may be a natural number, and may be set for each specific multiple, odd number, or integer number, or set to be a specific sequence.

On the other hand, when the number of big hits is not the predetermined number (the result of B4203 is "N"),
The effect control device 300 sets the ending display and the ending sound according to the set values (
B4205). After that, when the processing of B4205 is completed, the effect control device 300 ends the ending effect setting process.

The selection rate of the light emitting mode (promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery of the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery (B4204) in the ending effect setting process at the start of the big hit is shown in the fanfare effect setting process described in FIG. 58. It may be the same as the lottery (B4104).

[Processing when receiving the number of out balls]
Further, when the number of out balls is received, the light emitting mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. FIG. 60 shows
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the out ball number reception processing (B1320 of FIG. 39) which concerns on 4th Embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received out-ball number command is a normal command (B4301). When the command is not normal (the result of B4301 is "N"
”), Ends the processing when the number of out balls is received. When the command is normal (the result of B4301 is "Y"), the number of out balls is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4302).
The number of out balls can be counted, for example, in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (FIG. 8).

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of out balls has reached a predetermined number (B4).
303). When the number of out balls is a predetermined number (the result of B4303 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 draws a light emitting mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (color).
B4304). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and may be set, for example, every multiple of a specific number (every 1000 balls, that is, 1000, 2000, 3000 ...). In addition, it should be noted.
The selection rate of the light emitting mode (promotion lottery color) by the lottery (B4304) may be the same as that of the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above in FIG. 58.

On the other hand, when the number of out balls is not a predetermined number (the result of B4303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the processing at the time of receiving the number of out balls.

[RTC reading process]
Further, the light emitting mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed during the RTC reading process (B0009) in the main process (FIG. 36). FIG. 61 shows the RTC reading process (B) according to the fourth embodiment.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 0009).

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received signal from the RTC338 is a normal signal (B4401). When the signal is not normal (B4401 result is "N")
, Ends the RTC reading process. When the signal is normal (the result of B4401 is "Y"),
The effect control device 300 acquires information indicating the current time (B4402). Information indicating the current time is generated by a signal from RTC338, which serves as a timekeeping means.

Then, the effect control device 300 calculates the elapsed time from the start of the game (or the power is turned on) (
B4403), it is determined whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time (B4404). When the elapsed time is a predetermined time (the result of B4404 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the effect control device 300.
A light emitting mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit is drawn by lottery according to the received set value (B4405). The predetermined time can be set, for example, every two hours (for example, 11:00, 13:00, 15:00 ...). The selection rate of the light emitting mode (promotion lottery color) by the lottery (B4405) is shown in FIG. 58.
It may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above.

On the other hand, when the elapsed time has not reached the predetermined time (the result of B4404 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the RTC reading process.

[Count information setting process]
Further, during the count information setting process in the one-shot command process (FIG. 39) (B1322).
In addition, the light emitting mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the count information setting process according to the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received count command (large winning opening count command) is a normal command (B4501). If the command is not normal (the result of B4501 is "N"), the count information setting process is terminated. When the command is normal (the result of B4501 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the jackpot operation is in progress (B4502). When the jackpot operation is not in progress (the result of B4502 is "N"), the count information setting process is terminated.

When the jackpot operation is in progress (the result of B4502 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 updates the count number by +1 (B4503). Add the number of prize balls of the big winning opening to the number of balls won (B45)
04), update the number of winning balls and the count display (display of the number of counts) (B45)
05). Here, the number of counts and the number of balls earned are the number of counts and the number of balls earned during the consecutive villas (ren-chan) from the start of the big hit to the return to the normal game state. It may be the number of acquired balls, or it may be the total number of counts from the power-on of the game machine 10 and the number of acquired balls.

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of acquired balls has reached a predetermined number (B4).
506). When the number of acquired balls is a predetermined number (the result of B4506 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 promotes the light emitting mode (color) of the large winning opening LED39d according to the received set value. (B4507). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and may be set, for example, every multiple of a specific number (every 5000 balls, that is, 5000, 10000, 15000 ...). The selection rate of the light emitting mode (promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery (B4507) may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above in FIG. 58.
Next, the display of the number of acquired balls, the count display, and the like are set according to the set values as described later in FIGS. 63A, 63B, and 64 (B4508). Here, the display modes such as the number of acquired balls and the count display are drawn at a selection rate according to the set value.

On the other hand, when the number of acquired balls is not a predetermined number (the result of B4506 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the count information setting process.

In the count information setting process, when the jackpot operation is in progress (the result of B4502 is "Y"), the number of winning balls of the winning opening is added to the number of winning balls (B4504), and the winning opening LED3
The light emission mode (color) of 9d was promoted by lottery (B4507), but by adding the winnings to the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 to the number of winning balls during the normal game state,
A light emitting unit (LED) provided in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 may emit light according to a set value.

Here, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 63A and 63B that the update setting of the number of acquired balls and the count display is set according to the set value. FIG. 63A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when a big hit occurs in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 63B is a diagram showing another example. In the examples of FIGS. 63A and 63B, when the number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined number, the display mode of the number of acquired balls, the count display, and the display of other information is drawn by a selection rate according to the set value. Display settings.

When the number of balls acquired has not reached the predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B4506 is "N".
The display screen of the display device 41 during the jackpot round is as shown in FIG. 63A, for example.

In the upper left corner of the display screen, a round number display 676 that displays the current number of jackpot rounds is displayed, for example, as "1" R in numerical notation (Arabic numerals ("1, 2, 3 ...")). Further, in the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the display screen, a right-handed instruction notification 691 which is a notification for instructing a right-handed person is displayed. Furthermore, on the left edge of the display screen, the jackpot result mode (big hit stop symbol,
The jackpot stop symbol "7,7,7" (stop result, stop symbol) of the special variation display game immediately before the special result mode) is displayed as, for example, "7" in numerical notation (Arabic numeral). And
In the lower right corner of the display screen, for example, "00" is displayed as an effect point display 678 for displaying the effect points.
It is displayed in 30 "pt and numerical notation (Arabic numerals). In the right middle corner of the display screen, the number of winning balls display 681 and the count display 682 are, for example, "4910" and "150".
Displayed in Arabic numerals).

Next, the display screen of the display device 41 during the jackpot round when the number of acquired balls is a predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B4506 is “Y”) is as shown in FIG. 63B, for example.

Here, for example, as the set value is lower, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the current jackpot round number display 676 (“Ichi” R) and the production point display 678 (“30” pt) are expressed in kanji (“30” pt).
It will be easier to display in Kanji ("Ichi, II, San ..."). In addition, the current number of balls won is displayed 68.
1 (both "5,000") and count display 682 ("157") are written in kanji (kanji ("Ichi, II,")
Reference ... ")) makes it easier to display.

FIG. 64 is for determining a display mode of the number of acquired balls displayed 681, the count display 682, and other information (big hit round number display 676, effect point display, etc.) as a setting suggestion effect in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table of. FIG. 64 (A) is a table showing that the selection rate (distribution rate) of Arabic numerals (numerical notation) or Chinese characters (Kanji notation) changes according to the set value, and FIG. 64 (B) shows the set value. It is a table showing that the color selectivity changes accordingly.

For example, in the case of setting 1, the selection rate of number notation is 45%, and the selection rate of kanji notation is 5.
It will be 5%. On the other hand, in the case of setting 6, the selection rate of the number notation is as high as 75%, and the selection rate of the kanji notation is as low as 25%. Therefore, the player can estimate the set value by confirming whether the display on the display screen is in numerical notation or kanji notation when the setting suggestion effect is performed.

In addition, in the case of numerical notation, the display screen is the same as in the case where the number of acquired balls is not a predetermined number as shown in FIG. 63A. In addition, when the number of balls to be acquired reaches a predetermined number, the jackpot stop symbol 677 may be displayed in kanji notation ("seven (or lacquer)") according to the set value, such as "setting suggestion effect occurs!" Characters and the like may be displayed on the display screen to notify the player that the setting suggestion effect has occurred. In addition to number notation and kanji notation, other notation formats (eg Roman numerals (eg Roman numerals)
The selectivity may be set so as to be displayed in "I, II, III ...")).

Further, in determining the display mode of the setting suggestion effect, the selection rate of the number notation, the kanji notation, etc. is changed, and as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the selection rate of the displayed color is changed according to the set value. You may.

For example, in the case of setting 1, the black selectivity is 35% and the blue selectivity is 45%. On the other hand, in the case of setting 6, the black selectivity is as high as 70% and the blue selectivity is as low as 20%. Therefore, the player can estimate the set value by checking the color of the display on the display screen when the setting suggestion effect is performed.

When the set value is odd (1, 3, 5), the red selectivity is 20% and even (2, 4, 5).
In the case of 6), the red selectivity is 10%. Therefore, the player can estimate that the set value is an odd number or an even number by checking whether or not the display on the display screen is red when the setting suggestion effect is performed.

In this way, the player can estimate the set value from the display screen by determining the display mode of the display screen of the display device 41 during the jackpot round according to the set value and performing the setting suggestion effect. The display mode of the display screen is not limited to numerical notation and color, but may be changed by changing the size and font of characters. In addition, a predetermined symbol, figure, or the like corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the display screen by the setting suggestion effect.

[Modification example of light emission mode change (promotion, etc.)]
The light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit may be changed (promoted) from the initial light emitting mode (initial color) during the execution of the special figure variation display game. Regarding the relationship between the expected degree of big hit in this case, if it is not a big hit (when the expected degree is low), the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value.
It may be a mode that does not change as it is, or a mode that changes from a light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value to a light emitting mode corresponding to the expected degree of production. After the end of the special figure variation display game, the predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emitting mode corresponding to the expected degree to the light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value. Further, when it is not a big hit (when the degree of expectation is low), it is easy to promote the light emitting mode of a predetermined light emitting unit with a low set value so that a decrease in motivation for playing can be suppressed. The player is set so that the selected ratios of the settings 1 to 6 in the promotion lottery table such as 58 are reversed (for example, the selected ratios of the settings 1 to 3 and the settings 4 to 6 are reversed). May be interested.

On the other hand, even in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), similarly, the light emission mode corresponding to the set value does not change as it is, or the light emission mode corresponding to the set value is changed to the light emission mode corresponding to the expectation of the effect. It may be a mode that changes with. In addition, after the end of the special figure fluctuation display game,
The predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emitting mode corresponding to the expected degree to the light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value. In this way, during the execution period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, during the execution of the special figure variation display game), the set value is set according to the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game will be a big hit (special result). It is possible to switch between the corresponding light emitting mode (setting suggestion effect) and the light emitting mode corresponding to the expected degree of the effect (expected degree notification effect for notifying the expected degree).

Therefore, when the expectation of the big hit is high, if the expectation of the big hit is notified by changing from the setting suggestion effect to the expectation notification effect, the game can be excited and the interest of the game is improved.
On the contrary, when the expectation level is low, if the expectation level notification effect is changed to the setting suggestion effect, the player can have expectations, which may improve the interest of the game and the operation of the game machine. There is.

Further, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), the light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting unit is made difficult to be promoted at a high set value so that the effect on the display device 41 can be easily watched. Is a mode in which the selected ratios of settings 1 to 6 in the promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 58 are reversed (for example, a mode in which the selected ratios of settings 1 to 3 and settings 4 to 6 are reversed). , The light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting unit at the high setting may be not of interest to the player. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to promote the light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting unit at a high set value. As a result, it is possible to inspire the player's expectation in a well-balanced manner without excessively inciting the expectation by the highly expected effect on the display device 41 and the low expectation mode of the predetermined light emitting unit. Since the effect on the display device 41 and the light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting unit do not correspond to each other, the effect is unexpected and the interest can be improved.

Further, in other cases (when the player gazes at the display device 41 at the time of hit notification or at the start of a big hit), the predetermined light emitting unit is once set to the light emitting mode based on the effect, and the display device 41 is not gazed at. When the state (situation) is reached, the light emission mode may be returned to the ratio based on the set value. Further, even when the effect of being watched by the display device 41 is performed, the light emission mode may be set to a ratio based on the set value regardless of the effect. In addition, the light emitting mode (color) with a low degree of expectation may be once changed to the light emitting mode based on the effect.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the hall / player setting mode processing (B0011) in the above-mentioned main processing (FIG. 36) will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hall / player setting mode processing according to the fourth embodiment executed by the effect control device 300.

Hall / player setting mode processing activates a hall setting mode in which the person in charge of the hall (game store) can make various settings for the game machine 10, or a player setting mode in which the player can make various settings for the game machine 10. Can be made to.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the hall setting mode (B4601).
). When the hole setting mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the hall setting mode is in progress. When in the hall setting mode (the result of B4601 is "Y"), B4
After processing 606-B4616, the production button 25 by the person in charge of the hall (game store) or the like
Various settings and various adjustments are made based on the operation of (effect button switch 25a, touch panel 25b).

When the effect control device 300 is not in the hall setting mode (the result of B4601 is "N").
), It is determined whether or not the player setting mode is in progress (B4602). When the player setting mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is in progress. When in the player setting mode (the result of B4602 is "Y"), the processing of B4620-B2425 is performed, and various settings and various adjustments are made based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

When the effect control device 300 is not in the player setting mode (the result of B4602 is "N").
), It is determined whether or not the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (B4603). For example, it can be determined that the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer. Note that waiting for customers is, for example, a state in which a video for waiting for customers (customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41. When the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B4603 is "N"), the process of B4617 is executed.

The effect control device 300 draws a screen for starting screen drawing (drawing of the hall setting screen) for the display device 41 in the hall setting mode when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4603 is “Y”). Set the start (B4604). Then, the flag in the hall setting mode is set (B4605).

Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the person in charge of the hall or the like (B4).
606), Hall LED adjustment processing (B4607) for adjusting the brightness (brightness) and emission color of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41.
The liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (B4608) for adjusting the brightness of the above and the power saving setting process (B4609) for setting the power saving are executed. Next, the effect control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the emission color of the logo accessory (B4610).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation input (B4611). When the operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected by the effect button input process (B0010),
It can be determined that the setting confirmation operation has been input. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4611 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated.

Then, when there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4611 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting is confirmed by the factory default setting (B4612). When the effect button 25 is not operated other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting is confirmed by the factory default setting. B461 if the factory default settings are not finalized (B4612 result is "N")
Proceed to the process of 4. When the factory default settings are confirmed (the result of B4612 is "Y"), the factory default setting process for performing various settings and adjustments with the factory default settings is executed (B4613).
). The factory default settings are the default settings stored in a memory such as ROM 321. Next, the hole setting data (or hole adjustment data) such as the volume and various brightness determined by B4606-B4610 and B4613 is backed up in a backup memory (for example, FeRAM 32).
Write in 3) (B4614).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B4615). Then, the flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (B4616).

The effect control device 300 is used when the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (B460).
The result of 3 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B4617).
). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer. When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (B)
The result of 4617 is "N"), and the hall / player setting mode processing is completed.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4617 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the screen drawing start setting for starting the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode (the result of B4617 is “Y”). B4618). Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B4619).

Next, the effect control device 300 includes a player volume adjustment process (B4620) for adjusting the volumes of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, and the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. The player LED adjustment process (B4621) for adjusting the brightness (brightness) of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes an effect customization process for customizing (individually setting) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player (B4622). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B4623). When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4623 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated. When there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4623 is "Y"), the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing for the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B4624).
.. Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B4625). In addition, B4620-
The player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as the volume and brightness determined in B4622 may be erased and is not written to the backup memory.

[Example of display screen in hall setting mode]
FIG. 66A shows the display device 4 when the hall setting mode is set in the fourth embodiment.
It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of 1.

When the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4603 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 starts drawing the screen in the hall setting mode (B4604), and as shown in FIG. 66A, the volume is displayed on the display screen. Setting window 711, emission color setting window 712, and brightness setting window 713
Is displayed. The volume setting window 711 is a display used for the hall volume adjustment process (B4606), and the brightness setting window 713 is the hall LED adjustment process (B4607) and the liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (B).
It is a display used in 4608). The emission color setting window 712 has a hall LED adjustment process (B).
This is the display used in 4607), and is a display for switching the setting suggestion effect performed according to the lottery table in the predetermined light emitting unit to the hall emission color selected in the hall setting as described above. As described above, the operation of the volume setting window 711, the emission color setting window 712, and the brightness setting window 713 is the operation of the effect button 25 (touch panel 25b) by the person in charge of the hall or the like.
It is done based on (including the operation of).

By selecting any color as the hall emission color in the emission color setting window 712, the hall emission color can be preferentially displayed on a predetermined light emitting unit. Therefore, for example, by setting the hall emission color to red or rainbow (specific emission color), which suggests that the setting is high, it is possible to make it appear that abundant high setting stands are lined up at an event or the like. it can. As described above, the emission color setting window 712 and the hall LED adjustment process are used as a second setting means in which the setting regarding the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting portion cannot be set by the player and can be set only by the person in charge of the hall or the like. Function. In the hall setting mode, a special decorative symbol (identification information), a hold display unit 630, a hold display 633, a hold digestion area 640, and a special figure change hold display 64.
The display related to the game such as 3 may be hidden. Since the hole setting mode is not performed during the game, it is possible to make the display related to the hole setting mode easier to see and reduce the processing load by excluding unnecessary ones. When the display related to the game is hidden, only the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) 616 may be displayed.

In addition, in the setting suggestion effect, the hall emission color is displayed with priority over the one performed according to the lottery table, but it is displayed with priority only while waiting for customers, and during the actual game. Can prioritize the setting suggestion effect performed according to the lottery table over the hall emission color. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 during the game in more detail by actually playing the game.

[Example of display screen in player setting mode]
FIG. 66B shows the display device 4 when the player setting mode is set in the fourth embodiment.
It is a figure which shows another example of the display screen of 1.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4617 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 starts drawing the screen in the player setting mode (B4618), and as shown in FIG. 66B, the display screen. Along with the volume setting window 711 and the brightness setting window 713, the light emission presence / absence setting window 714 is displayed. The operation of the volume setting window 711, the brightness setting window 713, and the light emission presence / absence setting window 714 is performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B4620, B462).
1). In the player setting mode, the volume setting window 711 is the player volume adjustment process (B4620).
), The brightness setting window 713 and the light emission presence / absence setting window 714 are player LEDs.
This is a display used for the adjustment process (B4621).

The light emission presence / absence setting window 714 can be used to select whether or not to emit light from a predetermined light emitting unit. For example, when the player selects no light emission, the light emission related to the setting suggestion effect of the predetermined light emitting unit is not performed. it can. As described above, the light emitting presence / absence setting window 714 and the player LED adjustment process function as a first setting means in which the player can set the setting regarding the light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting unit. During the game, the light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is controlled according to the set value as described above (FIGS. 55 to 62). Therefore, unlike the hall setting mode, the player setting mode is used. The emission color setting window 712 is not displayed.

In the player setting mode, only the presence / absence of light emission of a predetermined light emitting unit can be selected. However, which of the effect modes of the effect device including the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is selected according to the set value. It may be possible to set whether or not it can be displayed in a range, and the emission color setting window 7 is the same as in the hall setting mode.
The effect mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit of the effect device may be set by 12. The effect mode of the effect device depends on the set value of the effect control device 300 (FIGS. 44, 55-62).
), For example, a light emitting mode of a lighting member, internal accessories 44a, 44.
b, the operation mode of the external accessory 95a, the effect mode on the display screen of the display device 41, and the like. Also,
It is possible to confirm in the player setting mode, etc. whether the production mode of the production device is set so that it can be displayed by the player, or whether the setting suggestion effect depending on the set value is performed. It may be.

Further, the effect control device 300 may not perform the setting suggestion effect when fraud is detected by the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316), or the like. Reset the promotion lottery color etc. in and the default color (for example, white)
It may be displayed with.

[Customer waiting demo setting process]
Further, at the time of the customer waiting demo setting process (B1308) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 39), the hall setting mode (emission color setting window 712 and the hall L) is used instead of the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect.
The predetermined light emitting part is made to emit light with the hall emission color set in the ED adjustment process). FIG. 67 shows the fourth
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demo setting process which concerns on embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received set value is a normal command (B4701). If the command is not normal (the result of B4701 is "N"), the customer waiting demo setting process ends. If the command is normal (the result of B4701 is "Y"),
The effect control device 300 sets a predetermined light emitting mode (color) of the light emitting unit to the light emitting mode (hall light emitting color) of the hall setting set in the hall setting mode (B4702). Then, the customer waiting demo start setting is performed (B4703), and the customer waiting demo setting process is completed.

As described above, in the waiting for customers (during the demonstration of waiting for customers), the light emitting mode (hall light emitting color) set in the hall setting mode is preferentially used instead of the light emitting mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect.
Therefore, by setting the light emission mode (hall light emission color) to a specific light emission mode (specific color = red, rainbow, etc.), it is possible to make it appear that abundant high setting stands are lined up at an event or the like. it can. In addition, while waiting for customers, the light emitting mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the predetermined light emitting unit, and the player tries to check the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect by playing the game. There is a possibility that the operation of 10 will be improved.

When the light emitting mode (color) is set in the player setting mode, the light emitting mode (color) set in the player setting mode is preferentially used during the customer waiting (customer waiting demonstration). Configuration is also possible.

In the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, an example in which the color is mainly controlled depending on the set value is shown as the light emitting mode of the effect device (predetermined light emitting unit), but the light emitting mode of the effect device is brightness ( Brightness), turning on, turning off, or blinking, and in the case of blinking, the blinking cycle is also included. Further, if the effect device is a movable body, the operation mode of the effect device may be controlled depending on the set value as in the light emitting mode.

[Action / effect of the fourth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes an effect device (for example, a predetermined light emitting unit) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect device. The game machine 10 includes a setting changing means (setting changing device 42 (setting key switch 93 and setting value changing switch 102)) capable of changing the setting value according to the setting related to the game. The effect control means can execute a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a set value by changing the effect mode of the effect device according to the set value.

According to such a game machine 10, the player can estimate the setting of the game machine 10 only from the state of the game machine 10 before or during the game, and the suggestion of the set value is appropriately made. Since it can be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the player can estimate the setting of the game machine 10 only from the game machine 10 in this way, a setting suggestion tag (for example, setting 4 is suggested) that implicitly suggests the setting value around the game machine 10 in the hall business. Shark bill,
There is no need to install a shrimp tag that suggests setting 5 and a goosefish tag that suggests setting 6), and the space around the game machine 10 can be secured to improve the appearance and reduce the burden on the person in charge of the hall. can do.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) of the game machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is a first setting means (light emission presence / absence setting window 714) in which a player can set settings related to the effect mode of the effect device.
, Player LED adjustment process) and a second setting means (emission color setting window 712, hall LED adjustment process) in which the player cannot set the setting related to the effect mode of the effect device. The effect control means can change the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect by the set value or the second setting means.
According to such a game machine 10, the person in charge of the hall or the like suggests that the setting suggestion effect in the effect device is a high setting by the second setting means or the like (for example, the effect mode suggesting that the setting is high.
By setting the hall emission color such as red or rainbow), you can make the appearance of the game machine 10 as you like, and you can make it look like a lot of high setting stands are lined up at events etc. You can improve your interest. Further, the player can also set the production mode that suits the player's taste, so that the interest can be improved. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect mode that takes into account the needs for both the hall side and the player side settings.

The game machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has the setting suggestion effect and the expectation according to the degree of expectation that the result of the game (for example, the special figure variation display game) becomes a special result in the execution period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed. It is possible to switch between the expected degree notification effect that notifies the degree. Therefore, when the expectation degree of the special result is high, if the setting suggestion effect is changed to the expectation degree notification effect and the expectation degree of the special result is notified, the game can be excited and the interest of the game is improved. On the contrary, when the expectation level is low, if the expectation level notification effect is changed to the setting suggestion effect, the player can have expectations, which may improve the interest of the game and the operation of the game machine. There is.

[Fifth Embodiment]
A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 69B. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments.

[Example of screen transition when the start memory of the reserved digestion area changes]
FIG. 68 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fifth embodiment, and is a screen of the entire game when the hold display 643 during the special figure change of the hold digestion area 640 is held and changed. This is an example of transition. The lottery for the hold change (hold change during digestion) of the special figure change hold display 643 is, for example, the advance notice lottery (B2006 or B20) of the change effect setting process (FIG. 44).
You may go to 09).

FIG. 68A is a display screen of the display device 41 before the decorative special figure variation display game is started.

A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41. The first decorative symbol B is enlarged and the first decorative symbol C is enlarged and displayed in the middle area 610C, and the first symbol C is stopped and displayed with the symbol "2, 4, 5".

At the lower center of the display screen, a hold digestion area 640 (specific display unit, changing hold display area) and a hold display unit 630 are displayed as start memory display areas. The hold digestion area 640 and the hold display unit 630 are displayed in preference to the front surface (upper layer) of the change display of the change display area 610. Such a priority display setting may be executed, for example, in the effect display editing process (B0015).

In the hold digestion area 640, the special figure change hold display 643 (starting memory display, special figure digestion hold display) corresponding to the special figure change display game being executed (during digestion) is displayed. Further, in the reserved digestion area 640, the start memory display background 640A as the pedestal of the special figure changing hold display 643 is displayed in a low image quality on the back surface (lower layer) of the special figure changing hold display 643. .. Note that in FIGS. 68 to 69B, the coarse hatching of the start memory display background 640A indicates that the start memory display background 640A is displayed in a low image quality state (first display mode).

Here, the low image quality state (first display mode) is a state in which improvement of power saving performance and reduction of graphic processing load are prioritized over improvement of visibility for the player, and for example, pixels are higher than the normal display state. The number should be low (for example, it should be displayed with less than 921,600 pixels), and the brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. should be suppressed (for example, less than 50 in 100 steps, or less than 50).
When it can be adjusted from -100 to +100, it should be displayed at less than ± 0), the resolution should be low (for example, it should be displayed at a resolution less than 720p (1280 x 720)), and the frame rate per second (fps). Is low (eg less than 30 fps) or a highly compressed image is displayed. For example, the image of the original high-quality start memory display background 640A is subjected to low-quality processing in the game machine 10 by processing such as VDP312.
Instead of the high-quality one, the low-quality start memory display background 640A can be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Further, for example, both a low-quality image and a high-quality (or normal-quality) image of the start storage display background 640A are stored in the image ROM 325, and the low-quality image and the high-quality image are replaced depending on the situation. The start memory display background 640A is displayed in low image quality (or high image quality).

A background object 640B that changes in conjunction with the start memory display background 640A is arranged above the start memory display background 640A. The background object 640B is displayed in two Futaba-shaped display modes arranged at the left and right ends, for example, as shown in FIG. 68A. The background object 640B is also displayed in a low image quality state like the start memory display background 640A. Further, the background object 640B is displayed in the same priority (layers of the same layer) as the start memory display background 640A, that is, in an integrated manner. The start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B may be set for display in step B2013 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 44), for example. In addition, the background object 640B is started. Memory display background 640
It may be displayed with priority on the front surface of A (upper layer). In addition, conversely, the start memory display background 640A may be displayed in preference to the front surface (upper layer) of the background object 640B.

The hold display unit 630 has a hold display 633 (start memory display, corresponding to the undigested start memory).
Up to four special figure hold displays) are displayed, and in (A) of FIG. 68, three hold display 633s are displayed on the hold display unit 630. The hold display 633 is arranged so as to overlap a part of the start memory display background 640A and is displayed in front of the start memory display background 640A. As described above, the effect control device 300 functions as a start memory display control means for executing the control of displaying the hold display 633 on the hold display unit 630 and displaying the hold display 643 during the special figure change in the hold digestion area 640. The effect control device 300 executes the display settings of the hold display 633 and the special figure changing hold display 643 in step B2015 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 44) at the time of hold shift, and when the hold occurs, a single-shot command. It may be executed in the special figure 1 hold information setting process (B1310) or the special figure 2 hold information setting process (B1312) of the process.

FIG. 68A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed corresponding to the special figure variation pending display 643. Multiple variable display areas on the display screen 6
In No. 10, the decorative first symbols A to C are varied and displayed in a normal variation mode. In the following figures, when the decorative first symbols A to C are variablely displayed in a normal variation mode, the variable display first decorative symbols A to C are indicated by “↓”.

FIG. 68 (c) is a display screen of the display device 41 when a predetermined condition (for example, a pending change during digestion, a look-ahead notice, etc.) is satisfied during execution of the special figure variation display game.
Here, the hold display 643 is changed on hold during the special figure change, but the hold display 633 may be changed on hold as a look-ahead notice effect. In the case of a hold change during digestion, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), the hold change during special figure change suggests that the hold change has a high degree of expectation from the usual round display mode. It becomes a star-shaped display mode.

Further, the display of the start memory display background 640A is switched from the low image quality state to the high image quality state at the same time as the hold change. In addition, in FIGS. 68 to 69B, the start memory display background 64
The fine hatching of 0A indicates that the starting memory display background 640A is displayed in a high-quality state. Similar to the start memory display background 640A, the background object 640B is also displayed in a high-quality state (second display mode). The background object 640B changes from a normal Futaba-shaped display mode to a flower-shaped display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is high. It should be noted that the change in the image quality and the display mode of the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B is executed at the same timing as the hold change (hold change during digestion) of the special figure changing hold display 643 drawn as a notice. For example, the display may be set in step B2013 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 44).

Here, the high image quality state (second display mode) is a state in which the improvement of visibility for the player is prioritized over the improvement of power saving performance and the reduction of the graphic processing load. For example, the pixel is higher than the normal display mode. The number is high (for example, it is displayed with 921,600 pixels or more), the brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. are strong (for example, 50 or more in 100 steps,-
When it can be adjusted from 100 to +100, it should be displayed at ± 0 or more), the resolution should be high (for example, it should be displayed at a resolution of 720p (1280 x 720) or more), and the frame rate (fps) per second should be It is high (for example, 30 fps or more), or an uncompressed image or an image with a small compression rate is displayed.

(E) of FIG. 68 shows the display of the display device 41 when the running special figure variation display game ends and the stop result (stop symbol) of the variation display area 610 becomes the disengagement result mode (disengagement stop symbol). It is a screen. In the decoration first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610, "disappearance stop symbols"
3,7,2 ”is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold display 643 during the special figure change is digested and hidden, and the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed by switching from the high image quality state to the low image quality state. The background object 640B returns from the flower-shaped display mode to the Futaba-shaped display mode. Special figure variable display Start memory display background at the end of the game 6
The display setting of 40A and the background object 640B may be executed based on the symbol type (missing symbol or jackpot symbol), for example, as a part of the stop setting (B1331) of the one-shot command processing. After that, the oldest start memory of the hold display 633 moves to the hold display 643 during the special figure change, and the next special figure change display game is started. The timing at which the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from the high image quality state to the low image quality state is not limited to when the hold display 643 during the special figure change is digested and hidden. May be completed, the first decorative symbols A to C may be stopped and displayed, or the next special figure variation display game may be started.

(O) of FIG. 68 is a display when the running special figure variation display game ends and the stop result (stop symbol) of the variation display area 610 becomes the jackpot result mode (big hit stop symbol, special result mode). This is a display screen of the device 41. Decoration of the variable display area 610 "3, 3, 3" is stopped and displayed as a big hit stop symbol in the first symbols A to C, and "big hit!" Is displayed below the variable display area 610.
!! Is displayed. Further, the hold display 643 during the special figure change is digested and hidden, but the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are maintained in a high image quality state. The flower-shaped display mode of the background object 640B is also maintained as it is. After that, the game of the big hit round is started, and the big hit round production is executed.

It should be noted that switching the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B from low image quality to high image quality is performed when the hold display 643 during special figure change is held and changed to a star-shaped display mode (FIG. 68).
Not limited to (U)), but at the stage before that, that is, when starting the special figure variation display game (Fig. 68).
You may switch to high image quality at the stage (immediately after (a)) or immediately before the pending change during digestion occurs ((i) in FIG. 68). Further, the image quality of the start memory display background 640A may be changed stepwise when the hold change is performed stepwise or when the continuous effect is produced (during the continuous advance notice effect or the pseudo continuous effect).
Further, for example, when the hold display 643 or the hold display 633 during the special figure change is displayed in a bright color such as white, the color of the start memory display background 640A is switched to a dark color such as black, and the special figure is changing. It may be easy to distinguish from the hold display 643 and the hold display 633. Further, when the start memory is stored and a new hold display 633 is generated, for example, the hold display is the upper limit of 4
Even when the number of balls reaches and overflows, or when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 35, the start memory display background 640A may be switched to high image quality to make it easier for the player to see. Also,
Decorative special symbol Starts when the decorative first symbols A to C stop or temporarily stop at a specific symbol (such as when the pending change symbol that suggests or confirms a pending change or the chance eye stops) due to the execution of the decoration special symbol variation display game. The storage display background 640A may be switched to high image quality.

In addition, the first display mode is not limited to the mode in which the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed in low image quality, and the mode in which the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are inconspicuous although they are faintly visible. It may be displayed with. For example, as an aspect of making the background object inconspicuous, another image may be displayed in front of the start memory display background 640A or the background object 640B (front layer, upper layer) so as to cover the start memory display background 640A or the background object 640B. it can. Other images in this case include, for example, an image or mosaic image that is the same as the start memory display background 640A or background object 640B but is lighter, and the start memory display background 640A or background in the back (back surface, lower layer). Object 6
A transparent image or the like in which 40B can be visually recognized can be used. The second display mode is not limited to displaying the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B with high image quality, and hides another image displayed in front of the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B. It may be displayed in an embodiment.

[Example of screen transition when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69A, an example of screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the reserved digestion area 640 will be described. FIG. 69A is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fifth embodiment, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area 641. is there. In addition, the following FIGS. 69A and 69B
In the description of the above, the description overlapping with FIG. 68 will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 69A (?) Is a display screen of the display device 41 before the start of the decorative special figure variation display game.

On the display screen of the display device 41, the plurality of variable display areas 610 are decorated with first symbols A to C.
Is stopped and displayed with the symbol "2, 4, 5", and the special figure changing hold display 643 corresponding to the running special figure change display game is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Also, the reserved digestion area 64
At 0, the pedestal 640C of the special figure changing hold display 643 and the low-quality start storage display background 640A are displayed on the back surface (lower layer) of the special figure changing hold display 643. The pedestal 640C is preferentially displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the start memory display background 640A. The starting memory display background 640A has a narrower upper and left area than the starting memory display background 640A of FIG. 68.

Further, an effect display area 641 capable of displaying an effect related to the special figure variation display game is displayed at the lower left end of the display screen of the display device 41, and the effect display area 641 is a walking girl whose display mode can be changed by the effect. Character 641A is displayed. The effect display area 641 and the character 641A are displayed in a low image quality state. In addition, in FIG. 69A and FIG. 69B, the thin line representing the character 641A indicates that the character 641A is displayed in a low image quality state. The effect display area 641 is displayed in preference to the front surface (upper layer) of the variable display area 610, similarly to the hold digestion area 640 and the hold display unit 630. For example, the effect display area 641 is displayed on the same layer as the hold digestion area 640 and the hold display unit 630, and the display priorities have the same relationship. Further, the character 641A is preferentially displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the effect display area 641. Character 6
The 41A and the effect display area 641 may be displayed in the same priority order (layers of the same layer), that is, in an integrated manner. Further, the character 641A has a hold digestion area 640 and a hold display unit 6.
It may be displayed preferentially on the front surface (upper layer) of 30, or conversely, the reserved digestion area 640 and the reserved display unit 630 may be displayed preferentially on the front surface of the character 641A. In this way, the display priority order can be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 69A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed corresponding to the special figure variation pending display 643. In the plurality of variable display areas 610,
The first decorative symbols A to C are variablely displayed (“↓”) in a normal variable mode.

Here, the low-quality character 641A may be displayed as a character different from the one shown in FIG. 69A (a different character different from the high-quality character 641B described later).
Further, the low image quality character 641A may be displayed in a mode different from that shown in FIG. 69A. For example, another aspect of the low-quality character 641A may be a sleeping aspect with respect to the standing aspect of the (ki) in FIG. 69A, or a walking operation of the (ki) in FIG. 69A. On the other hand, it may be in a stationary mode. It should be noted that the character 641A is set to stand still before the start of the decorative special figure variation display game ((ka) in FIG. 69A).
After the start of the decorative special figure variation display game ((ki) in FIG. 69A), the mode may be a walking operation.

In FIG. 69A, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 becomes the character 641B when a predetermined condition (for example, a change on hold during digestion, a look-ahead notice, a notice effect, etc.) is satisfied during the execution of the special figure variation display game. It is a display screen of the display device 41 when it changes. Character 641B is a girl who is pleased to eat rice balls, which suggests that expectations are high, and is displayed in a high-quality state. In addition, in FIG. 69A and FIG. 69B, the thick line representing the character 641B indicates that the character 641B is displayed in a high-quality state. Further, the start memory display background 640A, the pedestal 640C, the reserved digestion area 640, and the effect display area 64.
1 is also displayed in a high image quality state. In addition, the predetermined conditions are specifically the character 641A.
When (641B) partially invades the start memory display background 640A and acts on the special figure changing hold display 643 or the hold display, or is displayed near the start memory display background 640A and is displayed near the start memory display background 640A and the special figure change hold display 643 or hold. This is a case of executing a hold change effect that waits until the timing of acting on the display 633. The timing for switching to the high-quality character 641B when the predetermined condition is satisfied may be when the character 641A moves toward the start memory display background 640A or is displayed near the start memory display background 640A. it can. It should be noted that the character 641A may be switched to the high-quality character 641B when the character 641A acts on the hold display 643 or the hold display during the special figure change, and when the character 641A moves toward the start memory display background 640A or the start memory display background. You may switch to the high-quality character 641B at the start of the next special figure variation display game when the character is displayed near the 640A.

Here, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed as a character different from the one shown in FIG. 69A (another character different from the low-quality character 641A described later).
Further, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed in a mode different from that shown in FIG. 69A. For example, another aspect of the high-quality character 641B may be one in which the walking speed (operating speed) is increased from (ki) in FIG. 69A. In FIG. 69A, the low-quality character 641A may be kept stationary, and in FIG. 69A, the high-quality character 641B may be walked and operated.

FIG. 69A shows the display device 41 when the running special figure variation display game ends and the stop symbol in the variation display area 610 becomes a detached stop symbol (“3,7,2”). It is a screen. While the special figure is changing, the hold display 643 is digested and hidden, and the start memory display background 6
The 40A, the pedestal 640C, and the effect display area 641 are displayed in a low image quality state. Further, the character 641B returns to the normal character 641A and is displayed in a low image quality state. After that, the start memory is stored, and the next special figure variation display game is started.

FIG. 69 (ko) shows the display device 41 when the running special figure variation display game ends and the stop symbol in the variation display area 610 becomes a big hit stop symbol (“3,3,3”). It is a screen. The characters "Big hit !!" are displayed below the variable display area 610. The pending display 643 during the special figure change is digested and hidden, but the start memory display background 640A, pedestal 640C,
And the effect display area 641 is maintained in a high image quality state. In addition, the production display of the girl who is pleased to eat the rice ball of character 641B is maintained as it is. After that, the game of the big hit round is started, and the big hit round production is executed.

[Another screen transition example when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Subsequently, another screen transition example when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the hold digestion area 640 will be described with reference to FIG. 69B. FIG. 69B is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fifth embodiment, and is the entire game when a predetermined effect is generated in the hold digestion area 640 or the effect display area 641. This is another example of the screen transition of.

The (ku') in FIG. 69B is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display game when a predetermined effect (for example, a notice effect) occurs in the effect display area 641 from the (ki) in FIG. 69A. is there. When the predetermined effect is generated, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 changes to the character 641B, which suggests that the degree of expectation is high. Then, the character 641B and the effect display area 641 are displayed in a high-quality state. On the other hand, the start memory display background 640A and the pedestal 640C of the reserved digestion area 640 are maintained in a low image quality state. After that, when the stop symbol of the variable display area 610 becomes the out-of-order stop symbol (for example, "3,7,2"), the process proceeds to (ke) of FIG. 69A, and the jackpot stop symbol (for example, "3,3,3") ), Fig. 6
Proceed to 9A (ko). When a predetermined effect is generated in the effect display area 641, the effect display area 641 may be displayed in preference to the front surface (upper layer) of the hold digestion area 640. By doing so, for example, the effect display area 641 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground to emphasize the effect by the character 641B. Further, the advance notice effect is performed by the player when the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 reach, or according to the button operation promotion display (operation promotion image) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. It can occur when the effect button 25 is operated or the like.

The (ku'') in FIG. 69B is a predetermined effect in the reserved digestion region 640 from the (ki) in FIG. 69A.
For example, it is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure variation display game when a pending change during digestion, a look-ahead notice, etc. occurs. Due to the occurrence of a predetermined effect, the pending display 643 during the special figure change changes to a star-shaped display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is high. Then, the display of the pedestal 640C, the special figure changing hold display 643, and the start memory display background 640A is switched from a low image quality state to a high image quality state. On the other hand, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 continues to be displayed as it is, and the effect display area 641 and the character 641A are maintained in a low image quality state. In response to the change of the special figure changing hold display 643 to the star-shaped display mode, the shape of the pedestal 640C is related to the display mode of the special figure changing hold display 643, for example, a crescent shape. It may be changed to a certain shape. After that, the stop symbol of the variable display area 610 is
If it becomes an out-of-order stop symbol (for example, "372"), it proceeds to (ke) of FIG. 69A, and if it becomes a big hit stop symbol (for example, "333"), it proceeds to (ko) of FIG. 69A.

When a predetermined effect is generated in the hold digestion area 640, the hold digestion area 640 may be displayed in preference to the front surface (upper layer) of the effect display area 641. By doing so, for example, the reserved digestion region 640 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground to emphasize the change in the display mode of the reserved display 643 and the reserved display 633 during the special figure change.

Further, when a predetermined effect occurs, for example, when the pedestal 640c changes to the same color as the color changed by the effect corresponding to the hold change, the pedestal 640c also has the same high image quality as the hold display 643 during the special figure change. However, the degree of high image quality may be set to be lower than the hold display 643 during the special figure change (the image quality may be lower than the hold display 643 during the special figure change). Even if the image quality of the pedestal 640c is lowered relative to the image quality of the special figure changing hold display 643 in this way, the player can easily gaze at the special figure changing hold display 643, which is the main part of the production. It is possible to reduce the processing load while maintaining the interest of.

On the other hand, when a predetermined effect occurs, for example, when the pedestal 640c changes to the same color as the color changed by the effect corresponding to the hold change, the degree of high image quality of the pedestal 640c is changed from the hold display 643 during the special figure change. May be set to a higher value (higher image quality than the hold display 643 during special figure fluctuation). The special figure changing hold display 643 is intentionally displayed with relatively low image quality on the high-quality pedestal 640c, which causes unexpectedness. Can be improved.

Further, the pedestal 640c may maintain a low image quality when the hold display 643 during the special figure change has a high image quality. Special figure changing hold display 643 decoration and special figure changing hold display 64
This is because the pedestal 640c need only have a function indicating that 3 is on hold during digestion, and the function is maintained even if the image is displayed in low image quality.

[Action / effect of the fifth embodiment]
The game machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is a variable display game (special figure variable display game) based on a plurality of identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C) based on the establishment of the starting condition.
The result of the variable display game is a special result (big hit result mode,
It is possible to generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the jackpot stop symbol (special result mode) is reached. The game machine 10 is displayed on the display device 41 with priority over the variable display game and the start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the start memory which is the execution right of the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition. A start memory display control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing control to display a start memory display (hold display 643 during special figure change, hold display 633) corresponding to the start memory in the start memory display area. Be prepared. The start memory display control means displays the start memory display background 640A on the back surface of the start memory display in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) so as to overlap the start memory display in the start memory display area, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on this, the start memory display background 640A can be switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode.

According to such a game machine 10, the start memory display background 640A can be displayed in the second display mode (for example, high image quality) when a predetermined condition is satisfied such as when the display mode of the start memory display changes. In the case of, the start memory display background 640A can be displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality). Therefore, for example, if there is no pedestal 640c, the special figure changing pending display 64
There was a problem that 3 could be seen mixed with the decorative first symbols A to C, etc., but when it is necessary for the player to visually recognize the start memory display, it can be easily visually displayed and the player can visually recognize the start memory display. When the need is relatively small (when the degree of expectation is low, etc.), it is possible to improve the power saving performance of the game machine 10 and reduce the processing load of graphics and the like. Therefore, it is possible to improve the visibility for the player, improve the power saving performance of the game machine 10, and reduce the processing load, and improve the display method of the start memory display area in the game machine. be able to. Further, for example, when it is relatively less necessary for the player to visually recognize the start memory display, the identification information (decorative first symbols A to C) of the variable display area 610 to be relatively conspicuous is larger than the start memory display. Since it is displayed in high image quality, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the identification information. In addition, in other cases, the start memory display background 640A is displayed in low image quality, so that it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is important information in the start memory display area, and the image of the display screen on the liquid crystal. Can be suppressed from burning.

The game machine 10 is an effect control means (which can execute control to display an effect related to the variable display game in the effect display area 641 displayed on the display device 41 with priority over the variable display game (special figure variable display game). The effect control device 300) is further provided. The effect control means can display the effect in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) in the effect display area 641, and switch the effect to the second display mode (for example, high image quality) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. According to such a game machine 10, for example, there is a problem that the effect display area 641 may be seen as being mixed with the decorative first symbols A to C, etc. Hold display 633)
Not only that, the effect display area 641 can be easily displayed by the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the same effect as the above-mentioned effect can be obtained.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment displays a production game (decorative special figure variation display game) corresponding to the variation display game (variation display game on the batch display device 50) on the display device 41 based on the establishment of the starting condition. A feasible effect game means (effect control device 300), a specific display area (effect display area 641) that is displayed with priority over the effect game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device 41, and the specific display. Specific character displayed in the area (character 641A
, 641B), and a display control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the display control. The display control means (effect control device 300) displays the specific display area in the first display mode (in the normal state).
For example, it is displayed in a low image quality, a specific character is displayed in a first effect mode (for example, low image quality), and a specific display area is displayed in a second display mode (for example, different from the first display mode) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. It is possible to switch to the second effect mode (for example, high image quality) while switching to (high image quality).

Therefore, when it is relatively less necessary for the player to visually recognize the specific display area (effect display area 641), the specific display area (effect display area 641) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality), and the specific character is displayed in the first effect mode (for example, low image quality). ), It is possible to improve the power saving performance of the game machine 10 and reduce the processing load of the graphic and the like of the display control means (effect control device 300). On the contrary, when it is necessary for the player to visually recognize the specific display area (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the specific display area is switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode (for example, low image quality). ,
The specific character is switched from the first display mode (for example, low image quality) to the second effect mode (for example, high image quality), and the player is given a specific display area (effect display area 641) and a specific character (character 6).
41A, 641B) can be easily visually recognized.

[Sixth Embodiment]
A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 88. The present embodiment relates to the driver 150 (here, the LED driver 153) of the status display device 152 and its initial setting. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the sixth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 70, the timer interrupt process of the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 6), but the LED driver 153 (FIG. 71) is performed after the status display edit output process (A1318).
The feature is that the LED driver initial setting process (A15001) for initial setting is added. Further, after the initial setting of the LED driver 153, the LED data transmission process (A) for setting the output mode of the LED driver 153, that is, the display mode of the status display device 152.
16001) is performed. In this embodiment, after explaining the configuration of the LED driver 153, the initial setting process and the LED data transmission process of the LED driver 153 will be described.

The LED driver initial setting process (A15001) and the LED data transmission process (A16)
The order of 001) may be changed. In this case, the LED driver initial setting process (A1)
5001) is an LED data transmission process (A16001) in the next timer interrupt process.
The LED driver 153 will be initialized for this purpose.

[LED driver]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the configuration of the LED driver 153 according to the sixth embodiment. The LED driver 153 of the present embodiment is the same as the driver 150 (FIG. 3) of the first embodiment. Further, the batch driver 153a, the combination ratio driver 153b, and the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 153c, which will be described later, are also the same as the LED driver 153.

The LED driver 153 is a digit display 900 (900-3 (digit 3), 900-2 (digit 2), 900-1 (digit 1) sequentially selected by the dynamic drive method (dynamic lighting method).
), 900-0 (digit 0)) is energized and lit. The digit display 900 constituting the status display device 152 includes a 7-segment type (or 8-segment type) and eight point-shaped LEDs.
Includes a collection of lamps. The LED driver 153 may be either an anode common or a cathode common.

The LED driver 153 is a combination driver 153b and a ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 15.
In the case of 3c, as shown by the dotted line, a 16-bit command is sent from the game microcomputer 111 via the LED driver 153 in the previous stage (the batch driver 153a in the first stage and the driver ratio driver 153b in the second stage). Is sent. When the LED driver 153 is a batch driver 153a, a 16-bit command is directly transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 without going through the LED driver 153 in the previous stage.

The LED driver 153 includes a 16-bit shift register 163 and a 16-bit latch circuit 1.
64, Latch selector 165, 4 8-bit latches (latch circuit: digit 0, digit 1, digit 2,
For digit 3) 167a-167d, control unit 173, oscillator unit 174, 4: 1 data selector 1
It includes 83, a character generator (decoder) 185, a 2: 1 data selector 187, a segment drive unit 193, and a digit drive unit 195. The control unit 173 includes a digit number setting unit 175, a duty setting unit 176, a data selection unit 177, and a standby mode setting unit 1.
78 is provided. The oscillation unit 174 generates and transmits a signal used by the control unit 173 (particularly the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176). The 8-bit latch functions as a data register. Further, the LED driver 153 may include an emission color control unit that controls the emission color of the LED (or segment).

The 16-bit command is input to the 16-bit shift register 163 of the LED driver 153 from the data input terminal, and can be output to another LED driver 153 as it is from the data output terminal. The data of the 16-bit shift register 163 is the 16-bit latch circuit 1
At the timing (latch timing) when 64 receives the latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111, it is held (set) in the 16-bit latch circuit 164.

Of the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the upper 8 bits are sent to the latch selector 165, the digit number setting unit 175, the duty setting unit 176, the data selection unit 177, and the standby mode setting unit 178. Of the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (data unit) are sent to the 8-bit latch 167a-167d. Further, the lower 8 bits of data (only necessary bits (for example, 4 bits) are acceptable) are also sent to the digit number setting unit 175, the duty setting unit 176, the data selection unit 177, and the standby mode setting unit 178.

When the upper 8 bits (address unit) indicate the address of the digit number setting unit 175 (for example, 21H (hexary notation)), the digit number setting unit 175 is the control data (initial) held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164. Of the setting data), the lower 8 bits (only necessary bits are acceptable) are taken in, and the corresponding number of digits (for example, X0H to X3H (hexameric representation, X is arbitrary)) is set (initial setting). The number of digits to be set is the display 90 driven by the LED driver 153.
It is the number of 0s (number of digits), which is 4 in this embodiment.

The upper 8 bits are the address of the duty setting unit 176 (for example, 20H (hexameric representation))
In the case of indicating, the duty setting unit 176 takes in the lower 8 bits (only necessary bits are possible) of the control data (initial setting data) held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, and the corresponding duty ratio ( For example, X0H to XFH (hexameric representation, X is arbitrary)) are set (initial setting). The brightness (light emission intensity) of the segment (LED) of the display 900.
The duty ratio indicated by corresponds to the output time width of the source driver. The source driver corresponds to the digit drive unit 195 in the case of the anode common, and corresponds to the segment drive unit 193 in the case of the cathode common.

When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the data selection unit 177 (for example, 27H (hexameric representation)), the data selection unit 177 has the lower 8 bits (necessary) of the control data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164. Bits are acceptable), and the use / non-use of decoded data by the character generator 185 is set. The data selection unit 177 and the digit number setting unit 175 may have the same address, and the data selection unit 177 may set the use / non-use of the decoded data and the digit number setting unit 175 may set the number of digits at the same time (. Data selection unit 1
77 and the digit number setting unit 175 are distinguished by the lower 8 bits).

That is, the data selection unit 177 converts the 8-bit latch data into the character generator 18
Select whether to decode according to 5 and use it as decoded data, or to use the 8-bit latch data as it is as non-decoded data. 8 if decoded
The bit latch data is regarded as a character code and decoded into character lighting pattern data. When the 8-bit latch data is used as it is as non-decoded data, the data selection unit 177 uses 2 data selection signals indicating selection of non-decoded data.
Send to the one-to-one data selector 187. In this way, the data selection unit 177 determines whether or not the decoding function is used by a command (command, command, from the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 111)).
It can be set based on (including control data).

When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the standby mode setting unit 178 or a command for the standby mode setting unit 178 (for example, 41H, 1XH, 0XH (hexary notation: X is arbitrary), etc.), the standby mode setting unit 178 sets the standby mode setting unit 178. Of the control data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (only necessary bits are acceptable) are taken in. Then, the standby mode setting unit 178 transmits a standby signal to the segment drive unit 193 or the digit drive unit 195 to turn it off, and shifts the LED driver 153 to the standby mode (in the case of 41H), or the segment drive unit. 193 and digit drive unit 1
Forcibly turn off 95 to turn off the display 900 of all digits (in the case of 0XH (BLANK data)), or operate the segment drive unit 193 and digit drive unit 195 of the LED driver 153 normally in a dynamic drive system. (In the case of 1XH). In the standby mode, each setting is not cleared and the previous setting is retained. Further, in the normal operation, after driving the segment drive unit 193 and the digit drive unit 195 once, the data of the 8-bit latch is immediately reflected on the display of the display 900 by simply storing the data in the 8-bit latch. To.

The upper 8 bits are the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H (hexameric representation))
The latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to the 8-bit latch 167a. As a result, the 8-bit latch 167a latches (holds) and captures (sets) the lighting pattern data or character code of the lower 8 bits (data unit). Similarly
The upper 8 bits are any address of the 8-bit latch 167b-167d (for example, 23H).
, 24H, 25H (in hexadecimal representation)), the latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to any of the 8-bit latches 167b-167d corresponding to the address. As a result, the 8-bit latch 167b-167d has the lower 8 bits (data unit) addressed to itself.
Lighting pattern data or character code can be latched and captured.

A latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111 is input to the latch selector 165, and the latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to an 8-bit latch 167a-16.
Transfer to any one of 7d and select any one of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. Then, the 8-bit latches 167a-167d have digit 0 and digit 1 addressed to themselves, respectively.
, Digit 2 and digit 3 display data for the display 900 can be held.

In order to realize the dynamic drive method (dynamic lighting method), the 4: 1 data selector 183 sequentially selects the data of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d corresponding to the digit lines of each digit selected by the digit drive unit 195. To do. The 4: 1 data selector 183
The data of any one of the selected 8-bit latches 167a-167d is output to the character generator 185 and the 2: 1 data selector 187. The digit line is selected by outputting an on / off drive signal to the digit line. In the case of anode common, the on voltage is applied to the digit line, and in the case of cathode common, the current lead voltage (off voltage) is applied to the digit line. ) Is applied. Information indicating which digit digit digit line is selected by the digit drive unit 195 may be transmitted to the 4: 1 data selector 183.

For example, when the digit drive unit 195 outputs a drive signal and selects the digit line of digit 0, the data of the 8-bit latch 167a is selected. Similarly, the digit drive unit 19
When 5 outputs a drive signal and selects the digit lines of the digit 1, the digit 2, and the digit 3, the data of the 8-bit latches 167b, 167c, and 167d are selected, respectively.

The character generator 185 decodes the data sent from the 4: 1 data selector 183. When the data sent from the 4: 1 data selector 183 is a character code, the character generator 185 uses decoding processing to obtain the character code (character code) and the lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code. Convert to.

FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a character code (character code) and a lighting pattern of a character corresponding to the character code (character code). In FIG. 72, X is arbitrary (0 or 1), and the character code “X10 ... B” corresponds to the lighting pattern data when the decimal point (Dp) is lit. It is possible to define variously what kind of character code the character is associated with, but the character generator 185 is a logic circuit that defines the correspondence relationship between the character code (input) and the character (output) (character lighting pattern data). And so on. For example, the character code "X0011010B" is the character "-".
Lighting pattern data ((a, b, c,
d, e, f, g, Dp) = (0,0,0,0,0,0,1,0)) (for example, "00000"
010B "). Since the batch driver 153a uses non-decoded data, when only the segment g is turned on, the lighting pattern data (for example, "00000010B") transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is used as it is. ..

Returning to the description with reference to FIG. 71. If the LED driver 153 is a combination driver 153b or a ball output rate / ejected ball number driver 153c, the character code transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 is held in the 8-bit latch 167a-167d, so that the character generator The 185 outputs the lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code. However, if the LED driver 153 is a batch driver 153a, the appropriate lighting pattern data transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 is the 8-bit latch 167a-1.
Since it is already held in 67d, the character generator 18 except in accidental cases
In No. 5, the decoding process only converts appropriate lighting pattern data into inappropriate lighting pattern data. If the appropriate lighting pattern data accidentally matches any of the character codes, the character generator 185 of the batch driver 153a may output the lighting pattern data of the character (character).

The 2: 1 data selector 187 directly outputs the decoded data (decoded data) output from the character generator 185 and the 4: 1 data selector 183 in response to the data selection signal from the data selection unit 177. One of the non-decoded data to be output is selected and output to the segment drive unit 193. The non-decoded data is data output from the 4: 1 data selector 183 without going through the character generator 185, and is the 8-bit data itself of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. When a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data is input, the 2 to 1 data selector 187 sets the data selector 187.
The undecoded data is output, and when the data selection signal is not input, the decoded data is output.

If the LED driver 153 is a batch driver 153a, the 2 to 1 data selector 1
In 87, a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data is input, and appropriate lighting pattern data always held in the 8-bit latches 167a-167d is output to the segment drive unit 193. On the other hand, if the LED driver 153 is a combination driver 153b or a ball output rate / ejected ball number driver 153c, the 2 to 1 data selector 187 does not input a data selection signal and always lights a character (character). The pattern data (decoded data) will be output to the segment drive unit 193.

The segment drive unit 193 outputs the lighting pattern data (decoded data or non-decoded data) from the 2: 1 data selector 187 to the digit display 900 corresponding to the digit line selected by the digit drive unit 195 (. Dynamic drive system). The lighting pattern data becomes on / off data of light emission of eight LEDs (segment ag, Dp or dot-shaped eight LEDs) of the display 900 of the selected digit (that is, the selected digit line). In the case of the common anode, the segment drive unit 193 turns the LED on (light emitting state) by applying a current lead-in voltage (off voltage) to the segment line as a drive voltage. In the case of common cathode, LE by applying an on-voltage as a drive voltage to the segment line.
Set D to the on state (light emitting state).

The eight LEDs of the display 900 are 7-segment type (8-segment type including the point part).
In the display 900 of the above, the segments are ag and Dp. On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 34 (A),
The eight LEDs of the display 900 are a set of eight dotted LED lamps (D3-D7, D8,
D10, D18) or a set of eight dotted LED lamps (D9, D11-D16, D)
17) can be.

The digit drive unit 195 outputs a drive signal and selects a digit line for each digit. As a drive signal, the digit drive unit 195 applies an on-voltage to the digit line in the case of the anode common, and applies a current lead-in voltage (off voltage) to the digit line in the case of the cathode common.

The resistor connection terminal 197 (R-EXT terminal) is segmented by a constant current circuit composed of a segment drive unit 193 and a segment drive unit 193 by connecting one external resistor between this terminal and the ground (GND). The value of the current flowing through the line can be set. This will
It is possible to supply a common current value to all LEDs.

Further, the emission color control unit (not shown) of the LED driver 153 controls the emission color of the LED (or segment). The emission color control unit is used in the main processing and timer interrupt processing.
It is possible to control the emission color of the LED by receiving a command (control data) related to the color of the LED and sending a command signal to the segment drive unit 193. Segment drive unit 1
The 93 is driven by applying a driving voltage to the segment line of the color corresponding to the command signal from the emission color control unit. The segment line is provided for each color LED (or segment) of the display 900.

As described above, the driver 150 of the first embodiment was initially set in the main process. At this time, the initial setting is performed on the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (further, the data selection unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) of the driver 150 (LED driver 153). On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, even in the timer interrupt processing, the initial setting is performed for at least one of the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176. As a result, even if the set value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like after the main processing, the driving data (LED command) is output after the setting value is set to the correct value in the timer interrupt processing. It is possible to avoid turning off the light due to noise or the like of the status display device 152. When the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (further, the data selection unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) are initially set in the timer interrupt processing, the initial setting in the main processing (A1016).
Can be omitted. In the sixth embodiment, the number of digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 1
The case where the initial setting is performed for 76 will be described as an example.

[Initial setting command transmission timing chart]
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the relationship between the initial setting command and the latch transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 73, the initial setting command is the address unit (8).
Bit) is omitted. The game microcomputer 111 includes initial setting commands (digits) ((digits) are initial setting values for the number of digits) (16 bits) (FIG. 74) including initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175. Initial setting data (du) for duty setting unit 176 ((
Du) is an initial setting command (du) that includes the initial setting value of the duty ratio) (8 bits).
(16 bits) (FIG. 74) are transmitted in order.

The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an initial setting command (16 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the first initial setting command (digit) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153, and the initial setting data (digit) is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 by the initial setting command (digit). Will be done. Then, the next initial setting command (du) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 by the next latch signal.
Initial setting data (du) is sent to the duty setting unit 176 by the initial setting command (du).
Is remembered. In FIG. 73, the initial setting command for the digit number setting unit 175 is transmitted before the initial setting command for the duty setting unit 176, but the order may be reversed.

[LED driver initial setting process]
With reference to FIG. 74, the LED driver initial setting process according to the sixth embodiment (A15 in FIG. 70).
001) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the LED driver initial setting process according to the sixth embodiment. In this embodiment, the case where the LED driver 153 is the combination ratio driver 153b and the character code (8 bits) stored in the combination ratio driver 153b is the accessory ratio display data will be described as an example.

The game microcomputer 111 first generates an initial setting command (digit) related to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 (A15002), writes the initial setting command (digit) to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit, and clocks the clock. It is transmitted together with the signal (A15003). Next, the game microcomputer 111 generates an initial setting command (du) related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 (A1504), and transmits the initial setting command (du) in the same manner as described above (due to the above).
A15005).

[LED command transmission timing chart]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED command transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment and the latch. In FIG. 75, the LED command is shown by omitting the address portion (8 bits). The game microcomputer 111 has an LED command (16 bits).
A latch signal is output each time. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the LED command.

In the 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153, the first LED command (digit 0) is held by the first latch signal, and the accessory ratio display data (digit 0) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a by the LED command (digit 0). ) Is memorized. Similarly, in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the second LED command (digit 1) is held by the second latch signal.
By the LED command (digit 1), the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) is displayed on the 8-bit latch 167b.
) Is memorized. In the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the third LED command (digit 2) is held by the third latch signal, and the accessory ratio display data (digit 2) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c by the LED command (digit 2). It will be remembered. In the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the fourth LED command (digit 3) is held by the fourth latch signal, and the accessory ratio display data (digit 3) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d by the LED command (digit 3). It will be remembered.

[LED data transmission processing]
The LED driver transmission process according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the LED data transmission process according to the sixth embodiment. The game microcomputer 111 first generates LED commands (digit 0) (16 bits) including the accessory ratio display data (digit 0) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a (A16003), and the LED command (digit 0). ) Is written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal (A16005).

The game microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 1) including the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b (A16009), and transmits the LED command (digit 1) in the same manner as described above. (A16011). The game microcomputer 111 includes an LED command (digit 2) including accessory ratio display data (digit 2) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c.
) Is generated (A16015), and the LED command (digit 2) is transmitted (A16017).
.. The game microcomputer 111 is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d as the accessory ratio display data (
An LED command (digit 3) including the digit 3) is generated (A16021), and the LED command (digit 3) is transmitted (A16023). In FIG. 76, the LED command (character ratio display data = character code) is transmitted in the order of digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3, but the transmission order can be set arbitrarily.

[Cascade connection of LED driver according to the first modification]
FIG. 77 shows the LED driver 153 (role ratio driver 1) according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.
The details of the cascade connection of 53b, the driver for the payout rate / the number of ejected balls 153c) are shown. In the cascade connection, the driver ratio 153b is the first stage, and the driver 15 for the ball ejection rate / the number of ejected balls
3c constitutes the second stage. The serial data (initial setting command, LED command) transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 is first transmitted to the combination ratio driver 153b, and is directly transmitted from the combination ratio driver 153b to the ball output rate / ejection ball number driver 153c. To. That is, the serial data such as the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code (character code) transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 are in order of the combination driver 153b and the ball output rate /
It is transmitted to the driver for the number of ejected balls 153c. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code in a serial manner by using one serial communication circuit. The game microcomputer 111 transmits a clock signal and a latch signal (load signal) in parallel to the combination driver 153b and the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 153c.

[Status display device]
FIG. 78 (A) is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio display unit 68 that displays the accessory ratio. The accessory ratio display unit 68 in the status display device 152 is a display unit 900 of four 7-segment type (8-segment type including the point portion) arranged in the horizontal direction, and the digit 0 and the digit 1 are arranged from the right. , A 4-digit 7-segment type display 900 indicating a digit 2 and a digit 3. The accessory ratio display unit 68 displays the total accessory ratio (for example, “y50.8”) and the continuous accessory ratio (for example, “r58.4”).
) Can be switched and displayed. The digit 3 (fourth digit from the right) is the character "y" indicating the total accessory ratio (generally used accessory ratio) or the character "y" indicating the continuous accessory ratio.
"r" may be displayed.

The role ratio driver 153b (FIG. 77) converts the character code (character code) received from the gaming microcomputer 111 into the lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code, and is based on the lighting pattern data. Each digit of the accessory ratio display unit 68 (digit 3, digit 3,
Controls the lighting of the display 900 of digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0). This character code (character ratio display data) is the character ratio calculated by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (FIG. 6).
, Corresponds to the numerical value of each digit of A1318) in FIG. The combination driver 153b has a character generator 185 (decoder) that generates lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code from the character code by decoding, and can set the use / non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185. In some cases, it is set to use decoded data. That is, the combination ratio driver 153b can set whether or not to use the decoding function that generates the lighting data of the accessory ratio display unit 68 from the character code.

FIG. 78 (B) is a diagram showing details of a discharge ball number display unit 66 that displays the number of discharged balls and a ball ejection rate display unit 67 that displays the ball ejection rate. The ejected ball number display unit 66 and the ball ejection rate display unit 67 in the status display device 152 are four 7-segment type (8-segment type including the point portion) display 9
00s are arranged in the horizontal direction, and from the right, the display 900 indicating digit 0 and the display 9 indicating digit 1.
00 corresponds to the number of ejected balls display unit 66, and from the right, the display 900 indicating the digit 2 and the display 900 indicating the digit 3 correspond to the ball ejection rate display unit 67. On the contrary, the display 900 indicating the digit 0 and the display 900 indicating the digit 1 correspond to the ball ejection rate display unit 67 from the right, and the display 900 indicating the digit 2 and the display 900 indicating the digit 3 are discharged from the right. It may correspond to the ball number display unit 66. The number of ejected balls display unit 66 and the payout rate display unit 67 can be displayed at the same time.

The ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 153c (FIG. 77) lights a character code (character code) received from the game microcomputer 111 via the combination ratio driver 153b, and the character (character) indicated by the character code is lit. It is converted into pattern data, and the lighting of the display 900 of each digit of the ejection ball number display unit 66 and the ball ejection rate display unit 67 is controlled based on the lighting pattern data. The ball ejection rate / ejection ball number driver 153c converts the character code into lighting pattern data (ejection ball number display data or ball ejection rate display data) of the character indicated by the character code by decoding, and the character generator 185 (decoder). ), And if the use / non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 can be set, the decoded data is set to be used. That is, the ball ejection rate / ejection ball number driver 153c can set whether or not to use the decoding function that generates lighting data of the ejection ball number display unit 66 and the ejection ball number display unit 67 from the character code.

[Transmission timing chart of initial setting command according to the first modification]
FIG. 79 is a timing chart showing an initial setting command sent to the driver for the combination ratio and the driver for the payout rate / the number of ejected balls according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. Note that FIG. 79
In, the initial setting command is shown by omitting the address part (8 bits). The game microcomputer 111 includes initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the ball ejection rate / ejection ball number driver 153c and initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the role ratio driver 153b. Initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 of the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 153c, which is transmitted in the order of (bits) included in the initial setting command (32 bits)
The initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b is transmitted in the order of being included in the initial setting command (32 bits).

The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal every time an initial setting command (32 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the number of digits setting unit 1 of the driver 153c for the ball ejection rate / the number of ejected balls 1
Initial setting data (digit) c is stored in 75. At the same time, the initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 of the combination driver 153b by the latch signal.

Then, the initial setting data (du) c is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153c for the ball ejection rate / the number of ejected balls by the next latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (du) b is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the combination driver 153b by the latch signal.

[Initial setting process of driver for ball output rate / number of ejected balls and driver for role ratio]
The LED driver initial setting process (A15001 in FIG. 70) according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a procedure for initial setting processing of the driver for the combination ratio and the driver for the payout rate / the number of ejected balls according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

First, the game microcomputer 111 has a digit number setting unit 17 of the driver 153c for the ball ejection rate / the number of ejected balls.
Initial setting command (8 bits) including initial setting data (digits) c (8 bits) related to the number of digits used of 5 (
Initial setting command (digit) that generates (digit) c (16 bits) (A15006) and includes initial setting data (digits) b (8 bits) related to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 of the combination driver 153b. ) B (16 bits) is generated (A15007), and the initial setting commands (digits) c and b (32 bits) that are concatenated in the order of the initial setting command (digit) c and the initial setting command (digit) b are connected in the serial communication circuit. Write to the transmission buffer of and transmit with the clock signal (A150)
09).

Next, the game microcomputer 111 includes an initial setting command (du) c related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153c for the payout rate / number of ejected balls.
Initial setting command (du) b (16 bits) that generates (du) c (16 bits) and includes initial setting data (du) b related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the combination driver 153b. Is generated (A15012), and the initial setting command (du) c
, Initial setting command (du) b (32) concatenated in the order of initial setting command (du) b
Bit) is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A15014).

[LED command transmission timing chart according to the first modification]
FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing LED commands sent to the combination driver according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment and the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver. Here, the character code stored in the combination driver 153b is the accessory ratio display data (digit 0-digit 3).
The character code stored in the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 153c is the ejected ball number display data (digit 0, digit 1) or the ball ejection rate display data (digit 2, digit 3). Note that FIG. 81
In, the LED command is shown by omitting the address part (8 bits).

The game microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for ball ejection rate / number of ejected balls.
The discharge ball number display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in 7a and the accessory ratio display data (digit 0) b (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the combination driver 153b are stored in this order. The output ball number display data (digit 1) that is generated and transmitted in the form included in the LED command (32 bits) and then stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ball ejection rate / ejection ball count driver 153c.
) C (8 bits), and the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the role ratio driver 153b are generated and transmitted in the form of being included in the LED command (32 bits). ..

Here, the game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal every time an LED command (32 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the LED command. As a result, the ejected ball number display data (digit 0) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 153c. At the same time, according to the latch signal, the accessory ratio display data (the accessory ratio display data) is displayed on the 8-bit latch 167b of the combination driver 153b.
Digit 0) b is stored.

Then, by the next latch signal, the ejected ball number display data (digit 1) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the combination driver 153b.

Although not shown in FIG. 81, after that, the game microcomputer 111 stores the ball ejection rate display data (digit 2) c stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the ball ejection rate / ejection ball number driver 153c.
(8 bits), the accessory ratio display data (digit 2) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the combination ratio driver 153b is generated and transmitted in the order of these in the command (32 bits), and then transmitted. , Ball ejection rate display data (digit 3) c (8 bits) stored in 8-bit latch 167b of driver 153c for ball ejection rate / number of ejected balls, 8-bit latch 167 of driver 153b for role ratio
The accessory ratio display data (digit 3) b stored in d is generated and transmitted in the form of being included in the command (32 bits).

Therefore, according to the next latch signal, the ball ejection rate display data (digit 2) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the accessory ratio display data (digit 2) is displayed on the 8-bit latch 167c of the combination driver 153b by the latch signal.
b is stored.

Further, by the next latch signal, the ball ejection rate display data (digit 3) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the accessory ratio display data (digit 3) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the combination driver 153b by the LED command (digit 3) b.

[LED data transmission process according to the first modification]
The LED driver transmission process according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the LED data transmission process according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

The game microcomputer 111 first includes an LED command (digit 0) c (digit 0) c (digit 0) c (8 bits) including the discharge ball number display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the ball ejection rate / ejection ball number driver 153c. 16 bits) is generated (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0) b including the contract ratio display data (digit 0) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the role ratio driver 153b is generated (A16003). LED commands (digit 0) c and b (32 bits) linked in the order of LED command (digit 0) c and LED command (digit 0) b are written to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal ( A16006).

The game microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for ball ejection rate / number of ejected balls.
The LED command (digit 1) c including the discharge ball number display data (digit 1) c stored in 7b is generated (A1608), and the accessory ratio display data stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the role ratio driver 153b ( Generate LED command (digit 1) b including digit 1) b (A1600)
9), LED commands (digit 1) c and b linked in the order of LED command (digit 1) c and LED command (digit 1) b are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16012).

The game microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for ball ejection rate / number of ejected balls.
The LED command (digit 2) c including the ball output rate display data (digit 2) c stored in 7c is generated (A16014), and the accessory ratio display data stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the role ratio driver 153b ( Generate LED command (digit 2) b including digit 2) b (A16015)
), LED command (digit 2) c, and LED command (digit 2) b connected in this order to transmit LED commands (digit 2) c and b in the same manner as described above (A16018).

The game microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for ball ejection rate / number of ejected balls.
The LED command (digit 3) c including the ball output rate display data (digit 3) c stored in 7d is generated (A16020), and the accessory ratio display data stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the role ratio driver 153b ( Generate an LED command (digit 3) b that includes digit 3) b (A16021)
), The LED command (digit 3) c, and the LED command (digit 3) b connected in this order, and the LED command (digit 3) c, b is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16024).

[Game control device according to the second modification]
FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of a game machine according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment. The game control device 100 of the sixth embodiment is the game control device 100 of the first embodiment.
However, the state display device 152 attached to the game control device 100 is incorporated in the batch display device 50. Further, the game control device 100 of the present embodiment
The batch driver 153a, the combination ratio driver 153b, and the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 153c are cascaded in this order by the data signal line, and the data signal line extending from the game microcomputer 111 is the batch driver 153a. It is connected to the.

[Cascade connection of LED driver according to the second modification]
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing details of cascade connection of the LED driver according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. In the cascade connection, the batch driver 153a constitutes the first stage, the combination ratio driver 153b constitutes the second stage, and the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 153c constitutes the third stage. Serial data (initial setting command, LED command) transmitted from the game microcomputer 111
Is transmitted to the batch driver 153a, and the batch driver 153a sends the combination driver 1
It is transmitted to 53b as it is. Then, the serial data transmitted to the combination ratio driver 153b is directly transmitted from the combination ratio driver 153b to the ball ejection rate / ejection ball number driver 153c. That is, the serial data such as the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code (character code) transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 are, in order, the batch driver 153a, the role ratio driver 153b, the ball ejection rate / the number of ejected balls. It is transmitted to the driver 153c. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code in a serial manner by using one serial communication circuit. The game microcomputer 111 has a clock signal and a latch signal (load signal) in parallel with a batch driver 153a, a combination ratio driver 153b, and a ball ejection rate / ejection ball number driver 153c.
Send to.

The batch driver 153a controls the lighting of the batch display unit (not shown) according to the lighting pattern data received from the gaming microcomputer 111. The batch driver 153a is a 7-segment type (8-segment type including the point portion) display 900 (LED lamp), and the first special figure variation display unit 51 (D1) is a digit 0 display 900, second. Special figure fluctuation display unit 52 (D2)
Is controlled as the display 900 of digit 1 (see FIG. 2B and the like).

The batch driver 153a originally controls the 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the point portion) display 900 itself. The round display unit 60 and the eight dot-shaped LED lamps (D3-D7, D8, D10, D18) of the first game status display unit 57 are combined with the segment (ag) of the display 900 of the digit 2.
, Dp) and control (see FIG. 2B and the like). Further, the batch driver 153a includes a hold storage display unit (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, general figure hold display 56).
Eight point-shaped LED lamps (D9,) of the second game status display unit 58 and the third game status display unit 59.
D11-D16, D17) is regarded as a segment (ag, Dp) of the display 900 of the digit 3 and controlled (see FIG. 2B and the like).

In the present embodiment, the batch driver 153a is actually the combination driver 153.
Although the LED driver 153 (same IC) of the same type as the driver 153c for the payout rate / number of ejected balls is the same as b, the batch driver 153a does not use the decoded data by the character generator 185 even if it has the character generator 185. It is set (non-use setting).

[Transmission timing chart of initial setting command related to the second modification]
FIG. 85 shows a batch driver, a combination driver, and a combination driver according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment.
It is a timing chart which shows the initial setting command sent to the driver for the payout rate / the number of ejected balls. In FIG. 85, the initial setting command is shown by omitting the address portion (8 bits).

The game microcomputer 111 includes initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the ball ejection rate / ejection ball number driver 153c and initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the role ratio driver 153b. Bit), the initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a is transmitted in the form of being included in the command (48 bits), and the duty setting of the ball output rate / ejected ball number driver 153c Initial setting data (digit) c (8 bits) for unit 176, initial setting data (digit) b (8 bits) for duty setting unit 176 of the combination driver 153b, for duty setting unit 176 of batch driver 153a Initial setting data (digit) a (8)
It is transmitted in the form of being included in the command (48 bits) in the order of bits).

The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an initial setting command (48 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the number of digits setting unit 1 of the driver 153c for the ball ejection rate / the number of ejected balls 1
Initial setting data (digit) c is stored in 75. At the same time, the initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 of the combination driver 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (digit) a is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

Then, the initial setting data (du) c is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153c for the ball ejection rate / the number of ejected balls by the next latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (du) b is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the combination driver 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (du) a is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

[Initial setting processing of driver for ball output rate / number of ejected balls, driver for role ratio, driver for batch]
The LED driver initial setting process according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 shows a batch driver and a combination driver according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the initial setting process of the driver for the payout rate / the number of ejected balls.

First, the game microcomputer 111 has a digit number setting unit 17 of the driver 153c for the ball ejection rate / the number of ejected balls.
Initial setting command (8 bits) including initial setting data (digits) c (8 bits) related to the number of digits used of 5 (
Initial setting command (digit) that generates (digit) c (16 bits) (A15006) and includes initial setting data (digits) b (8 bits) related to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 of the combination driver 153b. ) B (16 bits) is generated (A15007), and the initial setting command (digit) a including the initial setting data (digits) a (8 bits) related to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a. Generate (16 bits) (A15008), and initialize command (digit) c,
Initial setting commands (digits) c, b, a (48 bits) concatenated in the order of initial setting command (digit) b and initial setting command (digit) a are written to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal. (A15010).

Next, the game microcomputer 111 includes an initial setting command (du) c related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153c for the payout rate / number of ejected balls.
Initial setting command (du) b (16 bits) that generates (du) c (16 bits) and includes initial setting data (du) b related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b. (A15012), and the initial setting command (du) a (16 bits) including the initial setting data (du) a related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a is generated (A15013). The initial setting commands (du) c, b, a (48 bits) concatenated in the order of the setting command (du) c, the initial setting command (du) b, and the initial setting command (du) a are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A15015).
).

[LED command transmission timing chart according to the second modification]
FIG. 87 shows a batch driver, a combination driver, and a combination driver according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment.
It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for the payout rate / the number of ejected balls. Here, the character code stored in the combination driver 153b is the accessory ratio display data (digit 0-digit 3), and the character code stored in the ball output rate / ejection ball number driver 153c is ejected. The number of balls display data (digit 0, digit 1) or the ball output rate display data (digit 2, digit 3). In addition, lighting pattern data (digit 0-digit 3) (hereinafter referred to as "lighting data") is stored in the batch driver 153a. In FIG. 87, the LED command is shown by omitting the address portion (8 bits).

The game microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for ball ejection rate / number of ejected balls.
Character code (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in 7a, 8 of the combination driver 153b
The character code (digit 0) b (8 bits) stored in the bit latch 167a and the lighting data (digit 0) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the batch driver 153a are sent as LED commands (digit 0) in this order. ) Character code (digit 1) c (digit 1) c (digit 1) c (digit 1) c (digit 1) c (digit 1) c ( 8-bit), 8-bit latch 1 of the combination driver 153b
The character code (digit 1) b (8 bits) stored in 67b and the lighting data (digit 1) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the batch driver 153a are stored in this order.
It is generated and transmitted in the form included in the ED command (digit 1) c, b, a (48 bits).

Here, the game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal every time an LED command (48 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the LED command. As a result, the ejected ball number display data (digit 0) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 153c. At the same time, according to the latch signal, the accessory ratio display data (the accessory ratio display data) is displayed on the 8-bit latch 167b of the combination driver 153b.
Digit 0) b is stored. At the same time, the latch signal causes the batch driver 153a.
The lighting data (digit 0) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the above.

Then, by the next latch signal, the ejected ball number display data (digit 1) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) is displayed on the 8-bit latch 167b of the combination driver 153b by the latch signal.
) B is stored. At the same time, the latch signal of the batch driver 153a 8
Lighting data (digit 1) a is stored in the bit latch 167b.

Although not shown in FIG. 87, after that, the game microcomputer 111 stores the character code (digit 2) c stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the driver 153c for the payout rate / number of ejected balls.
(8 bits), character code (digit 2) b (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the combination driver 153b, lighting data (digit 2) a (digit 2) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the batch driver 153a. These are LED commands (digit 2) c, b in the order of (8 bits).
, A (48 bits) included in the generated form and transmitted, then the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 1
Character code (digit 3) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of 53c,
Character code (digit 3) stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the role ratio driver 153b
Include these in the LED command (digit 3) c, b, a (48 bits) in the order of b (8 bits) and lighting data (digit 3) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the batch driver 153a. Generate and send in the form of

Therefore, the ball ejection rate display data (digit 2) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the ball ejection rate / ejection ball number driver 153c by the next latch signal. At the same time, the role ratio driver 1
The accessory ratio display data (digit 2) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of 53b. At the same time, the lighting data (digit 2) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

Further, by the next latch signal, the ball ejection rate display data (digit 3) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the ball ejection rate / ejected ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the accessory ratio display data (digit 3) is displayed on the 8-bit latch 167d of the combination driver 153b by the latch signal.
b is stored. At the same time, the lighting data (digit 3) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

[LED data transmission process according to the second modification]
The LED driver transmission process according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the LED data transmission process according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment.

The game microcomputer 111 first includes an LED command (digit 0) c (digit 0) c (digit 0) including the output ball number display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the ball ejection rate / ejection ball number driver 153c. 16 bits) is generated (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0) b including the accessory ratio display data (digit 0) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the role ratio driver 153b is generated (A16003). 8-bit latch 176 of batch driver 153a
An LED command (digit 0) a including the lighting code (digit 0) a (display data of the LED of the special figure 1) stored in a is generated (A16004). Then, LED command (digit 0) c, LE
The LED command (digit 0) c, b, a (48 bits) connected in the order of the D command (digit 0) b and the LED command (digit 0) a is written to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal. (A16007).

The game microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for ball ejection rate / number of ejected balls.
LED command including the number of ejected balls display data (digit 1) c (8 bits) stored in 7b (
Digit 1) c (16 bits) is generated (A1608), and an LED command (digit 1) b including the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the role ratio driver 153b is generated. (A16009), the LED command (digit 1) a including the lighting code (digit 1) a (display data of the special figure 2 LED) stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the batch driver 153a is generated (A16010). Then, the LED command (digit 1) connected in the order of the LED command (digit 1) c, the LED command (digit 1) b, and the LED command (digit 1) a.
c, b, a (48 bits) are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16013).

The game microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for ball ejection rate / number of ejected balls.
An LED command (digit 2) c (16 bits) including the ball output rate display data (digit 2) c (8 bits) stored in 7c is generated (A16014), and the 8-bit latch 176c of the role ratio driver 153b is used. LED command (digit 2) including the character ratio display data (digit 2) b to be stored
) B is generated (A16015), and an LED command (digit 2) including a lighting code (digit 2) a (normal figure / round / first game state display data) stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the batch driver 153a is included. ) A is generated (A16016). And LED command (digit 2
) C, the LED command (digit 2) b, and the LED command (digit 2) a are connected in this order, and the LED command (digit 2) c, b, a (48 bits) is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16019).

The game microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for ball ejection rate / number of ejected balls.
An LED command (digit 3) c (16 bits) including the ball output rate display data (digit 3) c (8 bits) stored in 7d is generated (A16020), and the 8-bit latch 176d of the role ratio driver 153b is used. LED command (digit 3) including the character ratio display data (digit 3) b to be stored
) B is generated (A16021), and LE including the lighting code (digit 3) a (holding / display data of the second and third game states) stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the batch driver 153a.
Generate the D command (digit 3) a (A16022). And LED command (digit 3) c
, LED command (digit 3) b, LED command (digit 3) a connected in this order, and LED command (digit 3) c, b, a (48 bits) are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16025).

[Action / effect of the sixth embodiment]
According to the sixth embodiment, the game machine 10 has a game control program storage means (ROM111b) for storing a game control program (invariant information (program) for game control) and a game control program (for game control). Arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111) that performs predetermined arithmetic processing by (immutable information (program)) and arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111)
) Is provided with a driving means (LED driver 153) for driving the light emitting unit (accessory ratio display unit 68) based on the driving data (LED command) output. Drive means (LED
The driver 153) is provided with a setting unit (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) for setting the light emission mode in the light emitting unit (role ratio display unit 68), and the game control program is provided.
Main processing (A1001) to control the progress of the game and main processing (A10) at predetermined time intervals
In the interrupt processing (A1301), the arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111) includes an interrupt processing (A1301 to) executed by interrupting (01 to), and a setting unit (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting). Unit 176) Initial setting data for initializing (at least one of a plurality of setting units) is transmitted to the driving means (LED driver 153) (A15001), and then the driving data (LED command) is transmitted to the driving means (LED). It is transmitted to the driver 153).

As a result, even if the set value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like after the main processing, the LED driver 153 can be normally restored in the interrupt processing, and the correct set value. After that, it becomes possible to output the driving data (LED command), and it is possible to avoid turning off the lights due to noise or the like of the status display device 152 (and the batch display device 50).

In the interrupt process (A1301), after transmitting the driving data (LED command) to the driving means (LED driver 153), at least one of a plurality of setting units (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176). Driving means (L) for initial setting data
It is also possible to configure the transmission to the ED driver 153). In this case, in order to transmit the driving data in the next interrupt processing, the initial setting data is transmitted to the driving means in the current interrupt processing to initialize the setting unit.

That is, in the interrupt processing (A1301), if the initial setting data is transmitted to the driving means together with the driving data, the status display device 152 (and the batch display device) regardless of the transmission order of the driving data and the initial setting data. It is possible to avoid turning off the light due to the noise of 50) or the like.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (gaming microcomputer 111) can transmit the initial setting data to the driving means (LED driver 153) even in the main processing (A1001 to). As a result, it is possible to avoid turning off the status display device 152 even before the interrupt processing is performed.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the setting unit (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176).
Is a digit number setting unit 175 for setting the number of light emitting elements (display 900) to be emitted by the light emitting unit (accessory ratio display unit 68) and a duty setting unit for setting the duty ratio in the light emitting element (display 900). 176 and.

As a result, even if the set value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like, the correct set value (the number of light emitting elements and their duty ratio (light emitting intensity, brightness)) is set. It is possible to output drive data (LED command), and it is possible to avoid turning off the lights due to noise or the like of the status display device 152 (and the batch display device 50).

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the light emitting unit is the accessory ratio display unit 68 that displays the accessory ratio. As a result, the accessory ratio display unit 68 can be reliably displayed according to the game control program even after the main processing.

[7th Embodiment]
A seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 3, 89 to 93. The seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment, but has the same configuration as the first embodiment in the procedure for changing the test firing test signal (test signal) and the probability set value (set value) transmitted to the test firing test apparatus. Is different. The test firing test device is an external device existing outside the game machine 10.

The device configuration in which this embodiment is performed is the same as that shown in FIG. 3, but the game control device 100 (game control means) and the relay board 70 are mainly used, and the game control device 100 is a game microcomputer 111. , Setting change device 42 (setting key switch 93, setting value changing switch 102),
It includes an input port 123, a data bus 140, a buffer 133, and a sixth output port 141. Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting changing device 42 (setting key switch 93, setting value changing switch 102) and a probability setting value display device 143 (display unit). In addition, it should be noted.
As described in the first embodiment, the buffer 133 is provided with an output port (corresponding to the test signal output ports 1 to 6 used in the output process of FIG. 7).

The input port 123, the buffer 133 (second output unit), and the sixth output port 141 (first output unit) are connected to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Input port 1
A setting key switch 93 and a setting value change switch 102 are connected to 23. A relay board 70 is connected to the buffer 133. A probability setting value display device 143 is connected to the sixth output port 141.

Dedicated addresses are assigned to the buffer 133 (second output unit) (test signal output port) and the sixth output port 141 (first output unit), respectively, and the game microcomputer 111.
Can output information to any one of the buffer 133 (test signal output port) and the sixth output port 141 by designating an address.

The probability setting value display device 143 is, for example, a 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot display unit) display (LED lamp) and the information of the probability setting value of the LED, like the state display device 152 shown in FIG. Lighting pattern data representing the lighting pattern (probability setting value display data)
It consists of a driver that converts to. Further, the test firing test device can also be provided with a display and a driver similar to the probability set value display device 143.

The game microcomputer 111 has information in the probability setting value area (probability setting value display data corresponding to the fixed value of the probability setting value) or information in the work probability setting value area (probability setting value provisional) in the sixth output port 141. Probability setting value display data corresponding to the value) is output. On the other hand, the game microcomputer 11
1 outputs the information of the probability set value area to the buffer 133 (test signal output port), but does not output the information of the working probability set value area.

As a result, the probability set value display device 143 displays the fixed value and the provisional value of the probability set value. Further, when the test firing test device is provided with a display device similar to the probability set value display device 143, only the fixed value of the probability set value is displayed on the test firing test device.

[Probability setting value change processing of the seventh embodiment]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability set value changing process according to the seventh embodiment. The probability setting value changing process according to the seventh embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 10), but step A20002 is added between step A2413 and step A2414, and step A20003 is added between step A2420 and step A2421. Has been added.

In step A2002, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a test signal using lighting pattern data (probability set value display data) corresponding to a fixed value of the same probability set value as that output to the probability set value display device 143 as a test firing test signal. Save to the data area. For example, the lighting pattern data and the test signal output data are the same "10111110B" ((a, b, c, d).
, E, f, g, Dp) = (1,0,1,1,1,1,1,0)) (Refer to the sixth embodiment for lighting pattern data). As a result, the test firing test device can collect data as a fixed value of the probability set value as a test firing test signal, and can display the fixed value of the probability set value when the test firing test device is provided with a display.

In step A20003, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the test firing test signal once erased by step A2418 in the test signal output data area again. This will
Even after the probability setting value change processing (main processing), the test firing test device can collect data as a fixed value of the probability setting value as a test firing test signal, and if the test firing test device is equipped with a display, the probability setting value. The fixed value of can be displayed.

[Display example of probability setting value in probability setting display device and test firing test device]
FIG. 90 shows a 7-segment type (including the dot display unit) of the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability set value display device 143 and the test firing test signal transmitted to the test firing test device when the setting of the seventh embodiment is changed. It is a schematic diagram when it is displayed on the display of 8 segment type). Here, a case where the probability setting value is changed from 1 to 6 will be described as an example.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value saved in the probability setting value area is saved in the test firing test display data area as a test firing test signal. It has become. The test-fire test device can constantly collect data as a fixed value of the probability set value as a test-fire test signal, and can always display the fixed value of the probability set value when the test-fire test device is provided with a display.

In the initial state, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the probability setting value "1" is displayed on the display of the test firing test device by the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) as the test firing test signal. There is.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the setting becomes variable, and the game microcomputer 111 loads the value in the probability setting value area and sets it in the working probability setting value area as initial data when the probability setting value is changed. Save (A1040). At this stage, in FIG. 89, step A2401 (= Y) → step A2406 (= N) → step A2407 (= N) → step A2411 (= N) is repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90 (display by the output process according to FIG. 7), "1" (provisional value) is displayed as the lighting pattern data on the probability setting value display device 143, but the test firing test device The display on the display remains "1" (fixed value before change).

Next, when the set value change switch 102 is pressed, step A2407 in FIG. 89.
Since (= Y), step A2408-step A2410 is executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, "2" (provisional value) is displayed on the probability set value display device 143 after a predetermined lighting blank period (light-off period), but the display of the test firing test device is displayed. Remains "1" (fixed value before change).

When the set value change switch 102 is further pressed, step A240 in FIG. 89 is shown.
8-Step A2410 is repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, each time the setting value change switch 102 is pressed, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 is displayed as “3” → “4” → “5”.
”→“ 6 ”(provisional values for both), but the display on the display of the test firing test device remains“ 1 ”(fixed value before the change).

Then, when there is an input (step A2411 (= Y)) from the touch switch, step A2412, step A2413, and step A20002 are executed, and the probability setting value “6” (probability setting value “6” (probability setting value display data area) in the test signal output data area and the probability setting value display data area. The probability set value display data corresponding to the fixed value) is overwritten. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, the probability set value display device 14
The display of 3 changes from "6" (provisional value) to "6" (confirmed value), and the display of the display of the test firing test device changes from "1" (provisional value) to "6" (confirmed value).

Further, by executing step A2406 (= Y) and step A2416 (= Y), step A2418 is executed, and the probability setting value display data (probability) saved in the test signal output data area and the probability setting value display data area. The set value "6") is temporarily erased, but is restored by step A2420 and step A20003. In this case, the display of the probability set value display device 143 and the display of the test firing test device maintains "6" (confirmed value).

Finally, by turning off the setting key switch 93, as shown in FIG. 89, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value “6” is saved in the probability setting value display data area by step A2420, and the step According to A20003, the test firing test signal (lighting pattern data) corresponding to the probability set value "6" is saved in the test signal output data area. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, until the probability setting value display permission flag is set in the subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A).
2405, A2502), the probability set value display data is not displayed on the probability set value display device 143 (step A1613 (= N)). On the other hand, the test signal output data continues to be transmitted to the test firing test apparatus (A1621, A1622, A1624). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90,
The probability set value display device 143 is turned off, and the display of the probability set value "6" is maintained on the display of the test firing test device.

[First modification of the seventh embodiment]
FIG. 91 shows the probability set value display device 14 when the setting of the first modification of the seventh embodiment is changed.
It is a schematic diagram in the case where the lighting pattern data transmitted to 3 and the test firing test signal transmitted to the test firing test device are displayed on a 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot display unit) display.

The 7-segment lighting pattern data (a, b, c, d, e, f, g) and dot data (Dp) (additional information) can be displayed on the probability set value display device 143 and the display of the test firing test device. (See FIG. 71). The dot display unit attached to the 7-segment segment is, for example, turned on when the dot data (Dp) is "1" and turned off when the dot data (Dp) is "0".

As described above, the output process shown in FIG. 7 (step A1621, step A1622 (= Y).
), Step A1623, and step A1624), the test firing test signal and the setting key switch-on information are combined and output. On the other hand, step A1621 and step A162
According to 2 (= N), when there is no setting key switch-on information, the test firing test signal is output as it is.

In the present embodiment, when the setting key switch 93 is in the ON state, the setting key switch ON signal is input to the gaming microcomputer 111. Here, the setting key switch-on signal can be expressed as, for example, "1". On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is in the off state, it can be considered that the setting key switch off signal (the state in which there is no setting key switch on signal) is input to the gaming microcomputer 111. At this time, the setting key switch off signal can be expressed as, for example, "0".

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the test firing test signal is used as lighting pattern data, the setting key switch on information is used as dot data (1), the setting key switch off information is used as dot data (0), and the lighting pattern data and dot data (Dp) are used. = 0 or 1) is combined and the combined data is output to the test firing test device. As a result, in the test firing test apparatus, the fixed value of the probability set value is displayed based on the lighting pattern data. Further, the on / off state of the setting key switch 93, that is, whether or not the setting is being changed can be grasped by turning on / off the dot display unit depending on the presence / absence of the dot data (1). In the present embodiment, the dot data (1) indicates that the dot display unit is lit and the setting is being changed, and the dot data (0) indicates that the dot display unit is turned off and the setting change is completed. can do.

In the present embodiment, the gaming microcomputer 111 buffers data (a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp) including lighting pattern data (fixed value of probability setting value) and dot data (a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp). It is configured to output to the test firing test apparatus via the test signal output port) and the relay board 70 (FIG. 3). As a result, the test firing test apparatus can grasp not only the final value of the current probability setting value but also whether or not the setting is being changed.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the first modification, the fixed value of the probability setting value is always displayed on the display of the test firing test apparatus, but when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the dot lights up and the dot lights up.
While the probability set value (provisional value) is switched from "1" to "6", the probability set value and the lighting of the dots are maintained. Then, when the new set value is confirmed, the confirmed value of the updated probability set value is displayed on the display of the test firing test apparatus, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the dots are turned off. It is the same as FIG. 90 except that the dots are turned on and off.

[Second modification of the seventh embodiment]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability set value changing process according to the second modification of the seventh embodiment. In the second modification, dot data (Dp) indicating that the setting is being changed
= 0 or 1) is also displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 so that the operator who changes the setting can visually determine whether or not the setting is being changed.

In FIG. 92, in comparison with FIG. 90, step A20001 is added between step A2406 and step A2407, and accordingly step A2409 is changed to step A2409a, step A2413 is changed to step 2413a, and step A2420 is changed to step A2420a. Has been changed to.

In step A2406 (= N), at least the setting key switch 93 is in the ON state. Therefore, in step A2001, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp = 1) corresponding to the work probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the probability set value (probable value) before the input of the set value change switch can be displayed on the probability set value display device 143 while the dot display unit is lit.

In step A2409a, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the probability set value display data and the dot data (Dp = 1) corresponding to the work probability set value in the probability set value display data area. As a result, the probability set value (provisional value) changed by the input of the set value change switch on the probability set value display device 143 can be displayed while the dot display unit is lit.

In step A2413a, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the probability set value display data and the dot data (Dp = 0) corresponding to the work probability set value in the probability set value display data area. As a result, the probability set value (fixed value) after the setting value change switch is input can be displayed on the probability set value display device 143 while the dot display unit is turned off.

In step A2420a, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the probability set value display data and the dot data (Dp = 0) corresponding to the work probability set value in the probability set value display data area. As a result, the dot display unit can be left off. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, until the probability setting value display permission flag is set in the subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A2405, A2502). The probability set value display data is not displayed on the probability set value display device 143 (step A1613 (= N)). On the other hand, the test signal output data continues to be transmitted to the test firing test apparatus (A1621, A1622, A1624).

FIG. 93 shows the probability set value display device 14 when the setting of the second modification of the seventh embodiment is changed.
It is a schematic diagram in the case where the lighting pattern data transmitted to 3 and the test firing test signal transmitted to the test firing test device are displayed on a 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot display unit) display.

In the initial state, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the probability setting value "1" is displayed as the test firing test signal (lighting pattern data) on the display of the test firing test device. Since the information displayed on the display of the test firing test apparatus is the same as that of the first modification described above, the following description will be omitted.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value display data and the dot data (1) corresponding to the working probability setting value are saved in the probability setting value display data area (step A2001). As a result, as shown in FIG. 93 (display by the output process according to FIG. 7), the probability setting value display device 143 displays "1" (provisional value) as the lighting pattern data, and the dot display unit lights up. ..

Next, when the set value change switch 102 is pressed, step A2407 in FIG. 92.
Since the determination result of is "Y", step A2408-step A2410 is executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, the probability set value display device 143 displays "2" (provisional value) after a predetermined lighting blank period (lighting period), and the dot display unit lights up.

When the set value change switch 102 is further pressed, step A240 in FIG. 92 is shown.
8. Step A2409a and step A2410 are repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, each time the setting value change switch 102 is pressed, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 is "3"->"4"->"5"->"6" (all are provisional values). And the dot display unit also lights up in conjunction with the display of the probability set value.

Then, when the touch switch is input (step A2411 (= Y)), step A
2412, step A2413a, and step A20002 are executed, and the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value "6" (determined value) is overwritten in the probability set value display data area. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, the display of the probability set value display device 143 is "6" (provisional value).
Is lit and the dot display unit is lit, then "6" (confirmed value) is lit and the dot display unit is extinguished. As a result, the operator can visually grasp that the probability setting value has been updated from "1" to "6".

Finally, by turning off the setting key switch 93, as shown in FIG. 92, the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp = 0) corresponding to the probability setting value (determined value) are set to the probability in step A2420a. It is saved in the value display data area. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, until the probability setting value display permission flag is set in the subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A2).
405, A2502), the probability set value display data is not displayed on the probability set value display device 143 (step A1613 (= N)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off. In addition, in FIG. 93, it is also possible to omit lighting the dot display portion of the display of the test firing test apparatus.

[Action / effect of the seventh embodiment]
As described above, the game machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment provides a game control means (game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition. In preparation, when the stop result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The game machine 10 has a setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing a setting value according to a setting related to the game, a display unit capable of displaying the set value (probability setting value display device 143), and a display unit. The first output unit (sixth output port 141) that outputs lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) and the second output unit (sixth output port 141) that is different from the first output unit (
A buffer 133, a test signal output port), and the like. Game control means (game microcomputer 1)
11) generates lighting pattern data (probability set value display data) based on the set value, and outputs the lighting pattern data (probability set value display data) to the display unit (probability set value display device 143) via the first output unit (sixth output port 141). , The lighting pattern data can be output to an external device (test firing test device) via the second output unit (buffer 133, test signal output port) as a test signal (test firing test signal) of the game machine.

Therefore, by setting the test signal (test firing test signal) output to the external device (test firing test device) to the same data as the lighting pattern, it is possible to ensure that the test signal is unprocessed and correct information, and the display of the game machine 10. Even when the set value is not displayed in the unit (probability set value display device 143), the probability set value can be notified to an external device provided outside the game machine 10. Further, if the unconfirmed setting information during the setting change is output to the first output unit (sixth output port 141) but not to the second output unit (buffer 133, test signal output port), it is unconfirmed. Setting information can be prevented from being output to the outside, and confusion due to unnecessary information can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143) is used for lighting pattern data (probability setting value display device 143).
It is possible to display the set value related to the probability set value display data) and additional information (dot data (Dp = 0 or 1)) different from the set value, and the setting changing means (setting changing device 42) changes the set value. Switch for shifting to the variable setting state (setting key switch 93)
The game control means is provided with additional information (dot data (Dp)) when the switch is on.
= 1)) is generated, and additional information can be output to an external device (test firing test device) together with the test signal.

Therefore, in the external device (test firing test device), the final value of the set value is displayed based on the lighting pattern data. Further, the external device can grasp the on / off state of the switch (setting key switch 93), that is, whether or not the setting is being changed, depending on the presence or absence of the additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)). In the present embodiment, for example, in an external device (test firing test device),
The dot data (Dp = 1) as additional information makes it possible to know that the dot display is lit and the setting is being changed, and the dot data (Dp = 0) turns off the dot display and the setting change is completed. You can figure out that.

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143) is used for lighting pattern data (probability setting value display device 143).
It is possible to display the set value related to the probability set value display data) and additional information (dot data (Dp = 0 or 1)) different from the set value, and the setting changing means (setting changing device 42) changes the set value. Switch for shifting to the variable setting state (setting key switch 93)
The game control means (game microcomputer 111) generates additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)) when the switch is on, and displays the additional information together with the lighting pattern data (probability setting value). Output to the display device 143).

Therefore, by displaying the additional information (dot data (Dp = 0 or 1)) on the display unit (depending on whether or not the dot display unit is lit), whether the operator who changes the setting is changing the setting or has completed the setting change. Can be visually judged.

[8th Embodiment]
FIG. 94A is a block diagram showing a configuration example (No. 1) of the game control system according to the eighth embodiment. The game control system according to the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, but is simplified and displayed in the minimum necessary configuration for explaining the effect of the invention. In the present embodiment, the game machine 10 is
It includes at least a game control device 100 (game control means) and a power supply device 400 (power supply means). The power supply device 400 is supplied with an external rated voltage (for example, AC24V from the game island) to generate a predetermined power supply voltage (for example, DC32V, DC12V, DC5V) to generate the game control device 1.
Output to 00.

The game control device 100 includes a probability setting value display device 143A (probability setting value display device 143).
And the driver 143a are attached. The probability set value display device 143A is a power supply device 4
It is driven by receiving electric power (for example, DC5V) from the normal power supply unit 410 constituting 00, and is connected to the sixth output port 141 via the driver 143a. Driver 14
Reference numeral 3a is to convert the information of the probability setting value output by the gaming microcomputer 111 into lighting pattern data and output the information. The probability set value display device 143A can display the probability set value by the lighting pattern data input from the driver 143a.

A probability setting value display device 143B is attached to the power supply device 400. The probability set value display device 143B is driven by receiving electric power (for example, DC5V) from the normal power supply unit 410 without going through the game control device 100, and is connected to the sixth output port 141 via the driver 143a. There is. Therefore, the probability setting value display device 143B also has the driver 143.
The probability set value can be displayed by the lighting pattern data input from a. By arranging the probability set value display device 143B in the power supply device 400 in this way, the probability set value can be easily confirmed. Further, since the probability setting value display device 143B is driven by receiving electric power (for example, DC5V) from the normal power supply unit 410 without going through the game control device 100, the game control device 100 supplies power to the probability setting value display device 143B. Since the wiring for performing the above can be omitted, the cost can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 94A (broken line), in the present embodiment, the set value change switch 102 can also be attached to the power supply device 400. As described above, the setting value change switch 102 is RA.
It can also be used as an M clear switch. Therefore, with such a configuration, it is possible to improve work efficiency when changing the setting using the setting value change switch 102 or clearing the RAM.

Since the display of the probability setting value and the control of turning on / off the dot display unit in the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B are the same as those in the seventh embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 94B is a block diagram showing a configuration example (No. 2) of the game control system according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94B, in the eighth embodiment, a DC / DC converter 143b (voltage conversion means) is attached to the game control device 100, and the output voltage thereof is displayed as a probability set value display device 143A.
It is also preferable to supply the probability set value display device 143B.

The arrangement of FIG. 94B is, for example, when the normal power supply unit 410 does not generate the drive voltage (for example, DC5V) of the probability set value display device 143A and the probability set value display device 143B, or even if the drive voltage is generated, due to insufficient capacity. This arrangement is suitable when the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B cannot be driven. At this time, the output voltage (for example, DC12V) of the normal power supply unit 410 is input to the input side of the DC / DC converter 143b, and the output side (for example, DC5V) is the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B.
Connected to.

Here, the wiring 143c that outputs the lighting pattern data from the driver 143a to the probability setting value display device 143B, and the probability setting value display device 143 from the DC / DC converter 143b.
In the wiring 143d for supplying the drive voltage to B, a harness is formed by a portion straddling between the game control device 100 and the power supply device 400, and is connected to the harness by a portion arranged in the game control device 100 and the power supply device 400. Each connector may be formed and the two connectors may be connected by the harness. As a result, wiring 143c and wiring 1
It is possible to reduce the case where any one of 43d is disconnected and prevent the malfunction of the probability set value display device 143B.

[Action / effect of the eighth embodiment]
As described above, the game machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and the variable display is described. When the stop result of the game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The game machine 10 can change the power supply means (power supply device 400) that generates a predetermined power supply voltage from the rated voltage supplied from the outside of the game machine and supplies it to the game control means, and the set value according to the setting related to the game. A setting changing means (setting changing device 42) is provided. The game control means (game control device 100) generates lighting pattern data (probability set value display data) related to the probability set value. The power supply means (power supply device 400) is a display unit (probability setting value display device 143B) that displays a probability setting value based on lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data).
To be equipped.

Therefore, by arranging the display unit (probability set value display device 143B) in the power supply means (power supply device 400), the set value can be easily confirmed, and the opportunity for confirming the set value can be increased. ..

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability set value display device 143B) receives a power supply voltage (power supply voltage (power supply device 400) of a predetermined voltage value from the power supply means (power supply device 400) without going through the game control means (game control device 100).
Drive voltage) is supplied. As a result, the wiring for supplying electric power from the game control means to the display unit can be omitted, so that the cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) is a power supply means (power supply device 4).
It is provided with a voltage conversion means (DC / DC converter 143b) that converts the voltage supplied from 00) and supplies it to the display unit (probability set value display device 143B).

Therefore, when the power supply means (power supply device 400) does not generate the drive voltage (for example, DC5V) of the display unit (probability set value display device 143B), or even if the drive voltage is generated, the drive of the display unit is covered due to insufficient capacity. Voltage conversion means (DC / DC converter 143b)
Can reliably supply the power supply voltage to the probability set value display device 143B.

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143B) can display the set value related to the lighting pattern data and additional information (dot data (Dp = 0 or 1)) different from the set value, and the setting can be changed. The means (setting change device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a variable setting state in which the set value can be changed, and the game control means (game control device 100) is a switch (setting key). When the switch 93) is in the ON state, additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)) is generated, and additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)) is output to the display unit together with the lighting pattern data.

Therefore, by displaying the additional information (dot data (Dp = 0 or 1)) on the display unit (depending on whether or not the dot display unit is lit), whether the operator who changes the setting is changing the setting or has completed the setting change. Can be visually determined by the display content of the display unit arranged in the power supply means (power supply device 400).

[9th Embodiment]
A ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 100. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eighth embodiments. The ninth embodiment relates to the output of external information when the setting is changed.

[Timing chart of external information output when changing settings]
First, with reference to FIG. 95, the timing of external information output when the setting is changed according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of external information output when the setting is changed according to the ninth embodiment.

After the power of the game machine 10 is turned off at time u1, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) of the setting changing device 42 (setting changing means) is turned on (first mode) at time u2, and then the time u
At 3, the power of the game machine 10 is turned on.

When the power of the game machine 10 is turned on at time u3, the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag because the setting key switch 93 is turned on (A1).
038), the probability set value display permission flag is set (A2405), and the set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 143 (setting display device) that has been turned off (set value display, A1615).
..

In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the accessory ratio display unit 68 (FIG. 78) of the status display device 152 for displaying the accessory ratio is used as the probability set value display device 143. That is, during the setting change or setting confirmation, the probability is set to any one of the four 7-segment type (8-segment type including the point portion) display 900 of the accessory ratio display unit 68 (FIG. 78). The set value may be displayed. The accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display unit 68 except when the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. Therefore, the accessory ratio display unit 68 is used together with the display of the accessory ratio and the display of the set value. Further, the present invention is not limited to the one in which the accessory ratio display unit 68 of the state display device 152 is used as the probability set value display device 143, and the contents related to the external information output described in the ninth embodiment are described in other embodiments (particularly, the first ~ 8 Embodiment), the probability set value display device 143 is changed to the state display device 15.
It may be applied even when it is provided independently of 2.

Then, the game machine state shifts from the game mode to the setting change mode (setting variable state) by setting the probability setting value changing flag. The game mode indicates the state of the game machine other than the setting change mode (setting variable state) and the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state, setting value confirmation mode) described later.

Further, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on at time u3, the game control device 100 executes the external information editing process (A1317, FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B) by the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6). Then, as described above in the explanation of the external information editing process, the setting change mode (setting variable state).
Therefore, the game control device 100 sets the initial value of the security signal control timer (A1037) and outputs external information (predetermined signal) including the security signal to the external device (external information output on, A1611). ). The external device (various external devices) is a device provided outside the game machine 10, and is, for example, an information collecting terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer). In the present embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the on operation of the setting key switch 93 (A1037). The predetermined time set as the initial value of the security signal control timer may be an extremely long time (24 hours, etc.) as shown in the external information output of FIG. 95, for example. In this way, the game control device 100 can output a predetermined signal as external information by including information related to the setting (for example, information indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later has been entered) in the external device. Functions as an external signal output means.

When the setting value changing switch 102 (setting switch, setting value changing button) of the setting changing device 42 (setting changing means) is operated (pressed) by the operator, the setting 1 is changed to the setting 2 at the time u4, and the time u5 Then, the setting 2 is changed to the setting 3, and at the time u6, the setting is changed from the setting 3 to the setting 4. In this way, each time the setting value change switch 102 is operated, the setting value (setting) is changed by +1. After the setting 6, the setting value change switch 102 is operated to change to the setting 1. Specifically, every time the setting value change switch 102 is operated, the setting value 1 → the setting value 2 →
The set value (setting) is changed as follows: setting value 3 → setting value 4 → setting value 5 → setting value 6 → setting value 1 → setting value 2 → ...

After that, when the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is turned on at time u7, the probability set value changed flag is set (A2414), and the probability set value is changed (A).
The result of 2406 is "Y", the setting is confirmed). At that time, in the present embodiment, in order to include the information that the setting is confirmed in the setting change mode in the security signal and output it as external information (predetermined signal), the game control device 100 outputs the predetermined signal. Turn off once. That is, even when an extremely long predetermined time is set in the initial value of the security signal control timer at time u3, the output of the predetermined signal (external information output) is temporarily interrupted.

Then, when the output of a predetermined signal (external information output) is interrupted at time u8, the game control device 100 outputs a new predetermined signal (external information output) for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, By turning it on, for example, 256 msec), the security signal includes information that the setting has been confirmed in the setting change mode, and then the output of the new predetermined signal is turned off. After that, the game control device 100 ends the interruption of the external information output and turns on the external information output again. The interruption time is before the time for turning on the output of a new predetermined signal for a predetermined time (a predetermined pulse width, for example, 256 msec) and the time for turning on the output of the new predetermined signal when interrupted. Time to turn off external information output (for example, 256 msec)
And later, the time for turning off the output of the new predetermined signal (for example, 256 msec) and the combined time (for example, 768 msec) are set.

After that, at time u9, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off (second mode), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2417), so that the security signal control is performed together with the probability setting value changing flag. The timer is forcibly cleared regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed, the external information output is turned off, the game machine state changes from the setting change mode to the game mode, and the setting change ends. Further, when the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2417), the probability setting value display permission flag is also cleared, and the probability setting value display device 143 (in this embodiment, the status display device) in which the set value is displayed is also cleared. The accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display unit 68 of 152 (also used by the accessory ratio display unit 68) (accessory ratio display). The probability set value display device 143
The state display device 152, which is also used as the player, may display information on the ball ejection rate, the number of ejected balls, and the base value (the ball ejection rate in the normal gaming state) instead of displaying the information on the accessory ratio (the ball ejection rate in the normal game state). Ball output rate display, ejected ball number display, base value display).

[Modification example of timing chart for external information output when changing settings]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a modified example of the timing of the output (external information output) of a predetermined signal when the setting of FIG. 95 is changed will be described. FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the timing of external information output when the setting is changed according to the ninth embodiment. In FIG. 96, only the timing of the external information output of FIG. 95 will be extracted and described.

First, FIG. 96A is a timing chart showing the timing of output (external information output) of a predetermined signal when the setting of FIG. 95 is changed.

As described above, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on while the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at the time u3, the game control device 100 outputs an external information (security signal). turn on.

Then, when the setting is confirmed at time u7 (setting confirmation), the game control device 100 temporarily suspends the external information output, and includes the information that the setting is confirmed in the setting change mode at time u8 in the security signal to the outside. After turning on the external information output for a predetermined time (a predetermined pulse width, for example, 256 msec) in order to output as information (a predetermined signal), the external information output is turned off.

Then, after the interruption time (for example, 768 msec) elapses from the time u7, the game control device 1
In 00, after turning on the external information output again, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off at time u9 to turn off the external information output and change the game machine state from the setting change mode to the game mode. Migrate to.

Next, a first modification of the timing of the output of a predetermined signal (external information output) when the setting is changed will be described with reference to FIG. 96 (b).

At time u3, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on while the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output as in FIG. 96A.

Then, as the setting is confirmed at the time u7, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output.

After that, at time u8, the game control device 100 includes the information that the setting is confirmed in the setting change mode in the security signal and outputs the external information as external information (predetermined signal) for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse). After turning on the width, eg 256 msec)
Turn off the external information output. After that, the external information output is kept off, and the time u9
The setting key switch 93 is turned off. As described above, in the first modification, when the setting of the time t7 is confirmed, the external information output is terminated instead of being temporarily interrupted, and then the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time at the time t8.

Subsequently, a second modification of the timing of the output of a predetermined signal (external information output) when the setting is changed will be described with reference to FIG. 96 (c).

At time u3, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on with the setting key switch 93 turned on, the external information output is maintained in the off state in the second modification.

Then, when the setting is confirmed at the time u7, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec). After that, the external information output is maintained in the off state again, and the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u9. As described above, in the second modification, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time when the setting of the time t7 is confirmed, and is maintained in the off state except when the setting is confirmed.

Further, with reference to FIG. 96 (d), a third modification example of the timing of external information output when the setting is changed will be described.

At time u3, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on while the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the game control device 100 outputs external information as in FIGS. 96A and 96B. turn on.

After that, when the setting is confirmed at the time u7, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output. As described above, in the third modification, the on state of the external information output is maintained from the time when the power is turned on at time t3 to the time when the setting at time t7 is confirmed, and the state is turned off after the setting is confirmed.

[Timing chart of external information output when checking settings]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the timing of output (external information output) of a predetermined signal at the time of finalizing the setting according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of external information output when the setting is confirmed according to the ninth embodiment.

After the power of the game machine 10 is turned off at the time u10, the power of the game machine 10 is turned on at the time u11. Then, the probability set value display device 143 (the accessory ratio display unit 6 of the state display device 152)
8 is also used), since the game state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on at time u11 is the game mode, the bonus ratio is displayed (feature ratio display).

After that, when the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on while the power of the game machine 10 is turned on at time u12, the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag and sets the flag (A2505). , The probability set value display permission flag is set (A2506), and the set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 143 (setting display device) on which the accessory ratio is displayed (set value display, A1615).

Then, the game machine state shifts from the game mode to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) by setting the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode.

Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on at the time u12, the game control device 100 is set.
External information editing processing (A1317, FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B) by timer interrupt processing (FIG. 6)
Is running. Then, since the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is set as described above in the explanation of the external information editing process, the initial value of the security signal control timer is set (A25).
07), the external information (predetermined signal) including the security signal is output to the external device (external information output on, A1611). In the present embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the on operation of the setting key switch 93 (A2507). The predetermined time set as the initial value of the security signal control timer may be an extremely long time (24 hours, etc.) as shown in the external information output of FIG. 97, for example.

After that, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u13, the security signal control timer is forcibly cleared together with the probability setting value confirmation mode flag regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (A2510). The external information output is turned off, the game machine status changes from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode, and the setting confirmation ends. At the same time, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511), and the accessory ratio is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) on which the set value is displayed (accessory ratio display). ). In addition, the display is not limited to the accessory ratio display, and may be used as a ball ejection rate display, a discharge ball number display, or a base value display.

[Modification example of timing chart for external information output when checking settings]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a modified example of the timing of the output (external information output) of a predetermined signal at the time of confirming the setting of FIG. 97 will be described. FIG. 98 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the timing of external information output at the time of setting confirmation according to the ninth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 98, only the timing of the external information output of FIG. 97 is extracted and described.

First, FIG. 98A is a timing chart showing the timing of external information output when the setting of FIG. 97 is finalized.

As described above, after the power is turned on at time u11, the setting key switch 93 is set at time u12.
When the (setting key) is turned on, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output (security signal).

Then, when the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off at the time u13, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output and shifts the game machine state from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98 (b), a modified example of the timing of external information output at the time of setting confirmation will be described.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned on at time u12 after the power is turned on at time u11, the game control device 100 includes the information that the setting confirmation mode has been entered in the security signal and external information (predetermined signal). ) To output the external information for a predetermined time (for example, 2).
56msec) After turning it on, turn off the external information output. After that, the external information output is maintained in the off state, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u13, the game control device includes the information that the setting confirmation mode has ended and the game mode has been entered in the security signal. To output as external information (predetermined signal), the external information output is output for a predetermined time (for example, 25).
6msec) After turning it on again, turn off the external information output. In this way, in the modified example of the timing of external information output at the time of setting confirmation, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time, and the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off. The external information output is kept off except when it is done.

[Timing chart of external information output when changing the settings of the modified example]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the timing of output (external information output) of a predetermined signal at the time of setting change according to the modified example of the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of external information output when the setting is changed according to the modified example of the ninth embodiment. In the following description of FIGS. 99 and 100, the description overlapping with FIG. 95 will be omitted as appropriate.

In this modification, a RAM initialization switch is independently provided in addition to the setting value change switch 102. Then, when the power is turned on (power restoration), if the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are on, the setting change mode (setting variable state) is set. Specifically, after turning on the setting key switch 93, while turning on (pressing) the RAM initialization switch, the game machine 1
When the power of 0 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode (setting variable state).

After the power of the game machine 10 is turned off at the time w1, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at the time w2. Then, the RWM clear switch is pressed at time w3, and the power of the game machine 10 is turned on at time w4 while maintaining the pressed state.
The probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), and the mode shifts to the setting change mode according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. When the mode shifts to the setting change mode according to the modification of the ninth embodiment, the set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 143 (setting display device) that was in the off state (set value display, A1615). After that, the pressed state of the RWM clear switch is released at time w5, and the set value (setting) is changed each time the set value change switch 102 (setting switch) is operated at times w6, w7, and w8.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time w9, the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), and the probability setting value is changed (the result of A2406 is "Y", the setting is confirmed). As described above, in this modification, the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 instead of the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24.

In addition, RA to be cleared by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time w9.
The M region is also cleared to 0 (A2417). Therefore, the security signal control timer is cleared together with the probability setting value changing flag, the external information output is turned off, the game machine state changes from the setting change mode to the game mode, and the setting change ends. When the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2417), the probability setting value display permission flag is also cleared, and the accessory ratio is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) on which the set value is displayed. (Display of accessory ratio).

After that, at time w10, the game control device 100 includes the information that the setting is confirmed in the setting change mode in the security signal and outputs the external information as external information (predetermined signal) for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse). After turning on the width, eg 256 msec), turn off the external information output. As described above, in the timing of external information output when the setting is changed according to this modification, the external information output is terminated when the setting of the time w9 is confirmed, and then the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time at the time w10.

Subsequently, FIG. 100 is another example in which the timing of the output of a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change according to the modified example of the ninth embodiment is changed. In FIG. 100, only the timing of the external information output of FIG. 99 will be extracted and described.

FIG. 100A is a timing chart showing the timing of output (external information output) of a predetermined signal when the setting of FIG. 99 is changed.

As described above, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at the time w4, the game control device 100 receives external information. Turn on the output.

Then, when the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 at the time w9 (setting confirmation), the game control device 100 turns off the external information output (security signal).

After that, at time w10, the game control device 100 includes the information that the setting is confirmed in the setting change mode in the security signal and outputs the external information as external information (predetermined signal) for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse). After turning on the width, eg 256 msec), turn off the external information output. After that, the external information output is maintained in the off state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100 (b), a first modification in which the timing of output (external information output) of a predetermined signal at the time of setting change according to the modification is changed will be described.

At time w4, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 is turned on, in the first modification, the external information output is turned off. Be maintained.

Then, when the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 at the time w9, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec). After that, the external information output is kept off again. As described above, in the first modification, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time when the setting of the time w9 is confirmed, and is maintained in the off state except when the setting is confirmed.

Further, with reference to FIG. 100 (c), a second modification in which the timing of the output of a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change according to the modification is changed will be described.

At time w4, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the game control device 100 sees FIG.
As with 0 (a), turn on the external information output.

After that, when the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 at the time w9, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output. As described above, in the second modification, the on state of the external information output is maintained from the time when the power is turned on at the time w4 to the time when the setting of the time w9 is confirmed, and the state is turned off after the setting is confirmed.

[Action / effect of the ninth embodiment]
In the game machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special symbol variable display game) for variablely displaying the identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C) is a special result ( It is possible to generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player when a big hit result mode, a big hit stop symbol, a special result mode) is obtained. The game machine 10 has a setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing settings (setting value, probability setting value) related to game conditions, and an external device (for example, an information collecting terminal or a game) provided outside the game machine 10. Field internal management device (hall computer)
) Is provided with an external signal output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting a predetermined signal as external information. The setting changing means includes a setting shifting means (setting key switch 93, setting key) capable of shifting to a setting variable state (setting changing mode) in which the setting can be changed by being turned on. The external signal output means outputs a predetermined signal (external signal output (for example, output of a security signal)) in response to the shift to the variable setting state by the setting transition means.

According to such a game machine 10, when the setting is changed to the variable state (setting change mode), the information related to the setting (for example, the setting change mode) is changed from the external signal output means (game control device 100) to the external device. Since the information indicating that is output as external information (predetermined signal), it is possible to notify the game hall manager through an external device. As a result, the game hall manager can use the game machine 10 at a timing not intended by the game hall manager (for example, fraud or machine trouble).
When the user shifts to the setting change mode, he / she can quickly notice the shift.

Further, in the game machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the setting changing means (setting changing device 42) can be changed by being operated while shifting to the setting variable state (setting changing mode). It is provided with operating means (setting value changing switch 102, setting switch, setting value changing button). In the external signal output means (game control device 100), after the setting (setting value, probability setting value) is changed by the changing operation means, the setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key) is changed to the second mode (off). A predetermined signal is output (external signal output) in response to the above. Therefore, according to such a game machine 10, when the setting is changed, the game field manager can be notified through an external device, so that the game field manager can set the game machine 10 at an unintended timing. You can quickly notice the change.

Further, in the game machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the external signal output means (game control device 100).
) Starts the output of a predetermined signal (external signal output) in response to the transition to the variable setting state (setting change mode) by the setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key), and the setting transition means. Is turned off, and the output of a predetermined signal (external signal output) is terminated. According to such a game machine 10, the on state of the output of a predetermined signal (external signal output) is maintained while the setting is in the variable state, and the game hall manager is continuously notified through the external device. Therefore, the game hall manager can quickly notice that the game machine 10 has shifted to the variable setting state at an unintended timing. In addition, when the game hall manager intentionally changes the setting, the external device can keep a history (log) of how long the work time related to the setting change is, which improves the efficiency of the work time. It can be used as statistical information for planning.

Further, in the game machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the external signal output means (game control device 100).
Corresponds to the fact that the setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key) is set to the second mode (off), and after finishing the output of the predetermined signal (external signal output), the predetermined pulse width ( For example, a signal of 256 msec) is output. According to such a game machine 10, an external signal output is output with a predetermined pulse width not only while the setting is in the variable state but also when the setting transition means is set to the second mode and the setting is confirmed. Therefore, the game hall manager can quickly notice that the setting is confirmed after the game machine 10 shifts to the setting variable state at an unintended timing.

In addition, in the game machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, it is set by being turned on in the first mode (for example, after the power is turned on) under a condition different from the condition for shifting to the variable setting state (setting change mode). It is provided with a setting confirmation means (setting key switch 93, setting key) capable of shifting to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the above can be confirmed. The external signal output means (game control device 100) outputs a predetermined signal (external signal output) while the setting confirmation means shifts to the setting confirmation state. According to such a game machine 10, the game field manager can be notified through an external device not only when the setting is changed to the setting confirmation state but also when the setting is confirmed. , It is possible to quickly notice that Yuki 10 has moved to the setting confirmation state at an unintended timing. Although the setting key switch 93 (setting key) also functions as a setting confirmation means together with the setting transfer means, the setting key switch 9 as the setting transfer means
A switch different from 3 may be provided as a setting confirmation means.

[10th Embodiment]
The tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to ninth embodiments. 10th
The embodiment relates to a display mode of a probability set value.

[Display of batch display device]
FIG. 101 shows a stop symbol number (A4004, A4013, A4016, A7510), a lighting pattern of the first special figure variation display unit 51 of the batch display device 50 corresponding to the stop symbol number, a lighting pattern of a probability set value, and a lighting pattern. It is a figure exemplifying. The lighting pattern corresponds to the stop symbol pattern (A4006, A4014, A4017).

First, FIG. 101A shows a stop symbol number and a first special figure variation display unit 51 (7-segment type (or 8 segments)) for a special figure 1 variation display game of the batch display device 50 corresponding to the stop symbol number. It is a figure which illustrates the lighting pattern of the LED lamp D1 (FIG. 34A, etc.) of the type).

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game), the game control device 100
After the identification information (special symbol, special figure) is variablely displayed on the special figure 1 display unit 51, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. As the predetermined result mode after the identification information is variablely displayed, for example, the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number (0 to 50) of the predetermined result mode is selected from the lighting patterns shown in FIG. 101 (a).

Next, FIG. 101B is a diagram illustrating a lighting pattern of the probability set value.

The identification information in FIG. 101 (a) is displayed in a variable manner in response to the setting key switch 93 (setting key) being turned on and the setting value being changed (setting change mode, setting variable mode). The lighting pattern showing the predetermined result mode later is switched to the lighting pattern of the probability set value shown in FIG. 101 (b).

The display of each display unit of the batch display device 50 during the probability setting change (in the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed) according to the present embodiment, that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamp D1-) of the batch display device 50.
The light emitting mode (lighting / extinguishing mode) of D18) is the first described with reference to FIGS. 34A and 35.
It can be carried out in the same manner as in the embodiment. Specifically, the first special figure variation display unit 51 is based on the probability set value display data (A2409) corresponding to the work probability set value and the probability set value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability set value. , The numbers 1 to 6 indicating the working probability set value and the probability set value are lit or blinked (output processing A1603-A1608).
..

In this way, while the probability setting is being changed, the game machine 10 cannot play a game (for example, a variable display game) by displaying a different display (display different from the normal display) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 when the fluctuation is stopped. Can be clearly indicated on the front of the game machine 10. It should be noted that the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability set values are not used in the stop display (lighting pattern of FIG. 101 (a)) when the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 is stopped. As a result, the display mode of the probability set value and
Special Figure 1 It is possible to easily distinguish the display mode related to the game, such as the result mode of the variable display game.

Subsequently, FIG. 101 (c) is a diagram illustrating another lighting pattern of the probability set value. 1st
As shown in FIG. 101 (c), the special figure variation display unit 51 is lit and displayed with numbers 1 to 6 indicating a work probability set value or a probability set value by lighting a decimal point (dot display unit Dp). It may be displayed blinking. In this way, the game machine 10 sets the probability by lighting the decimal point (Dp) when the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the work probability setting value and the probability setting value are lit or blinking. It can be suggested in front of the game machine 10 that the change is in progress.

The stop symbol number shown in FIG. 101 (a) is attached to the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 (7-segment type (or 8-segment type) LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the batch display device 50. And the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number may be displayed as a predetermined result mode after the identification information is variablely displayed in the special figure 2 variable display game. Further, the probability set values shown in FIGS. 101 (b) and 101 (c) may be lit or blinked on the second special figure variation display unit 52. Here, even in the stop display (lighting pattern of FIG. 101 (a)) when the fluctuation of the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 is stopped, the numbers 1 to indicate the probability set value are the same as those of the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51. 6 shall not be used.

Further, each time the set value change switch 102 (setting switch, set value change button) is pressed and the probability set value is changed, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display of the batch display device 50 are displayed. The probability setting value may be alternately switched and displayed on the unit 52. In this way, by alternately switching and displaying the probability set value on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52, the set value change switch 102 is pressed to change the probability set value. It is possible to make it easier to recognize what has been done.

Further, as the lighting pattern of the probability set value, a lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number illustrated in FIG. 101 (a) is displayed, but the stop symbol of the stopped symbol number illustrated is stopped. A pattern different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the symbol number may be displayed. That is, the lighting pattern of the probability set value may overlap with the lighting pattern of the jackpot symbol, but the probability that the lighting pattern of the jackpot symbol is displayed is low, and it is rarely displayed. Further, in the case of a big hit, the player is considered to continue the game until the special game state ends, so the probability that the lighting pattern of the big hit symbol is displayed when the setting is changed is extremely small. Therefore, even if a lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number of the misaligned symbol is displayed as the probability setting value, the game machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability setting in front of the game machine 10. Can be suggested.

In addition, while the probability setting value is being changed and the probability setting value is displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 of the batch display device 50, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 And all the light emitting units (LED lamps D3-D18) of the batch display device 50 other than the second special figure variation display unit 52 may be made to blink. In this way, the game machine 10 can also be displayed by blinking all the light emitting units of the batch display device 50 other than the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 in a mode different from the usual one. It can be suggested in front of the game machine 10 that the probability setting is being changed.

[Display of status display device]
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing details of a state display device 152 that displays information regarding the payout rate. The status display device 152 is a display device 900 of four 7-segment type (8-segment type including the point portion) arranged side by side, and shows digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3 from the right. It is a 4-digit 7-segment type display. The status display device 152 relates to the total ball ejection rate (for example, "bL.35" shown in FIG. 102) from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present, and the number of ejected balls of the latest predetermined number (for example, 60,000 shots). The ball ejection rate (for example, "b6.36") can be switched and displayed. The state display device 152 may display not only the ball ejection rate but also the base value and the accessory ratio. Further, in the present embodiment, the state display device 152 is the probability set value display device 1.
It is also used as 43, and the probability setting value can be displayed.

Subsequently, FIG. 103 is a diagram showing details of the state display device 152 that displays a number indicating the probability set value.

FIG. 103A is an example of the state display device 152 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating a probability setting value is displayed in the leftmost digit 3. The digit 3 is a digit in which a character other than a number (for example, “b”) is displayed in the ball ejection rate display shown in FIG. 102. Therefore, by displaying the probability set value in the digit 3, the numerical portion and the probability set value in the display other than the probability set value, that is, the display related to the game (for example, the ball output rate display) are not covered. Further, unlike the ball ejection rate display shown in FIG. 102, the digits other than the digit 3 displaying the probability set value are turned off. As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish between the display mode of the probability set value and other display modes such as the ball output rate display.

FIG. 103 (b) is an example of a state display device 152 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating a probability set value is displayed in a digit 2. Similar to FIG. 103 (a), the digits other than the digit 2 displaying the probability set value are turned off. Therefore, according to such a display mode, it is possible to easily recognize that the probability set value is displayed.

FIG. 103 (c) shows a state display device 1 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating a probability set value is displayed in digit 1.
It is an example of 52, and FIG. 103 (d) is an example of a state display device 152 in which a number indicating a probability setting value is displayed in digit 0. Digits other than digit 1 or digit 0 that display the probability set value are turned off.
Therefore, according to these display modes, it is possible to obtain the same effect as in the example of FIG. 103 (b) in which the digits other than the digit 2 are turned off, and it is easy to recognize that the probability set value is displayed. it can.

FIG. 103 (e) is an example of the state display device 152 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating a probability setting value is displayed in all digits 0 to 3. In this way, by arranging the same numbers indicating the probability set values in all the digits of the state display device 152, the display mode is different from the display related to other games. Therefore, the display mode of the probability set value and the ball output rate It is possible to easily distinguish the display mode from other game-related display modes such as display.

The probability setting value displayed on the status display device 152 is changing the probability setting (setting change mode).
When it is the probability setting value for work in the above, it is preferable to display it blinking, and when it is the probability setting value for displaying the confirmed setting, it is preferable to display it lit.

Further, when displaying the working probability setting value (probability setting value) in the setting change mode, each time the setting value change switch 102 (setting switch, setting value change button) is pressed and the probability setting value is changed, The digits of the probability set value displayed on the status display device 152 may be shifted one by one. Specifically, for example, when the probability setting value is displayed as 3 in the digit 3, the probability setting value is displayed as 4 in the digit 2 by pressing the setting value change switch 102, and the setting value change switch 102 is displayed. By pressing it again, the probability setting value can be displayed as 5 in digit 1. Further, when the set value change switch 102 is pressed at the digit 0, the probability set value can be displayed on the digit 3. The mode of shifting the digits of the probability set value displayed on the status display device 152 one by one is not limited to the mode of shifting from left to right, and may be a mode of shifting from right to left.

[Modified example of the tenth embodiment]
Further, in the tenth embodiment, the display device (collective display device 50 or status display device 152) also functions as a probability set value display device 143, and displays a game (for example, as a display result after variable display of identification information). It was possible to display a predetermined result mode, a ball output rate, a base value, a bonus ratio) and a set value (probability set value) related to the game condition. However, the display device (batch display device 50 or status display device 152) is not limited to the mode in which the display device (batch display device 50 or status display device 152) is also used as the probability set value display device 143, and the display device (batch display device 50 or status) is similar to the first embodiment. A probability set value display device 143 may be provided on the game machine 10 as an independent second display device different from the display device 152 (first display device). Further, when displaying on one display device, the display on the other display device may be turned off. Specifically, for example, when the probability set value is displayed on the second display device (probability set value display device 143), the first display device (batch display device 50) is displayed.
, The display related to the game of the status display device 152) can be hidden.

[Action / effect of the tenth embodiment]
In the game machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special symbol variable display game) for variablely displaying the identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C) is a special result ( A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state that gives a game value to a player when a big hit result mode, a big hit stop symbol, and a special result mode are obtained is provided. The game machine 10 is a display device (collective display device 50, state) capable of displaying a display related to the game (for example, a predetermined result mode, a ball output rate, a base, and a bonus ratio as a display result after variable display of identification information). A display device 152) and a setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing a setting value (probability setting value) related to a game condition are provided. The control means displays the set value on the display device in a mode different from the display related to the game in response to the setting value being changed by the setting changing means (setting change mode, setting variable state). ..

According to such a game machine 10, the probability setting value is different from the display related to the game such as a predetermined result mode after the identification information is variablely displayed in the variable display game, the ball output rate, the base, and the accessory ratio. Will be displayed on the display device (collective display device 50, status display device 152). Therefore, it is possible to easily distinguish between the display mode of the probability set value and the display related to the game.

In the game machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100) is a variable display game (for example, a predetermined result mode after variable display of the identification information) related to the game.
The display result of the special figure variation display game) is displayed on the display device (batch display device 50), and the set value (probability setting value) can be changed by the setting change means (setting change device 42) (setting change mode, setting). The display of the display device is switched from the display related to the game to the set value in response to the setting (variable state). According to such a game machine 10, when the set value is switched to a state in which the set value can be changed, the set value is displayed on the display device in a mode different from the display related to the game. It can be clearly shown on the front of the game machine 10 that the game (for example, a variable display game) is not possible.

The display mode of the display device (batch display device 50 or status display device 152) is not limited to the probability setting change, but also during the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) as described above. The display mode may be different from the display related to.

In the game machine 10 according to the modified example of the tenth embodiment, a display related to the game (for example, a predetermined result mode as a display result after variable display of the identification information, a ball output rate, a base value, a bonus ratio) is displayed. A possible first display device (batch display device 50, status display device 152), a setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing a setting value (probability setting value) related to a game condition, and a setting value can be displayed. A second display device (probability set value display device 143) is provided. The control means (game control device 100) corresponds to the state in which the set value can be changed by the setting change means (setting change mode, setting variable state), and the set value is different from the display related to the game. Is displayed on the second display device. According to such a game machine 10, since the display related to the game and the display related to the game condition are displayed on different display devices, the display related to the game and the display related to the game condition can be easily distinguished. ..

Further, in the game machine 10 according to the modified example of the tenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100).
) Shows the display related to the game (for example, a predetermined result mode as a display result after variable display of the identification information, the ball output rate, the base value, and the accessory ratio) in the first display device (collective display device 50, status display). Displayed on the device 152), the first display corresponds to the state in which the set value (probability setting value) can be changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) by the setting changing means (setting changing device 42). The display related to the game of the device is hidden, and the set value is displayed on the second display device (probability set value display device 143). According to such a game machine 10, when the set value is displayed on the second display device, the display related to the game of the first display device is hidden, so that the game machine 10 is playing a game (for example, a variable display game). ) Cannot be easily identified.

[11th Embodiment]
The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 108. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to tenth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to tenth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The eleventh embodiment relates to a small hit or the like.

[Big hit probability and small hit probability]
In FIGS. 104A and 104B, the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as a result of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22) and the small hit determination process (FIG. 23) are set to each setting (each set value). On the other hand, it is a table illustrated.

In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the small hit occurs as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game and does not occur as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game (small in the special figure 1 variable display game). The hit probability is 0 for each setting). In the first embodiment, a small hit occurs only as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game (in the special figure 2 variable display game, the small hit probability is 0 in each setting.
Is).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 104C and 104D, the control contents of the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process are interchanged from the first embodiment. That is, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (FIG. 104C) of the present embodiment is the jackpot flag 2 setting process (FIG. 2) of the first embodiment.
Corresponding to the replacement of "big hit flag 2" and "special figure 2" from 1) with "big hit flag 1" and "special figure 1", respectively, step A17001-A17006 in FIG. 104C corresponds to step A3701-A3706 in FIG. Corresponds to. In addition, the jackpot flag 2 setting process of this embodiment (
FIG. 104D) corresponds to the case where the “big hit flag 1” and “special figure 1” are replaced with “big hit flag 2” and “special figure 2” from the jackpot flag 1 setting process (FIG. 20) of the first embodiment, respectively. Then, step A18001-A18010 in FIG. 104D is step A3601-A36 in FIG.
Corresponds to 10.

In the table of pattern I in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability, which is the probability that a small hit will occur, is
It increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. Similarly, the jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot occurring, also increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. That is, as the set value increases, the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, and the big hit state (first special game state) and the small hit state (second special game state) are likely to occur, and the special variable winning device 39 The number of balls won by winning the (large winning opening) increases, which is advantageous for the player.

In setting 1 of pattern I, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is 0 (0%), and no small hit occurs. However, in setting 6, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is about 1.
Close to (100%). Therefore, in the setting 6 of the pattern I, in the normal electric support state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the execution frequency of the special figure 2 variable display game increases, a small hit occurs almost every time the special figure 2 variable display game is played. It becomes a state called "small hit RUSH" (small hit rush). In setting 6, since the total of the big hit probability and the small hit probability at the high probability is 100%, either the big hit or the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game at the high probability (missing). Not).

In the normal electric support state, the execution frequency of the special figure 2 variable display game is increased by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state of the normal variable winning device 37 and lengthening the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state. .. Further, since the normal drawing start gate 34 is located on the right side of the game area 32, in the normal electric support state, right-handed is more advantageous and the player should right-handed.

In the settings 4 and 5 of the pattern I, the small hit probabilities are 1/4 and 1/2, respectively, and in the normal power support state (time saving state, probability change state), "1/4 small hit RUSH" and "1/2". It becomes a state called "small hit RUSH". "1/4 small hit RUSH" and "1/2 small hit RUSH"
In ", the number of acquired balls of about 1/4 and 1/2 of" small hit RUSH "is obtained.

In the setting 2 of the pattern I, the small hit probability is about the same as the hit probability of a general general map variation display game, and the number of balls acquired by the small hit is almost nonexistent. In the setting 3 of the pattern I, the small hit probability is about the same as the big hit probability at the time of high probability, and the number of balls acquired by the small hit exists to the extent that the player can be aware of it.

In the present embodiment, regardless of the set value, the ratio of the jackpot probability at the high probability to the jackpot probability at the low probability is a constant value (10 times in this case), and the probability can be easily controlled. There is.

In the table of pattern II of FIG. 104A, contrary to pattern I, the small hit probability increases in the order of setting 6 <setting 5 <setting 4 <setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1. The jackpot probability of pattern II increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6 as in pattern I. That is, in pattern II, as the set value increases, the jackpot probability increases but the small hit probability decreases, and the difference in the number of acquired balls (setting difference) due to the setting is smaller than that of pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the table of pattern III of FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is set 4 <setting 5 <setting 6
It increases in the order of <setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3. The jackpot probability of pattern III increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6 as in pattern I. Even in pattern III, the difference in the number of acquired balls (setting difference) due to the setting is smaller than that in pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the pattern IV table of FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is set 3 <setting 2 <setting 1 <.
It increases in the order of setting 6 <setting 5 <setting 4. The jackpot probability of pattern IV increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6 as in pattern I. Even in pattern IV, the difference in the number of acquired balls (setting difference) due to the setting is smaller than that in pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the pattern V table of FIG. 104A, the small hit probability increases in the order of setting 6 <setting 5 <setting 4 <setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1. The jackpot probability of pattern V is the same in setting 1 and setting 4, is the same in setting 2 and setting 5, and is the same in setting 3 and setting 6. In pattern V, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting (set value) from the jackpot probability. For this reason, the player
In an attempt to estimate the set value from the occurrence of small hits, we will focus on the occurrence of small hits.

In the pattern VI table of FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is 0% at settings 1, 2, 4, and 5.
It is close to 100% at settings 3 and 6. In settings 3 and 6, the total of the big hit probability and the small hit probability at the time of high probability is 100%, so that either the big hit or the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game at the time of high probability. (There is no deviation). The jackpot probability of the pattern VI is the same for setting 1 and 4, the same for setting 2 and 5, and the same for setting 3 and 6.
In the pattern VI, it becomes easy to estimate a specific setting (setting 3 and setting 6) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability.

As another pattern, the jackpot probability at the low probability of settings 1 to 3 is set to the probability of the normal spec (for example, a predetermined range around the probability 1/200), and the jackpot probability at the low probability of the settings 4 to 6 is so-called. A pattern in which the probability is close to the Amadeji spec (for example, a predetermined range around the probability 1/99) is also conceivable. In such a pattern, it is possible to provide apparently two types of models by changing the setting (setting value).

As described above, it can be said that the game machine 10 has different game performance (characteristics of the game) and specifications (specifications) for each setting, and it is not necessary to develop a game machine having a plurality of specifications, which reduces the development cost. Leads to. That is, it is possible to substantially provide the player with a gaming machine having a plurality of specifications only by changing the set value by the setting changing device 42 (setting key switch 93 and setting value changing switch 102). For example, a setting where the small hit probability is 0% and a small hit probability of about 10
At a setting close to 0%, there is a big difference in playability regarding whether or not a small hit occurs, and it can be said that the specifications are completely different. Furthermore, since the jackpot probability and the small hit probability change according to the setting (set value), the player enjoys estimating the setting (set value) from the jackpot probability and the small hit probability, and the interest of the game is improved. ..

[Small hit opening mode]
FIG. 105 shows an example of the opening mode (small hit opening mode, small hit opening pattern) of the special variable winning device 39 in the small hit state (second special gaming state). In the example of FIG. 105, the special variable winning device 39 (that is, the large winning opening) is opened four times with one small hit, and one opening time is 20.
At 0 ms, the waiting time is 1500 ms. The special variable winning device 39 (that is, the large winning opening)
It is also possible to open the small hit so that the is opened only once.

The game control device 100 sets the small hit opening mode to be the same regardless of the setting (set value). Therefore, the control of the small hit state becomes easy. However, it is set (set value) from the small hit opening mode itself.
Will be difficult to estimate, and the player will estimate the setting from the small hit probability.

[Probability of hitting a normal figure]
FIG. 106 shows the hit probabilities (low probability time and high probability time) of the normal figure variation display game determined as a result of the normal figure normal processing (FIG. 32) in each setting (each set value) in the eleventh embodiment. On the other hand, it is a table illustrated.

In the table of pattern I in FIG. 106, the probability of hitting a normal figure, which is the probability of hitting a normal figure, is set 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <in both low probability and high probability. It increases in the order of setting 6. That is, as the set value increases, the probability of hitting a normal figure increases and the probability of hitting a normal figure increases, and the number of balls acquired by winning the normal variable winning device 37 and the execution frequency of the special figure 2 variable display game increase. , It is advantageous for the player. In this case, as in pattern I of FIG. 104A, the small hit probability of the small hit that occurs only in the special figure 2 variable display game is set to setting 1 <setting 2 <.
Increasing in the order of setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6 is synergistically advantageous to the player.
In addition, since the probability of hitting a normal figure changes according to the setting (set value), the player enjoys estimating the setting (set value) from the probability of hitting a normal figure, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the table of pattern II of FIG. 106, the probability of hitting a normal figure, which is the probability of hitting a normal figure, is set 1 <setting 2 <in only one of the low probability time and the high probability time (here, only the low probability time). It increases in the order of setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. That is, in either the low probability time or the high probability time, the probability of hitting the normal figure increases as the set value increases, and the hit of the normal figure is likely to occur. 2 The frequency of execution of the variable display game increases, which is advantageous to the player.

[Display screen waiting for customers]
FIGS. 107 (A) and 107 (B) are diagrams illustrating a display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display device 41 while waiting for customers (customer waiting state). The effect control device 300 displays an image according to the setting (set value) on the display device 41 while waiting for a customer who is not displaying the effect related to the variable display game.

In order to do so, the effect control device 300 is, for example, a customer waiting demo setting process (B130).
In 8), an image corresponding to the set value is displayed on the display device 41 before the video of the customer waiting demo starts. When the video of the customer waiting demo is repeatedly displayed, an image corresponding to the set value is displayed on the display device 41 before the video of the customer waiting demo ends and starts next.

For example, in the table of pattern I of FIG. 104A, a small hit does not occur in setting 1, and a small hit does not occur.
In the normal electric support state at the time of right-handed hitting, it is better to aim at the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) rather than the special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) to win the game ball. Therefore, in setting 1, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the first character image 501 showing the playability (how to play) on the display screen waiting for customers (when hitting right, "Aim for Fuden !!" ) Is displayed. The first character image 501 explicitly indicates a winning opening to be won when hitting right.

Then, in the table of pattern I in FIG. 104A, since small hit RUSH can be generated in the setting 6, the special variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) is better than the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) in the normal electric support state at the time of right-handed hitting. It is better to aim at the device 39 (large winning opening) and win the game ball. Therefore, in setting 6, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), a second display screen showing playability is displayed while waiting for customers.
Character image 502 ("Small hit RUSH !!" when hitting right) is displayed. The second character image 502 implies a winning opening to be won when hitting right. In addition, pattern I setting 4
In 5, the character image on the display screen while waiting for customers (when hitting right, "1/4 small hit RUSH !!"
And "1/2 small hit RUSH !!") may be displayed.

In addition, in FIGS. 107 (A) and 107 (B), at the same time as the first character image 501 or the second character image 502, an image 503 indicating that the user strikes right in the normal electric support state is displayed on the display screen (customer waiting screen).
Is displayed in.

As in the case of pattern I, patterns II, III, IV, V of FIGS. 104A and 104A and B
, VI table, setting 6, setting 4, setting 3, setting 6, setting 1-2 and 4, respectively.
At −5, no small hit occurs, and the first character image 501 (“Aim for Fuden !!” when hitting right) is displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (A). In addition, patterns II, III, and I of FIGS. 104A and 104A and B.
In the V, V, and VI tables, setting 1, setting 3, setting 4, setting 1, setting 3, and 6, respectively.
Then, since the small hit RUSH can be generated, the second character image 50 is as shown in FIG. 107 (B).
2 (“Small hit RUSH !!” when hitting right) is displayed.

In this way, while waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer), an image corresponding to the setting (set value) can be displayed on the display device 41 to show the player the playability of the setting. Then, the playability shown by the image serves as a guide for the player to select the game machine.

In addition, on the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display device 41 waiting for customers, the setting (set value)
It is also possible to display the image of the effect introduction and the image of the game flow on the display device 41 according to the above.

[Display according to display settings]
FIG. 108A shows the light emitting mode of the first special figure variation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure variation display unit 52 (light emitting unit) used for executing the special figure variation display game in the batch display device 50.
An example of changing according to the setting (setting value) is shown.

For example, as shown in FIG. 108A (I), the game control device 100 is in the non-execution of the special figure variation display game (here, waiting for a customer), the first special figure variation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure. The display mode (light emission mode) of the out-of-order symbol displayed on the figure variation display unit 52 may be different between setting 1 and setting 6.

For example, as shown in FIG. 108A (II), the game control device 100 is in the non-execution of the special figure variation display game (here, waiting for a customer), the first special figure variation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure. The variation display unit 52 may be blinked, the blinking cycle may be different between the setting 1 and the setting 6, and the light emitting mode may be changed according to the setting. The blinking cycle is, for example, 256 ms in setting 1 and 12 in setting 6.
It is 8 ms. As the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 is blinked, but the blinking cycle may be changed according to the setting. ..

In addition, while the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed (waiting for customers), the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51
And / or not only the second special figure variation display unit 52, but also other display units 53 to 6 of the batch display device 50.
It is also possible to change the light emitting mode of 0 according to the setting (set value).

FIG. 108B is a diagram showing an external device connected to the external information terminal 71. As external devices, an external display device 864 (display device) and a game hall internal management device 866 (hall computer) are provided. The game control device 100 may change the display mode of the external display device 864 provided outside the game machine 10 according to the set value.

The game control device 100 outputs a control command according to the set value to the external display device 864 via the external information terminal 71 at a predetermined timing, and controls the display mode of the external display device 864 according to the set value.

For example, the external display device 864 (display) is a patrol lamp 864a capable of emitting light, and an information display 864d capable of displaying a moving image or a still image. The patrol lamp 864a emits light (rotational light emission) when a control command is received. When the information display 864d receives a control command, it can display data such as a game number display (rotation speed display), and can display a moving image or a still image corresponding to the control command on the display unit 868.

When the control command includes the set value information of the game machine 10, the patrol lamp 864a can emit light in a light emitting mode (emission color, etc.) according to the set value, and the information display 864d corresponds to the set value. A moving image or a still image can be displayed on the display unit 868.

As described above, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 (light emitting unit)
The player can estimate the setting (set value) based on the light emitting mode of the above and the display mode of the external display device 864 (display device) provided externally.

[Action / effect of the eleventh embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the game machine 10 is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a starting condition.
When the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable winning device (special variable winning device 39) can convert from a closed state in which the game ball cannot win to an open state in which the game ball can win in the special gaming state. The setting changing means (setting changing device 42) can change the setting value regarding the game condition (condition for the player to play the game). The game control means generates a first special game state (big hit state) when the stop result of the variable display game is the first special result, and when the stop result of the variable display game is the second special result. The game value that can be acquired by the player is less than that in the first special game state.
Generate a special game state (small hit state). The game control means sets the probability that the stop result of the variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) according to the set value, and sets the opening mode (opening pattern) of the variable winning device in the second special game state. , Set the same regardless of the set value.

Therefore, since the probability that the stop result of the variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) can be set according to the set value, the game playability of the game machine 10 can be changed according to the set value. In addition, the second
Since the opening mode (opening pattern) of the variable winning device in the special gaming state can be set to be the same regardless of the set value, the control of the variable winning device in the second special gaming state becomes easy.

According to the eleventh embodiment, the game machine 10 includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying an effect related to the variable display game on the display device. The effect control means displays an image corresponding to the set value on the display device in the customer waiting state in which the effect related to the variable display game is not displayed. Therefore, in the customer waiting state, by showing the player the playability at the current set value, the player can easily select the game machine in the game hall (game store).

According to the eleventh embodiment, in the game machine 10, the game control means (game control device 100).
Sets the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52) used for executing the variable display game during execution or non-execution of the variable display game according to a set value. Can be changed. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting (set value) based on the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52) used to execute the variable display game.

According to the eleventh embodiment, in the game machine 10, the game control means can set the display mode of the display (pat lamp 864a, information display 864d) provided outside the game machine 10 according to the set value. .. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting (set value) based on the display mode of the display provided externally.

[12th Embodiment]
A twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 118. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eleventh embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to eleventh embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

In the twelfth embodiment, the part identification information (first) of the detachable parts (parts, members) 510
When the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the game machine 10 does not match, the mismatch is notified as an error.

[Game machine parts]
FIG. 109 shows how the detachable part 510 is attached to the game machine 10.
The part 510 is assigned electrically readable part identification information. For example
The part 510 may be a plate-shaped member on which model information (model logo, etc.) of the game machine 10 to be attached is displayed, or may be a movable accessory constituting the frame effect device or the board effect device 44, or may be frame-decorated. A decorative member having an LED of the device 18 or the board decoration device 46 may be used. The part 510 can be attached to the game machine 10 at the game hall because it interferes with the delivery to the game hall (game store), and an unfamiliar staff member may attach the part 510 to the wrong model.

As shown in FIG. 109 (A), for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the game machine 10, no problem occurs. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (B),
Since a problem occurs when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the game machine 10, the effect control device 300 notifies the error via the speakers 19a and 19b and the display device 41.

FIG. 110 is a schematic configuration diagram schematically showing a configuration example of the game machine 10 of the present embodiment. The game control device 100 transmits a model designation command indicating the model (type) of the game machine 10 to the effect control device 300 when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on (A1035, A1045). The effect control device 300 receives a model designation command (B) from the reference table (FIG. 118 described later).
Select and set the model identification information corresponding to 1301). In addition, the effect control device 300
The part identification information read from the part 510 is compared with the set model identification information. Further, when the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the effect control device 300 notifies as an error that they do not match.

The part 510 has an identification board 513 that holds the part identification information. Identification board 513
In, the part identification information is one or more wirings 519 (electric wires) to which a predetermined voltage is applied.
Set by. In FIG. 109, the wiring 519 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage via a pull-up resistor, but the pull-up resistor may not be provided. The power supply (voltage) to the part 510 is, for example, the effect control device 300 when the part 510 is attached.
Alternatively, it is supplied from the power supply device 400.

In FIG. 110, each of the plurality of wirings 519 (plurality of electric wires) is connected to a predetermined terminal among a plurality of (eight) terminals (ports) in the parallel serial conversion unit 516. In this way, a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input is set as a bit with a value of "1", and a terminal to which a predetermined voltage is not input (wiring 519 is not connected) is set as a bit with a value of "0", for example, "
Part identification information such as "01111100" can be transmitted via the parallel serial conversion unit 516.

That is, the identification board 513 is assigned the part identification information as parallel data by the plurality of wirings 519. The parallel-serial conversion unit 516 converts parts identification information input (parallel data) into serial data, the serial communication (in this case I ^{2 C)} by sending to the effect control device 300.

FIG. 111 shows another example of the identification substrate 513. In FIG. 111, the part identification information is set by the DIP switch 521. Each of the plurality of wires 519 is a DIP switch 5.
By 21, the voltage becomes a predetermined voltage or the ground voltage, and the information of each bit (“1” or “0”) of the part identification information is input to the plurality (8) terminals (ports) of the parallel serial conversion unit 516. .. In the example of FIG. 111, the wiring 5 in which the DIP switch 521 is turned on.
The terminal connected to 19 becomes the ground voltage (bit of the value "0"), and the DIP switch 52
The terminal connected to the wiring 519 in which 1 is turned off has a predetermined voltage (bit of the value "1").
Will be.

[Parallel serial converter]
FIG. 112 shows the configuration of the parallel serial conversion unit 516 when the parallel serial conversion unit 516 is a normal parallel serial conversion IC.

The parallel serial conversion unit 516 is a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF).
It has a configuration of a normal parallel serial conversion IC including. Parallel serial converter 51
6 converts the terminal 0-7 parallel data as part identification information input from (port 0-7) (e.g., "01111100") into serial data, connected by the serial communication (here ^{I 2} C communication) It is transmitted to the effect control device 300 via the line SDA (data line). Effect control unit 300 includes a master IC300a in ^{I 2} C communication, inputs a clock signal for a plurality of D-type flip-flop 516a to the parallel-serial converter 516 via the connection line SCL (timing signal line).

The plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF) form a shift register in which each bit data of the parallel data moves from right to left in synchronization with the clock signal. The bit data of each D-type flip-flop 516a at a certain clock timing moves to the adjacent D-type flip-flop 516a at the next clock timing. Each bit data of the parallel data is taken into a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a at a certain clock timing, and is sequentially output as serial data from the leftmost D-type flip-flop 516a. That is, the output of the serial data is completed 8 clocks after the parallel data is captured.

[First modification of the identification board]
FIG. 113 shows a first modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the first modification, the parallel serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 is not a normal parallel serial conversion IC, but an input I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC). ^{I 2} for input
The CI / O expander 815 connects the ports 0 to 0 to the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300.
The part identification information input from 7 is input as data.

The I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC) is connected to the transistor 830 connected to the connection line SDA, the filter 831 connected to the connection line SDA, the driver 832 connected to the connection line SDA, and the connection line SCL. Filter 833, bus controller 834,
And a reset signal generation circuit 839 is provided. In addition, another I ² CI / O expander 81
The bus monitoring WDT (watchdog timer) 840 for determining whether or not the connection line SDA is occupied by 5 and the I ² CI / O expander 815 itself determine whether or not the connection line SDA is occupied. It is equipped with a self-occupying WDT841 for the purpose of doing so.

The connection line SDA is a connection line for transmitting and receiving a data signal between the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 and the I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC), and functions as a data line. The connection line SCL is a connection line for inputting / outputting a clock signal used for data communication in the connection line SDA, and functions as a timing signal line.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from the data (here, response signal, address data, etc.) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834.

When the driver 832 outputs data (here, parts identification information, etc.) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a, the transistor 83 sets the voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate.
Apply to 0.

A field effect transistor (FET) is used in the transistor 830 to suppress power consumption, the gate of the transistor 830 is connected to the driver 832, and the drain is a connection line SDA to which a predetermined voltage is applied by a pull-up resistor R. The source is grounded.

The driver 832 connects the data (part identification information, etc.) to the master IC 300a, and the connection line SDA.
When outputting from, a voltage of a value at which the transistor 830 can operate is applied to the gate of the transistor 830 in order to allow a current to flow through the transistor 830 between the drain and the source. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The filter 833 is connected to the connection line SCL, removes noise from the data input from the connection line SCL, and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834.

In ^addition, the I 2 CI / O expander 815, it is set a unique address by the address setting terminals A0~A3 provided in the ^I 2 CI / O expander 815 is input to the bus controller 834. Further, ^{the address for resetting the I 2} CI / O expander 815 is also preset.

The unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI / O expander 815 is composed of a fixed address portion consisting of upper 3 bits and a variable address portion consisting of lower 5 bits. A predetermined value (for example, "110") is preset in the fixed address portion and cannot be changed by the ^{I 2 CI / O expander 815.}

The variable address section includes ^{a 4-bit I 2} CI / O expander address corresponding to the pattern set in the terminals A to A3 of the ^{I 2} CI / O expander 815, and a write request as to whether the data is a read request or not. It is composed of 1-bit R / W identification data indicating whether or not it is. In the input I ² CI / O expander 815, "1" is usually registered in the R / W identification data in response to the read request.

In the bus controller 834, the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is I ² CI.
It is determined whether or not the address matches the unique address set in the / O expander 815, and if it matches, data (part identification information) is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. A predetermined voltage is obtained by connecting a plurality of wirings 519 to a predetermined port (here, 5) out of 8 ports 0 to 7 (terminals 0 to 7) in the ^{I 2 CI / O expander 815.} Is applied. Therefore, 8-bit part identification information (for example, "01111100") is input to the bus controller 834 as parallel data via the eight ports 0 to 7. A predetermined port to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit having a value of "1", and other terminals (wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to a bit having a value "0".

Further, in the bus controller 834, the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is I.
^{2 It} is determined whether or not it matches the reset address set in the CI / O expander 815, and if it matches, the data is taken in as initialization instruction data (initialization command RES), and the I ² Initialize the CI / O expander 815.

In addition, the number of changes in the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH reached 8 times, 8 times.
After the bus controller 834 outputs the bit data (part identification information), the connection line S
When the signal level of CL changes from HIGH to LOW, the master IC 300a outputs a response signal from the connection line SDA to the bus controller 834. Further, it is confirmed that the signal level of the connecting line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and when the signal level of the connecting line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW again, the connecting line SDA is opened. That is, the master IC30
0a outputs a response signal at the timing when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH 9 times.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 has ^{a Vcc terminal connected to a connection line Vcc that supplies power to the I 2} CI / O expander 815, and a RES that receives a reset signal from the outside.
The ET terminal is connected.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 is ^{powered on to the I 2} CI / O expander 815.
When the voltage rises to a predetermined value, a reset signal is generated, and the generated reset signal is input to the bus controller 834 to initialize the voltage.

Therefore, when the harness is pulled out, the connection line Vcc for supplying power for logic is temporarily disconnected, and when the harness is reinserted, the power supply is restored and the reset signal generation circuit 83
9 will output a reset signal. A harness is a bundle of a connection line Vcc for supplying power for logic, a connection line SDA, a connection line SCL, a ground line GND, and the like.

The bus monitoring WDT840 is ^{used to detect that another I 2} CI / O expander 815 occupies the connecting line SDA. The bus monitoring WDT840 is connected to the reset signal generation circuit 839, and when a predetermined time elapses after the connection line SDA is occupied,
By operating its own reset signal generation circuit 839, the I ² CI / O expander 815
To initialize.

The self-occupied WDT841 is a ^{connection line SD by itself (I 2} CI / O expander 815).
Used to detect the occupancy of A. When the self-occupied WDT 841 operates continuously for a certain period of time, the self-occupied WDT 841 generates a reset signal in the reset signal generation circuit 839 ^{to initialize the I 2} CI / O expander 815.

[Second modification of the identification board]
FIG. 114 shows a second modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the second modification, the parallel serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 is not a normal parallel serial conversion IC, but an output I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC). Further, in the second modification, the part 510 is provided with an effect device and can perform an effect. The production device is, for example, an LED.
Although it is a decorative device such as (light emitting part), it may be a movable accessory.

The output I ² CI / O expander 815 is the master IC 300 of the effect control device 300.
Based on the effect control data received from a, the output state (here, the light emitting state) of the effect device (here, LED, light emitting unit) provided in the part 510 is controlled via the ports 0 to 15 on the output side. The I ² CI / O expander 815 is the I ² CI / O expander 815.
The unique address (8 bits) of is used as the part identification information and is input to the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300.

The I ² CI / O expander 815 ^{for output is the I 2} CI / O expander 81 for input.
5 (FIG. 113) shows a driver 8 connected to each port 0 to 15 (terminals 0 to 15) on the output side of the output setting register 835, the output controller 836, and the I ^{2 CI / O expander 815.}
37, Transistors 838A to 838P connected to each port 0 to 15 are added. Therefore, the ^{same configuration as the input I 2} CI / O expander 815 (FIG. 113) will be omitted as appropriate.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from data (here, effect control data, response signal, etc.) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834.

When the driver 832 outputs data (here, part identification information, response signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a, the driver 832 applies a voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate to the transistor 830.

When the driver 832 outputs data (part identification information, response signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA, the transistor 830 can operate at the gate of the transistor 830 in order to pass a current through the transistor 830 between the drain and the source. Apply a value voltage. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

In the bus controller 834, the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is I ² CI.
It is determined whether or not the address matches the unique address set in the / O expander 815, and if it matches, data (part identification information, response signal, etc.) is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. The part identification information output to the master IC 300a is I ^{2 as described above.}
It is a unique address (8 bits) of the CI / O expander 815. It is not always necessary to output the parts identification information from the bus controller 834 to the master IC 300a, and when the effect control device 300 receives the response signal from the bus controller 834, the effect control device 300 recognizes the address of the transmitted data as the parts identification information. It may be configured to do so.

Further, the bus controller 834 changes the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH eight times, and after fetching the 8th bit effect control data from the connection line SDA, the signal level of the connection line SCL is changed. When changing from HIGH to LOW, the response signal is sent to the connection line SD.
Output from A to the master IC 300a. Further, it was confirmed that the signal level of the connecting line SCL changed from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connecting line SCL changed from HIGH to LO again.
When it changes to W, the connection line SDA is opened. That is, the bus controller 834 outputs the response signal at the timing when the number of changes of the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH becomes 9 times.

^{The operation mode of the I 2} CI / O expander 815 and the output state of ports 0 to 15 are set in the output setting register 835. When the bus controller 834 fetches the initialization instruction data from the connection line SDA and the I ² CI / O expander 815 is initialized, the output setting register 835 causes current to flow through all ports 0 to 15. It is set to the initial state so that it does not exist.

The output controller 836 is based on the data set in the output setting register 835.
A production device (here, LE) connected to each port 0 to 15 via a port driver 837.
The output state (here, the light emitting state) of the effect device is actually controlled by passing a current through (D, the light emitting unit) (output of lighting data). When the bus controller 834 captures the effect control data from the connection line SDA, this output state is updated to the content specified in the effect control data.

That is, the output setting register 835 is set based on the effect control data received from the master IC 300a, and when the stop condition is received, the output states of the ports 0 to 15 are updated and reflected in the effect device.

When a current is passed through the port, the driver 837 applies a voltage to the transistor so that the transistors 838A to 838P connected to the port through which the current flows can operate.

The gates of the transistors 838A to 838P are connected to the driver 837, the drain is connected to the port terminal connected to the connection line to which the voltage for operating the effector is applied, and the source is grounded.

If the voltage applied to the gate of the transistors 838A to 838P is equal to or higher than the predetermined value for operating the transistor 838, the predetermined voltage applied to the gate from the drive power source is grounded through the drain of the transistor 838. By the current flowing to
The output state of the effect device (LED in this case) connected to the port terminal can be controlled.

[Third modification of the identification board]
FIG. 115 shows a third modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the third modification, the parallel serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 does not exist, and the input of the effect control device 300 as the part identification information (for example, “01111100”) having a predetermined voltage of 8 bits from the plurality of wirings 519. It is directly input to the ports 300b (ports 0 to 7). Input port 30
The part identification information input to 0b is the main control microcomputer (CP) via the data bus 340.
U) Incorporated into 311. A predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit having a value of "1", and other terminals (wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to a bit having a value "0".

Then, when the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 notifies as an error that they do not match. Execute the process to be performed.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the main process (main program) according to the twelfth embodiment. When the power is turned on (restored) to the game machine 10, the main process is executed by the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311).

The main process of the twelfth embodiment is a part collation process (B5) with respect to the main process of FIG.
000) is added, and other processes are the same as those in FIG. 36. Therefore, the same step numbers are assigned and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the parts collation process, the parts identification information read from the parts 510 is compared with the model identification information corresponding to the model designation command (B1301), and the parts identification information (first identification information) is compared.
When the model identification information (second identification information) does not match, an error notification is issued to warn.
In the present embodiment, the parts collation process (B5000) is the reception command check process (B00).
It is executed after 14).

The parts collation process (B5000) is first executed when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, and then repeatedly executed by the loop process from steps B0008 to B0021.

[Part matching process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the parts collation process (B50) in the main process (FIG. 116)
The details of 00) will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the parts collation process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 updates -1 if the collation time timer (timekeeping means) is not 0 (B5001). The collation time timer reads the part identification information and collates it with the model identification information (
The collation timing or collation time interval to be compared) is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the collation time timer is 0 (B5002). When the collation time timer is not 0 (B5)
Since the result of 002 is "N") and it is not the collation timing, the parts collation process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the collation time timer is 0 (the result of B5002 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 reads the part identification information from the part 510 because it is the collation timing (B5).
003). Then, the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) are compared (verified) (B5004). The model identification information is set based on the model designation command as information indicating the type (model) of the game machine in the model setting process (B1302) when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on.

The effect control device 300 stores the reference table of FIG. 118 in a memory (for example, program ROM 321). In the reference table of FIG. 118, the model designation command and the model identification information are associated with each other. In this way, the effect control device 300 holds the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the game machine.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the part identification information and the model identification information match (B5005). When the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (the result of B5005 is "N"), the error notification notifies that the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (B5006). That is, it notifies that the part 510 is attached to the wrong model that does not conform to (correspond to) the part 510. The effect control device 300 may execute error notification (warning) by generating sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b or displaying characters on the display device 41. Further, here, the effect control device 300 may notify the correct model conforming to (corresponding to) the part 510 together with the error notification by referring to the reference table of FIG. 118. The correct model is a model that has the same model identification information as the part identification information of the part 510.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 sets the initial value of the collation time timer (B5007), and ends the parts collation process. Therefore, the parts identification information and the model identification information are periodically compared (verified) each time the time corresponding to the initial value of the collation time timer elapses, starting from the time when the power is turned on. The initial value of the collation time timer is, for example, a time corresponding to several minutes, but is not limited to this.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, when the part identification information and the model identification information match (B5).
Since the result of 005 is "Y") and the part 510 is attached to the correct model that conforms to (corresponds to) the part 510, the initial value of the collation time timer is set without notifying an error (B50).
07), the parts collation process is completed.

By the above parts collation process, for example, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the game machine 10 (FIG. 109 (B)), the model identification information (for example, "0111").
1100 ") and the part identification information (for example," 01111101 ") do not match, and error notification is executed. Correct model (model B) that fits part 510B along with error notification
May be notified. On the other hand, for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the game machine 10 (FIG. 109 (A)), the model identification information (for example, "01111100").
") And the part identification information (for example," 01111100 ") match, and the error notification is not executed.

As a modification, the effect control device 300 has a memory (for example, a program ROM 321).
) May not store the reference table of FIG. 118, and may hold only the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to one type of model. In this case as well, the effect control device 300 is the part 510.
The parts identification information read from is compared with the retained model identification information, and the parts identification information (
When the model identification information (second identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, a mismatch is notified as an error.

[Action / effect of the twelfth embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition) in the game machine 10 is related to the game. An effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect to be performed, and an effect control device 300.
To be equipped. The game machine 10 includes removable parts (parts 510) to which electrically readable first identification information (parts identification information) is assigned. The effect control means holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the game machine 10, reads the first identification information of the part, compares it with the second identification information, and compares the first identification information (part identification). Information) and second identification information (model identification information)
If there is a discrepancy, notify that there is a discrepancy.

Therefore, even if an erroneous part (part 510) is attached, it can be appropriately notified.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game machine 10 from operating due to a mistake in mounting the parts (parts 510) in the game hall (game store).

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the game machine 10, the effect control means is at least the game machine 1.
When the power of 0 is turned on, the first identification information of the part (part 510) is read and compared with the second identification information, and when the first identification information and the second identification information do not match, it is determined that they do not match. Notify. Therefore, even if the wrong part (part 510) is attached, it can be notified when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game machine 10 from operating due to a mistake in mounting the parts (parts 510) in the game hall (game store) at an early stage.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the game machine 10, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the effect control means receives information about the model of the game machine 10 from the game control means and corresponds to the model of the game machine 10. The second identification information (model identification information) is selected from the table (reference table), and the first identification information of the part (part 510) is compared with the selected second identification information. Therefore, the game machine 1
When the wrong part (part 510) is attached to various models of 0, this can be notified. In addition, it is possible to notify the correct model to which the wrong part should be installed.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the game machine 10, in the part (part 510), the first
Since the identification information (part identification information) can be set by one or a plurality of wires pulled up to a predetermined voltage, the first identification information can be easily set.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the game machine 10, in the part (part 510), the first
Since the identification information can be set by the DIP switch, the first identification information can be easily set.

[13th Embodiment]
The thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 134. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to twelfth embodiments. 1st
The third embodiment relates to a fixed display period of the probability set value. The confirmed display period is
This is the period for displaying the fixed value of the probability set value.

[Game control device according to the thirteenth embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 119, the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 119 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the game machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment. The game control device 100 of the thirteenth embodiment is similar to the game control device 100 of the first embodiment and the sixth embodiment, but the probability setting value display device 143 attached to the game control device 100 displays the status. It is built into the device 152. That is, the state display device 152 also functions as the probability set value display device 143 of the first embodiment and the sixth embodiment. Further, the game control device 100 of the thirteenth embodiment is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 (RAM clear switch) in addition to the set value change switch 102 (set value change button).

[Transition state when power is turned on]
FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the game machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment is turned on (power restoration). RAM initialization switch 112 and setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on
As shown in FIG. 120, it shifts to four states (modes) depending on the on / off state of.

First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the probability setting value can be changed after the RAM is cleared. Mode) (A1036-A1041 in FIG. 5A). In the RAM clearing here, the clearing process of step A1036 is executed, and A1021 of FIG. 5C is executed.
The clear area # 2 is designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 2 set in. In the thirteenth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, FIG. 5A
In steps A1024 and A1028 of the above, it is determined whether or not both the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are on. Further, unlike the first embodiment, in step A1025 of FIG. 5A, the RAM initialization switch 1 is used instead of the set value change switch 102.
Determine if 12 is on.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed. The transition to the setting confirmation state is performed in step A2 of the probability setting value confirmation process (FIG. 11) during the timer interrupt process after the normal power recovery (A1031-A1035) is performed.
It can be executed with 504-A2508.

Further, when the power is turned on, the setting key switch 93 is off, but the RAM initialization switch 11
When 2 is turned on, the RAM initialization process (R) in step A1042-145.
The AM clear process) is executed, and as shown in FIG. 5C, the clear area # 2 is designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 2, and the RAM is cleared. In addition, it should be noted.
In RAM clear, the clear area # 3 may be designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 3.

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the power is simply restored.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the probability set value change process (A13) in the timer interrupt process.
The details of 08) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability set value changing process according to the thirteenth embodiment.

In the probability setting value changing process of the thirteenth embodiment, the processing positions of steps A2412, A2414, and A2415 are changed with respect to the probability setting value changing process of FIG.
Since the process of A2413 is deleted and the other processes are the same as those in FIG. 10, the same step numbers are assigned and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of step A2416, the game control device 100 loads the value of the work probability setting value area and saves it in the probability setting value area when the setting key switch 93 is in the off state (the result of A2416 is “Y”). (A2412). By turning off the setting key switch 93, the set value is fixed, and the values 0 to 5 corresponding to the fixed probability set value are stored in the probability set value area.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed (A2414), and issues a command for changing the probability setting value indicating that the probability setting value has been changed. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2415). After that, the process of steps A2417-A2421 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 5B), and the process proceeds to the process of step A1049. Here, step A2420
By saving the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value in the probability setting value display area, the determined probability setting value is the state display device 152 in which the probability setting value display device 143 is incorporated.
Can be displayed on. The status display device 152 that functions as the probability set value display device 143.
The transmission of the probability set value display data to the driver 150 (153 in FIG. 71) can be executed in the sixth embodiment in the same manner as in the case of transmitting the accessory ratio display data and the like.

[Processing when receiving set value]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the set value reception processing (B132) in the one-shot command processing.
The details of 4) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing at the time of receiving a set value according to the thirteenth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command is a normal command (B5201). If the received command is not a normal command (the result of B5201 is "N"), the processing at the time of receiving the set value is terminated.

When the received command is a normal command, the effect control device 300 (B520).
The result of 1 is "Y"), the information indicating the current date and time (current time) is acquired from RTC338 (or the timer for time) (B5202), and whether or not the received command is the setting value information command at the end of setting change. (B5203). What is the setting value information command at the end of setting change?
This is a setting value information command transmitted from the game control device 100 together with a command for ending the probability setting change in step A2421 of the probability setting value change process. If the received command is not the setting value information command at the end of setting change (the result of B5203 is "N"), the processing at the time of receiving the setting value is terminated.

When the received command is the set value information command at the end of the setting change (the result of B5203 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 stores the set value and the current date and time (current time) in the memory. Then (B5204), the processing at the time of receiving the set value is terminated. The memory here is FeRAM 323 that can hold the stored contents even if power is not supplied.

If the received command is not the setting value information command at the end of setting change, that is, the setting value information command (A1035) at the time of power failure recovery or the setting value information command (A1045) at the time of RAM initialization (A1045). The result of B5203 may be "N"), and the set value (probability set value) may be stored in the RAM 322 without being associated with the current date and time.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, referring to FIG. 123, the segment LED editing process (A) in the timer interrupt process.
The details of 1314) will be described. FIG. 123 shows the segment LE according to the thirteenth embodiment.
D It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an editing process. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55, the normal figure hold display 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the batch display device 50 are displayed. Settings related to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third game state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed. In addition, FIG.
Although not described in 23, in the segment LED editing process, when the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the variable display unit 53 for the normal figure variable display game are light-emitting control other than the variable display game. , The light emission control (light-off control, lighting control, blinking control) of the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the variation display unit 53 may be executed in the same manner as the light emission control of the hold display 54-56. .. In the variation display game, the control for causing the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the variation display unit 53 to emit light (blink) is executed by the symbol variation control process (FIG. 29).

First, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether or not the output is on timing (A9202). When the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing. In the present embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, a blinking cycle of 128 ms can be created (see FIG. 2B).

When the game control device 100 is output on timing (the result of A9202 is "Y")
, When the normal figure hold number display table 1 is set (A9203) and the output is not on timing (
The result of A9202 is "N"), the normal figure hold number display table 2 is set (A9204), the display data corresponding to the normal figure hold number is acquired, and the segment of the normal figure hold indicator 56 (lamps D15, D16). Save to the area (A9205). If the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the display data will be the same in both the normal figure holding number display tables 1 and 2, so the normal figure holding indicator 56 will not blink, but if the number of holdings is 3 to 4, it will be normal. Since the display data of the figure hold number display table 1 and the display data of the normal figure hold number display table 2 are different, the normal figure hold indicator 56 blinks (see FIG. 2B).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the output is on timing (A920).
6). When the output is on timing (the result of A9206 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (A9207), and when the output is not on timing (the result of A9206 is "N"), the special figure 1 is held. The number display table 2 is set (A9208), display data corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display 54 (lamps D11, D12) (A9209).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the output is on timing (A921).
0). When the output is on timing (the result of A9210 is "Y"), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (A9211), and when the output is not on timing (the result of A9210 is "N"), the special figure 2 is held. The number display table 2 is set (A9212), display data corresponding to the number of special figure 2 hold indicators is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 (lamps D13, D14) (A9213).

After that, the game control device 100 sets a round display LED display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D7) is defined (A9214), and acquires display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer. Then, the data is saved in the segment area of the round display unit 60 (A9215).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 58 (lamp D9), the third game state display unit 59 (lamp D17), and the like is defined ( A9216). Further, the display data corresponding to the game status display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game status display unit (A9217).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 57 (lamp D8) is defined (A9218). Further, the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (A9219). After that, the segment LED editing process is completed.

[Timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when changing the setting]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 124 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment.

After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x1, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on at time x2, the game machine 10
The state (game machine state) becomes the setting change mode (setting variable state), and the unconfirmed probability setting value (unconfirmed value) is displayed on the status display device 152 (probability setting value display (unconfirmed value)). ). In the probability set value display (undetermined value) of the status display device 152, the undetermined probability set value is displayed blinking. Further, in response to the setting change mode being set at time x2, the display device 41 displays a display of a predetermined display mode indicating that the setting is being changed. Batch display device 50
The (first display device), the lamp display device 80 (fourth symbol), and the decorative device are maintained in the extinguished state. The decoration device includes a frame decoration device 18 such as decoration devices 18a and 18b, and an upper effect unit 4.
In addition to the board decoration device 46 such as 0c, it has a decorative light emitting unit (LED). Further, the decorative device may be in a dimmed state instead of being turned off, or only a light emitting portion other than a specific color may be turned off.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, the game machine state becomes a game-enabled state in which the game can be played, and the state display device 152 (second display device) has a fixed probability setting value (fixed value).
Is displayed (probability setting value display (confirmed value)). In the probability set value display (confirmed value) of the status display device 152, the confirmed probability set value is lit and displayed. When the game machine state is playable, the set value cannot be changed or confirmed. In addition, the identification information of the missing symbol is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and / or the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 in response to the game being enabled at the time x3 (this special feature). (Figure display), a customer waiting demo is displayed on the display device 41. In addition, display units other than the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 (
The lamp D3-D18) may also be displayed blinking to execute the customer waiting display. The lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. In addition, when the probability set value is determined at time x3, a notification indicating that the probability set value has been determined may be performed by sound or voice.

The time x4 is a time when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed from the time x3. When the time x4 is reached, the status display device 152 (second display device) ends the probability set value display and starts all blinking display, and repeats all off display and all on on display of all segments at predetermined time intervals. .. The full blinking display of the status display device 152 is executed by using the blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process of FIG. 123, and is different from the blinking display of the display unit of the batch display device 50 (the above-mentioned customer waiting display). It may be synchronized with the same blinking cycle.

The time x4 is not limited to when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed from the time x3, but also when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected. Good. In this way, when switching from the setting change state to the game-enabled state in which the set value cannot be changed, the set value determined by the state display device 152 is set for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 s).
ec) Since it becomes possible to check, it is possible to see the confirmed set value without entering the setting confirmation mode again after changing the setting, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the game hall manager.

The time x5 is a time when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x4. When the time x5 is reached, the status display device 152 ends the all blinking display and starts the performance display (feature ratio display), and the bonus ratio is displayed. In addition, instead of displaying the information on the accessory ratio on the status display device 152, the information on the ball ejection rate, the number of ejected balls, and the base value (the ball ejection rate in the normal game state) may be displayed (ball ejection rate). Rate display, number of ejected balls display, base value display). As described above, the bonus ratio and the ball output rate (including the base value) are derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, and are performance information indicating the performance of the game machine. Then, the status display device 152 can execute the performance display for displaying the performance information.

The probability set value display (unconfirmed value) from time x2 is displayed as blinking, and the probability set value display (confirmed value) of the status display device 152 from time x3 is displayed as lit. The display may be exchanged so that the probability set value display (unconfirmed value) is lit and the probability set value display (confirmed value) is blinking.

[Example of display screen of display device when changing settings]
FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) according to the thirteenth embodiment. In FIG. 125, along with the display screen of the display device 41, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are also shown above the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 125 (sa), the effect control device 300 receives the command for which the probability setting is being changed (A1041), and the setting changing display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. 721 is displayed. Further, as described above, the lamp display device 80 is being changed during the setting change.
And the upper effect unit 40c is turned off. The effect control device 300 may perform a notification indicating that the setting is being changed by sound or voice together with the setting changing display 721.

In FIG. 125 (), the display device 4 corresponds to the state in which the game can be played after the setting is changed.
The customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of 1. When the game becomes possible, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed, and a part of the upper effect unit 40c lights up or blinks according to the customer waiting demonstration as shown in black in FIG. 125 (). .. As described above, the lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (blinking) as the fourth symbol (fourth special symbol), and the start memory number of each special symbol variable display game. Since it consists of a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notification, it is off in the normal display (off display).
A part may be lit or blinking according to the customer waiting demonstration.

FIG. 125 (S) shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3).
This is the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demonstration is completed and the special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started according to 206). Customer waiting demo screen 7 shown in Fig. 125
22 is hidden, and the variable display area 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 6)
In 10C), the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are in an effect mode in which a part of the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are lit or blinking according to the special figure variation display game. In the hold digestion area 640, the special figure change hold display 643 (starting memory display, special figure digestion hold display) corresponding to the special figure change display game being executed (during digestion) is displayed. Hold display unit 6
In 30, the pending first start memory and second start memory are displayed. For example, when the special figure variation display game is started after the customer waiting demonstration, the hold display unit 630 is shown in FIG. 125 (S).
Will be in a state where there is no pending first start memory or second start memory.

[Example of modification of the timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 126 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment. In the following description of FIGS. 126, 127, 129, and 130, the description overlapping with FIG. 124 will be omitted as appropriate.

As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x3 and the game machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the game-enabled state, the state display device 152 starts blinking completely.

Then, the time x4'when a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x3
Then, the status display device 152 switches the display from all blinking to the probability set value display (fixed value). The status display device 152 starts the performance display (feature ratio display and ball output rate display) at a time x 5'when a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed after switching the display to the probability set value display. Then, the accessory ratio is displayed. In this way, by turning off the setting key switch 93 and setting the status display device 152 to a fully blinking display in response to the setting change mode being set to the game-enabled state, it is possible to manage the game hall that the setting has been confirmed. Can be clearly stated to the person. After that, the set value confirmed by the probability set value display is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec).
The game hall manager can confirm the fixed set value as it is, and can improve the work efficiency.

As in FIG. 124, after the probability set value is displayed, all blinking may be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) at time x 5', and then the performance display may be started.

[Second modification of the timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, a second modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 127 is a timing chart showing a second modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment.

As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x3 and the game machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the game-enabled state, the state display device 152 starts displaying the probability set value.

Then, at the time x4 when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed from the time x3, the status display device 152 switches the display from the probability set value display to the notification display. The notification display is a display for notifying that the setting has been confirmed, as will be described later in FIG. 128. After switching the display to the notification display, the status display device 152 starts the performance display (feature ratio display and ball output rate display) at the time x5 when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed, and sets the bonus ratio. indicate.

In addition, at time x3, before displaying the probability set value (fixed value) on the state display device 152, all blinking or notification display may be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec). Further, at the time x3, if the notification display is to be performed before the probability set value is displayed (fixed value) on the status display device 152, the time x4 to the time x5 is performed after the probability set value is displayed (fixed value). Instead of displaying the notification, all blinking may be performed.

[Display mode when changing the settings of the status display device]
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the setting of the state display device 152 according to the second modification of the thirteenth embodiment is changed.

First, FIG. 128A shows a display mode of the status display device 152 when the power is turned off by the time x2 of FIG. 127, and shows four 7 segments (point portions) of the status display device 152. 8 segments) are all turned off when included.

FIG. 128B shows a display mode of the state display device 152 when the probability set value display (unconfirmed value, fixed value) is displayed from time x2 to time x4, and is a state display device 152.
The current probability setting value (for example, "6") is displayed in the leftmost digit 3, and the seven segments (digit 2, digit 1, digit 0) other than the digit 3 are turned off. The current probability setting value (for example, "6") displayed in the leftmost digit 3 of the status display device 152 is blinking in the probability setting value display (undetermined value) from time x2 to time x3. The probability set value display (confirmed value) from x3 to time x4 is a lighting display.

FIG. 128 (c) shows a display mode of the state display device 152 when the notification is displayed from the time x4 to the time x5. The upper and lower bars indicating that the probability set value has been determined are displayed in the digits 0 to 3 of the status display device 152. The notification display displayed on the digits 0 to 3 of the status display device 152 is not limited to the display by the upper and lower bars, and may be displayed in a display mode different from the probability set value and the performance display.

FIG. 128 (d) is a display mode of the state display device 152 whose performance is displayed after the time x5. As shown in FIG. 128 (d), the status display device 152 displays the ball ejection rate (for example, "b1.35") with respect to the latest predetermined number (for example, 10,000 shots) of ejected balls as a performance display. ..
In addition, the state display device 152 may display the total ball ejection rate (for example, "bL.35" shown in FIG. 102), the base value, and the accessory ratio from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present. The display may be switched and displayed at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 to 3 sec).

[Third modification example of the timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a third modification example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 129 is a timing chart showing a third modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment.

As described above, after the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, time x4'
When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) is performed in', the stop display is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50. This special figure display (display of identification information) starts variable display from the out-of-order symbol, and the special figure variable display game (variable display game) is started. At the same time, on the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demonstration ends, and the decorative special figure variation display game (variation display game) starts. In response to the start of the special figure variation display game of the batch display device 50 (first display device) and the display device 41 (third display device), the lamp display device 80 has a special figure variation display game (variation display) based on the fourth symbol. The game) and the number of pending displays are started, and the decorative device displays the effect corresponding to the effect of the special figure variation display game.

Then, at the time x5'' when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x4'',
The status display device 152 ends all blinking and starts performance display (character ratio display and ball output rate display). In this way, information about the game can be displayed at an early stage by starting all blinking and performance display in response to the start of the special figure variation display game without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time. ..

The status display device 152 is subjected to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206), that is, the normal variable winning device 37 or the starting winning opening 3
Not limited to the mode in which all blinking is started when the game ball is won in 6, but all when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 35 or when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34. You may start blinking. Further, as in the example of FIG. 124 described above, all blinking may be started when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected.

[Fourth modification of the timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, a fourth modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 130A is a timing chart showing a fourth modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment.

When the power of the game machine 10 is turned on at the time x2, the game machine state is changed to the setting change mode, and the batch display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device of the fourth modification start all blinking. At that time, the blinking cycle of the batch display device 50 is controlled by the segment LED editing process of FIG. 123, and the blinking cycle of the lamp display device 80 and the decorative device is also controlled by the batch display device 5.
It is set to be the same as the blinking cycle of 0, and the blinking timing of each device is synchronized. The game control device 100 may send a command to the effect control device 300 to synchronize the blinking timing between the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device controlled by the effect control device 300 and the batch display device 50. When the status display device 152 blinks to display the probability set value, the blinking of the status display device 152 is controlled by using the blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process, and the batch display device 50 is used. The blinking timing and the blinking timing of the status display device 152 may be synchronized.

As shown in FIG. 34F, all the blinking displays of the batch display device 50 may be performed by all the display units (light emitting unit, LED lamps D1-D18), and the display unit 51 for the special figure variation display game. , 52 (LED lamps D1, D2) may be used alone. Further, the LED lamps (for example, LED lamps D3-D18) other than the display units 51 and 52 (D1 and D2) for the special figure variation display game may be used to perform full blinking display of the batch display device 50.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x3, the game machine state is changed from the setting change mode to the game-enabled state, and the batch display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device all end blinking. When the time x3 is reached, the identification information of the out-of-order symbols is stopped and displayed on the batch display device 50 (this special figure display), and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. Further, the confirmed probability setting value (confirmed value) is displayed on the status display device 152 (probability setting value display).
On the display screen of the display device 41, the setting changing display ends and the customer waiting demo starts.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec) elapses from the time x3 and the time x5'''is reached, the status display device 152 ends the probability set value display (fixed value) and performs the performance display (feature ratio display). And the payout rate display) is started. As described above, in the state display device 152 according to the fourth modification, the state display device 152
After the probability setting value display (fixed value) is finished, all blinking is omitted and the performance display (character ratio display and ball output rate display) is displayed immediately, so the game hall manager can change the setting and then immediately display the ball output rate. Etc. can be confirmed at an early stage. By the time x5''', the batch display device 50 and the display device 41
The special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started, the lamp display device 80 plays the special figure variation display game (variation display game) and the holding number display by the fourth symbol, and the decoration device displays the special figure variation display game. The display corresponding to the effect of is performed (display corresponding to the effect).

[Timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described. FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation according to the thirteenth embodiment.

After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x11, RA at time x12
When the power of the game machine 10 is turned on with the M initialization switch 112 turned off, the state of the game machine 10 (game machine state) becomes the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state), and the state display device 15
The confirmed probability setting value (confirmed value) is displayed in 2 (probability setting value display). Then, on the display screen of the display device 41, a stop symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 132, which will be described later (stop symbol display). When the game machine state is in the setting confirmation mode, the batch display device 50,
The lamp display device 80 and the decorative device are, for example, in a fully lit state in which all segments and LEDs are fully lit (some lighting states may be used). Further, the batch display device 50 may display the stop symbol of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game in the setting confirmation mode. Also,
When shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the stop symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 becomes the stop symbol of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the game machine state changes from the setting confirmation mode to the game-enabled state, and the status display device 152 displays the performance (character ratio display and ball output rate display).
Is displayed. Further, in response to the game machine state being made playable at time x13, the symbol (identification information) displayed immediately before (when the power is cut off) is displayed as this special figure on the batch display device 50 (when the power is cut off). This special figure display (immediately before display pattern)). Then, a customer waiting demonstration is started on the display screen of the display device 41, and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are displayed normally. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is switched to the game-enabled state, the performance information can be immediately displayed as the performance display on the status display device 152 (second display device), so that the work efficiency of the game hall manager can be improved. Can be improved.

Although the performance display is immediately displayed on the status display device 152 at time x13, a predetermined time (for example, 0. 5 sec) All blinking may be performed. In this way, by displaying on the status display device 152 a display (all blinking display) in a mode different from the probability setting value and the performance display between the setting confirmation mode and the game-enabled state, the game hall manager can display the game field manager. It will be easier to know more reliably that the game has been switched to the playable state.

[Example of display screen of display device when changing settings]
FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the thirteenth embodiment. In FIG. 132, along with the display screen of the display device 41, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are also shown above the display screen. In the following description of FIGS. 132 and 134,
The description overlapping with FIG. 125 will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 132, the effect control device 300 fully lights the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device by receiving the command during the probability setting confirmation (A2508, B1327). As described above, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device have different light emission modes during the setting confirmation than during the setting change (FIG. 125). The effect control device 300
May perform notification (by sound or the like) indicating that the setting is being confirmed as well as all lighting of the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c. On the other hand, on the display screen of the display device 41,
The stop symbol (stop result) of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game is displayed, and the display mode does not indicate that the setting is being confirmed.

In FIG. 132 (so), the display device 4 corresponds to the fact that the game is ready after the setting is confirmed.
The customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of 1. When the game becomes playable, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed.

FIG. 132 (ta) shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3).
This is the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demo is completed and the special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started according to 206). Customer waiting demo screen 7 as in FIG. 125
22 is hidden, the decorative first symbols A to C are variablely displayed in the variable display area 620, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are turned on or blinked according to the special figure variable display game. ..

[Modification example of the timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described. FIG. 133 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation according to the thirteenth embodiment. In the following description of FIG. 133, the description overlapping with FIG. 131 will be omitted as appropriate.

As described above, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off at the time x12, the game machine state is switched to the setting confirmation mode. In the setting confirmation mode of this modification, on the display screen of the display device 41, for example, as will be described later in FIG. 134 (se'), a list of setting confirmation display 723 showing the setting history of the probability setting values so far is displayed. , The display mode shows that the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation display (setting history display)).
Further, the confirmed set value is displayed on the status display device 152 (probability set value display (confirmed value)).
, The lamp display device 80 and the decoration device start all blinking. The batch display device 50 is maintained in a light-off state. The setting confirmation display is not limited to the setting history display, and may be any display mode that indicates that the setting is being confirmed. For example, the setting confirmation may be indicated by characters or the like. In addition to the setting confirmation display, it may be notified by sound or voice that the setting is being confirmed.

After that, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the game machine state changes from the setting confirmation mode to the game-enabled state, and the display screen of the display device 41 ends the setting confirmation display (setting history display). Start a customer waiting demo. In response to the game machine state being made playable at time x13, the state display device 152 has a performance display (character ratio display and ball output rate display).
Is displayed, and the symbol (identification information) displayed immediately before (when the power is cut off) is displayed on the batch display device 50 as the special symbol (this special symbol display (immediately displayed symbol)). Further, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed.

[Example of display screen of display device when changing settings]
FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display screen of the display device 41 at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the thirteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 134 (se'), the effect control device 300 displays the setting confirmation display 723 on the display screen of the display device 41 by receiving the command during the probability setting confirmation (A2508, B1327). The setting confirmation display 723 is a display that can list the setting history of the probability setting values so far. For example, as shown in FIG. 124 (se'), the setting history number, date, changed setting contents, etc. are displayed in a list. The date. As described with reference to FIG. 122, each time the effect control device 300 receives the setting value information command at the end of the setting change (the result of B5203 is “Y”), the setting value and the setting change date and time in which the setting value is fixed are confirmed. FeRAM in association with (date and time of end of setting change)
Stored in 323 (B5204). Therefore, the effect control device 300 reads the set value and the setting change date and time from the FeRAM 323, and displays a list of the setting history of the probability set value on the setting confirmation display 723. Upper effect unit 4 of lamp display device 80 and decoration device
0c blinks completely during the setting confirmation mode.

In FIG. 134 (so'), the customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in response to the game being enabled after the setting is confirmed, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed. It becomes a display.

FIG. 134 (ta') shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demo ends and the special figure variation display game (variation display game) starts, as in FIGS. 125 (su) and 132 (ta). Is. As for the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demo screen 722 is hidden, and the variable display area 62
With 0, the first symbols A to C are displayed in a variable manner, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are displayed.
Is an effect mode that lights up or blinks according to the special figure variation display game.

The movable accessories such as the internal accessories 44a and 44b (see FIG. 52A) may be provided with a display screen capable of displaying an effect related to the special figure variation display game. When the movable accessory is provided with a display screen, the setting confirmation display 723 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, and the display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed using the display screen of the movable accessory. It can be performed. Further, the display screen of the movable accessory may be set to a state different from the playable state such as a single color display (for example, white display) in the setting confirmation mode. Further, the display screen of the display device 41 may be displayed in a single color (for example, white display), and the setting confirmation display 723 may be performed on the display screen of the movable accessory to display the setting history. By adopting such an aspect, even if it is not known that the display screen of the display device 41 is being confirmed for setting as shown in FIG. 132, the setting is being confirmed from the display screen of the movable accessory. Can be easily understood. Not only in the setting confirmation mode, but also in the setting change mode, the display screen of the movable accessory may be displayed in a display mode different from that in the gameable state.

[Action / effect of the thirteenth embodiment]
In the game machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) that fluctuates the identification information (identification symbol, this special figure) is a special result (big hit result mode, big hit stop symbol, A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state that gives a game value to the player when the special result mode is obtained is provided. The game machine 10 is provided in the game area 32, and has a winning area (general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, special variable winning device 39 large winning opening) in which a game ball can win a prize, and a game. When a ball wins in the winning area, a payout control means (payout control device 200) capable of paying out the number of prize balls determined for each winning area.
The first display device (batch display device 50) capable of displaying the display related to the game, and the setting changing means (setting changing device 42, RA) capable of changing the setting values (setting value, probability setting value) related to the game condition.
Performance information derived based on the M initialization switch 112), the set value, and the number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize (role ratio, ball ejection rate for the latest predetermined number of ejected balls, total ball ejection). A second display device (status display device 152) capable of displaying a rate and a base value) is provided. The control means is
In response to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) in which the setting value can be changed by the setting changing means, the display of the first display device is displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, off display, all blinking display). ), And in response to the fact that the set value cannot be changed by the setting change means from the setting change state to the game-enabled state, the set value confirmed on the second display device is set for a predetermined period (predetermined time,
For example, it can be displayed for 2 to 3 seconds).

According to such a game machine 10, when the setting value is switched from the setting change state to the game-enabled state in which the set value cannot be changed, the set value confirmed by the second display device can be confirmed for a predetermined period (predetermined time), so that the game can be played. The work efficiency of the place manager can be improved.

Further, in the game machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100) is changed from the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) to the game-enabled state. A signal related to the game (for example, a detection signal when a game ball that has won a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, the starting winning opening 36, or the general winning opening 35, is detected by setting the set value confirmed in the display device (state display device 152). FIG. A signal indicating that the game ball has passed through the start gate 34, a signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64, and a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24) are displayed until they are detected. According to such a game machine 10, the performance information is displayed when a signal related to the game is detected, so that the game hall manager can confirm the performance information immediately after changing the setting.

In the game machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) that fluctuates the identification information (identification symbol, this special figure) is a special result (big hit result mode, big hit stop symbol, A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state that gives a game value to the player when the special result mode is obtained is provided. The game machine 10 is provided in the game area 32, and has a winning area (general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, special variable winning device 39 large winning opening) in which a game ball can win a prize, and a game. When a ball wins in the winning area, a payout control means (payout control device 200) capable of paying out the number of prize balls determined for each winning area.
The first display device (batch display device 50) capable of displaying the display related to the game, and the setting confirmation means (setting key switch 92,) capable of confirming the set values (set value, probability set value) related to the game condition.
RAM initialization switch 112), set value, and performance information derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize (role ratio, ball ejection rate for the latest predetermined number of ejected balls, total ball ejection) A second display device (status display device 152) capable of displaying a rate and a base value) is provided. The control means displays the display of the first display device in a predetermined display mode (for example, full lighting display, previous time) in response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the set value can be confirmed by the setting confirmation means. (Display of the stop symbol of the identification information of the game), and the performance information is displayed on the second display device in response to the fact that the set value cannot be confirmed by the setting confirmation means. Can be displayed.

According to such a game machine 10, when the setting confirmation state is switched to the game-enabled state in which the set value cannot be confirmed, the performance information can be immediately displayed on the second display device, so that the game hall manager can display the performance information immediately. Work efficiency can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment has a setting changing means (setting change) capable of changing a setting value (setting value, probability setting value) when the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) is set. The device 42 and the RAM initialization switch 112) are further provided. Control means (game control device 1
00) is a display when the display of the first display device (batch display device 50) is changed to the setting change state (probability setting value display) or a display related to the game in response to the setting confirmation state. Is in a different mode (for example, full lighting display). According to such a game machine 10, since the display mode of the first display device is different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, the game hall manager can easily set the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. It is possible to distinguish between the two and improve work efficiency.

Further, the game machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment has a third display device (display device 41) capable of displaying an effect related to a variable display game (special figure variable display game), and a display of the effect on the third display device. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling the above. The effect control means displays the history of setting changes on the third display device in response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). According to such a game machine 10, even if the first display device (batch display device 50) is not in a display mode that indicates that the setting is confirmed, the game hall manager sets the settings from the third display device. It turns out that it is in the confirmation state, and the setting history can be confirmed.

The control means (game control device 100) changes the display mode of the first display device (batch display device 50) to the immediately preceding variable display game (special figure variation) in response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). The display result (stop symbol, identification information) of the display game) is displayed. According to such a game machine 10, since the display mode of the first display device is different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, the game hall manager can easily set the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. It is possible to distinguish between the two and improve work efficiency. Further, since it is not necessary for the first display device to perform the dedicated display mode in the setting confirmation state, the processing load and the amount of data can be suppressed accordingly.

The control means (game control device 100) provides performance information (accessory ratio, latest) to the second display device (state display device 152) in response to the change from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the game-enabled state. Immediately display the ball ejection rate, the total ball ejection rate, and the base value for the predetermined number of ejected balls. According to such a game machine 10, the game field manager can immediately confirm the performance information by changing from the setting confirmation state to the game-enabled state, so that the work efficiency can be improved.

The control means (game control device 100) has changed the display of the second display device (status display device 152) to the setting confirmation state in response to the change from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the game-enabled state. The display is different from the display of the time (probability set value display) or the performance information (role ratio, ball output rate for the latest predetermined number of ejected balls, total ball output rate, base value), and the second After changing the display of the display device to a different mode, the performance information is displayed on the second display device. According to such a game machine 10, immediately after the game becomes playable, a display having a mode different from these displays is displayed second.
Since it is displayed on the display device, it becomes easier for the game hall manager to more reliably grasp that the game has been switched to the playable state.

[14th Embodiment]
FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the probability set value in the game machine 10 of the 14th embodiment. This embodiment is a modified example of the display during and after the change of the probability set value according to the thirteenth embodiment. Therefore, the operation for changing the probability set value and the operation for confirming the probability set value in the present embodiment are the same as those in the thirteenth embodiment, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the digit (0) (display 900-0), digit (1) (display 900-1), digit (2) (display 900-2), digit (3) of the status display device 152. (Displayer 900-3) is used (see FIG. 71) to display the probability setting values before the setting change (setting confirmation), during the setting change, and after the setting change, as described later.

In the present embodiment, the RAM initialization switch 112 (memory erasing means) and the setting key switch 93 (switch, setting changing means) shown in FIG. 119 and the like are turned on (first state) and the power is turned on to the game machine 10. The setting becomes variable with (see FIG. 120). At this time, the game microcomputer 111 constituting the game control device 100 corresponds to the work probability set value (provisional value, whichever is 0 to 5) stored in the work probability set value area of the RAM 111c. The character code (including dot data (Dp = 1)) is extracted. Then, the gaming microcomputer 111 has the character code and the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H (for example, 22H).
The first display data including the hexadecimal representation)) is generated and stored in the probability set value display data area (FIG. 121, A2409). As a result, the first display data (dot data (Dp)
A command including) including = 1) is transmitted to the driver 150 (153) of the status display device 152. The transmission of the status display device 152 to the driver 150 (153) is performed by the LED.
In the data transmission process (A16001 in FIG. 70), it can be executed in the same manner as in the case of transmitting the accessory ratio display data.

Next, by pressing the setting value changing switch 102 (setting changing means), the setting value changing switch 1
When a signal is input from 02, the game microcomputer 111 updates the value in the work probability set value area (0 to 5) (FIGS. 121, A2408), and corresponds to the updated work probability set value information. Character code (including dot data (Dp = 1)) is extracted, and the first display data including the updated character code and the address of the 8-bit latch 167a is generated and stored in the probability set value display data area. (Fig. 121, A2409). As a result, the command including the updated first display data (including dot data (Dp = 1)) is displayed in the status display device 152.
Is sent to the driver 150 of.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the game microcomputer 11
1 stores (overwrites) the information of the working probability setting value stored in the working probability setting value area as the probability setting value (fixed value) after the setting change in the probability setting value area (FIGS. 121, A2412).
). Then, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a character code (including dot data (Dp = 0)) corresponding to the probability setting value after the setting change stored in the probability setting value area, and an address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H). (Hexary number representation))), and the second display data including the data is generated and stored in the probability set value display data area (FIG. 121, A2409). This will
A command including the second display data (including dot data (Dp = 0)) is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152.

Alternatively, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a character code (dot data (Dp = 0)) corresponding to the information of the working probability setting value stored in the working probability setting value area. ) And the address of the 8-bit latch 167a, and by generating the second display data and storing it in the probability set value display data area, the second display data (
It is also possible to send a command including dot data (including dot data (Dp = 0)) to the driver 150 of the status display device 152.

FIG. 135 describes a case where the probability setting value is changed from 1 to 6. Figure 135
As shown in the above, when the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on and the power is turned on, the gaming microcomputer 111 represents the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code (for example, X1000001B: "1". With dot data (D
The first display data including p = 1)) is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. As a result, "1" is displayed as the value being changed on the (digit 0) of the status display device 152, and the dots are lit.

Next, when the setting value change switch 102 is pressed, the information of the probability setting value (working probability setting value) input from the setting value change switch 102 is "2", "3", ... "6". The first display data is updated each time and is transmitted toward (digit 0) of the status display device 152. Therefore, in the (digit 0) of the status display device 152, "2", "3", ... "
6 ”is displayed while being updated as the probability setting value being changed, while the lighting of the dots is maintained.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the game microcomputer 11
Reference numeral 1 is a character code corresponding to the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area (for example, X0000110B: "6" and includes dot data (Dp = 0)). The status display device 1 generates data for the second display including
It is transmitted to the driver 150 of 52. Therefore, in the (digit 0) of the status display device 152, "
6 ”is displayed as the probability setting value after the setting change, while the dots are turned off. And "6"
Is maintained until, for example, a game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening 36 or the like.

In this way, depending on the presence or absence of dot data (Dp = 1) (additional information), the displayed probability setting value is the value during the setting change (provisional value) or the value after the setting change (confirmed value). Can be easily identified.

Here, the probability setting value and / or the dot during the setting change related to the first display data can be displayed blinking. When the dots are blinked, for example, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code (including the dot data (Dp = 1)) corresponding to the information of the working probability set value. 1 Display data (Dp =
1), the address of the 8-bit latch 167a, the character code (dot data (Dp = 0)) corresponding to the information of the working probability setting value, and the first display data (Dp = 0) including the data. By alternately overwriting the probability set value display data area, the first display data (Dp = 1)
) And the first display data (Dp = 0) may be alternately transmitted at predetermined time intervals.

When blinking the probability setting value and the dot during the setting change, for example, the game microcomputer 111 has a character code (dot data (Dp)) corresponding to the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the information of the work probability setting value. = 1)), the first display data (lighting) including, the address of the 8-bit latch 167a, and the character code "X00" related to no lighting.
The first display data (not lit) including "10000B" may be alternately transmitted at predetermined time intervals in the same manner as described above. As a result, the first display data (setting value display lighting) and the first display data (no lighting) are alternately overwritten on the 8-bit latch 167a.

When blinking the probability setting value, the lighting of the dot may be omitted. In this case, the gaming microcomputer 111 corresponds to, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the information of the working probability setting value. A first display data including a character code (including dot data (Dp = 0)), an address of an 8-bit latch 167a, and a first display data including the above-mentioned non-lighting character code. , May be alternately transmitted at predetermined time intervals in the same manner as described above.

The present embodiment is characterized in that the display modes of the first display data and the second display data are different from each other. Therefore, in addition to the presence / absence of dots and the presence / absence of blinking of the probability set value, the intensity of the lit light may be configured to be different between the first display data and the second display data. Further, when the light emitting members (LEDs) of the state display device 152 have a plurality of different emission colors, the first display data and the second display data may be configured to emit light in different colors. ..

[Action / effect of the 14th embodiment]
The game machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and a stop result of the variable display game is a special result. In this case, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated.
The game machine 10 displays information on the set value by causing the setting changing means (setting changing device 42) that can change the setting value (probability setting value) according to the setting related to the game and the light emitting member (LED or the like) to emit light. It is provided with a possible display unit (status display device 152). The setting changing means (setting changing device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value (probability setting value) can be changed, and the switch (setting key switch 93) is The state can be converted into a first state (on state) that allows the transition to the variable setting state and a second state (off state) that terminates the variable setting state. Game control means (game control device 100
) Generates display data based on the set value (probability set value) and the state of the switch (setting key switch 93) and displays it on the display unit (state display device 152). The display data is
The first display data (probability setting value during setting change) generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state, and generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state. The first display data includes the second display data (probability setting value after the setting change) whose display modes are different from each other.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily identify whether the displayed set value (probability set value) is a fixed value or an undetermined value.

Further, the display unit (state display device 152) can display the set value (probability set value) and additional information (Dp = 1) different from the set value (probability set value), and the first display data is , It is characterized by including additional information (Dp = 1).

As a result, the set value (probability set value) changes depending on whether or not the additional information is displayed (dots are lit).
It is possible to easily identify whether it is confirmed or unconfirmed.

Further, the additional information (dot data) is characterized in that it is displayed blinking. This will
The distinctiveness of the probability set value during the setting change can be enhanced by blinking the dots.

Further, the set value (probability set value) related to the first display data is blinking and displayed. As a result, the distinctiveness of the probability set value during the setting change can be enhanced by blinking the probability set value.

[First modification of the 14th embodiment]
FIG. 136 is a schematic view showing a first modification of the display mode of the probability set value in the game machine 10 of the 14th embodiment. In the first modification, when displaying the first display data and when displaying the second display data, the (digit 1), (digit 2), and (digit 3) of the status display device 152 are also lit. ..

That is, the game microcomputer 111 generates a third display data (for example, “P−−”) suggesting that the probability setting value displayed by the first display data is being changed, and sets the probability. By storing in the value display data area (which may be another display data area), the first display data and the third display data are transmitted to the driver 150 of the state display device 152.

Further, the game microcomputer 111 generates a fourth display data (for example, “C−−”) suggesting that the probability setting value displayed by the second display data is after the setting change, and sets the probability. By storing in the value display data area (which may be another display data area), the second display data and the fourth display data are transmitted to the driver 150 of the state display device 152.

The third display data and the fourth display data are stored in the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c in an area that is not initialized by the RAM initialization switch 112.

The third display data includes the third display data (digit 1) transmitted to the (digit 1) (display 900-1) of the status display device 152 and the (digit 2) (display) of the status display device 152. Vessel 900-2
The third display data (digit 2) transmitted toward () and the third display data (digit 3) transmitted toward (digit 3) (display 900-3) of the status display device 152. Including.

The third display data (digit 1) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (for example, 23H (1).
(Hexographic representation)) and a character code (for example, “X0011010B” (−)).

The third display data (digit 2) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (for example, 24H (1).
(Hexographic representation)) and a character code (for example, “X0011010B” (−)).

The third display data (digit 3) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (for example, 25H (1).
(Hexographic representation)) and a character code (for example, "X0010100B" (P)).

The fourth display data includes the fourth display data (digit 1) transmitted toward (digit 1) of the status display device 152 and the fourth display data transmitted toward (digit 2) of the status display device 152. Data (digit 2
) And the fourth display data (digit 3) to be transmitted to (digit 3) of the status display device 152.

The fourth display data (digit 1) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (for example, 23H (1).
(Hexographic representation)) and a character code (for example, “X0011010B” (−)).

The fourth display data (digit 2) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (for example, 24H (1).
(Hexographic representation)) and a character code (for example, “X0011010B” (−)).

The fourth display data (digit 3) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (for example, 25H (1).
It includes a hexadecimal representation)) and a character code (for example, "X0001100B" (C)).

As shown in FIG. 136, when the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on and the power is turned on to the game machine 10, the first display data (probability setting value during setting change) is displayed in the same state as described above. It is displayed on the (digit 0) of the device 152, and the data for the third display (
The digits 1) and (-) are displayed on the (digit 1) of the status display device 152, and the third display data (digit 2) (
-) Is displayed on the (digit 2) of the status display device 152, and the third display data (digit 3) (P) is displayed on the (digit 3) of the status display device 152.

Although the dots are lit in FIG. 136, it can be identified that the probability setting value displayed in (digit 0) of the status display device 152 is the one whose setting is being changed due to the existence of the third display data. , Dot lighting may be omitted.

When the setting value change switch 102 is pressed, the information of the probability setting value (working probability setting value) transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 is updated to "2", "3", ... "6". Each time, the first display data is updated and displayed on the (digit 0) of the status display device 152, but the (digit 1), (digit 2), and (digit 3) display of the status display device 152 does not change. ..

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the second display data (digit 0) of the status display device 152 is displayed in the same manner as described above, and the fourth display data (digit 1) (-) is displayed in the status. The fourth display data (digit 2) (-) is displayed on the (digit 1) of the device 152, and the fourth display data (digit 3) (C) is displayed on the (digit 2) of the status display device 152. It is displayed on (digit 3) of the status display device 152.

In this way, different characters are displayed during the setting change (P-) and after the setting change (C-), so whether the currently displayed value is the setting change or after the setting change. It can be easily identified as a thing.

[Action / effect of the first modification of the 14th embodiment]
In the first modification, the display unit (state display device 152) has a plurality of digits (3 digits, 2 digits, 1 digit,
Digit 0) Displayable. The display data is the set value displayed by the first display data (
Probability setting value) suggests that the setting is being changed, and the display unit (status display device 152)
The third display data (P−−) displayed in different digits from the first display data in
including. As a result, it can be easily identified that the displayed probability setting value is being changed.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) transmits the second display data toward the digit (digit 0) displaying the first display data, and the display data is based on the second display data. It suggests that the displayed setting value (probability setting value) is the one after the setting change, and the display unit (
The status display device 152) includes the fourth display data (C−−) displayed in different digits from the second display data. As a result, it can be easily identified that the displayed probability setting value is the one after the setting change. Further, since the second display data is displayed in the same digit as the first display data, the change from the setting change to the setting change can be identified without changing the viewpoint.

[Second modification of the 14th embodiment]
FIG. 137 is a second modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the game machine 10 of the 14th embodiment, in which the display mode of the probability setting value when the setting is changed and the display mode of the probability setting value when the setting is confirmed. It is a schematic diagram comparing with and.

In the second modification, the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is set when the RAM initialization switch 112 shown in FIG. 119 and the like is turned off and the setting key switch 93 is turned on and the power is turned on (see FIG. 120). ). At this time, the generation of the above-mentioned first display data and second display data is prohibited. However, whether the displayed probability setting value is the one whose setting is being changed,
It is easy to identify whether the setting is being confirmed.

The game microcomputer 111 extracts a character code (including dot data (Dp = 0)) corresponding to the probability setting value information stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.
Then, the game microcomputer 111 stores the fifth display data including the character code and the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H (hexameric representation)) in the probability set value display data area, so that the game microcomputer 111 can display the fifth display. 5 Status display device 15 for commands that include display data
It is transmitted to the driver 150 of 2.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the display of the fifth display data is maintained until, for example, the display of the fifth display data ends or the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36 or the like. ..

As shown in FIG. 137 (A), the fifth display data is displayed in the (digit 0) of the status display device 152 in the same manner as the first display data (display during setting change), but the dot data (dot data Since it does not have 1), the dots do not light up. Further, at this time, even if the setting value change switch 102 is pressed, the display content on the status display device 152 does not change.

Further, the game microcomputer 111 suggests that the probability setting value displayed on the state display device 152 by the fifth display data is the one for which the setting is being confirmed (the one before the transition to the setting variable state). The sixth display data can be generated and transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. The sixth display data is stored in, for example, a ROM 111b or a RAM 111c in an area that is not initialized by the RAM initialization switch 112, and is stored in the (digit 1) and (digit 2) of the status display device 152 in the same manner as the fourth display data. ) And (digit 3).
As a result, as shown in FIG. 137 (B), the sixth display data can be displayed in the same manner as the fourth display data (C−−), but the display may be different from the fourth display data. It is possible.

Alternatively, the gaming microcomputer 111 extracts a character code (including dot data (Dp = 0)) corresponding to the probability setting value information stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c. Then, the gaming microcomputer 111 has the character code and the 8-bit latch 16
Address of 7d (or 8-bit latch 167b, 8-bit latch 167c) (eg 25)
The fifth display data including H (hexameric representation)) is stored in the probability set value display data area. As a result, a command including the fifth display data is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137 (C), the digit (digit 0) in which the probability setting value during the setting change is displayed and the digit (digit 3 or digit 1) in which the probability setting value during the setting confirmation is displayed are displayed.
, Digits 2) can be different from each other.

[Action / effect of the second modification of the 14th embodiment]
In the second modification, the game control means (game control device 100) is a storage means (RAM111c) in which information of a set value (probability set value) before shifting to the variable setting state is stored, and a storage means (RAM111c). ) Is provided with a storage erasing means (RAM initialization switch 112) for erasing information different from the information of the set value (probability set value). In the game control means (game control device 100), the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state and the memory erasing means (RA).
When the power of the game machine 10 is turned on while the M initialization switch 112) is on, the first display data is generated (setting change mode), and the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state and the memory is erased. When the power is turned on to the game machine 10 while the means (RAM initialization switch 112) is off, the generation of the first display data and the second display data is prohibited (setting confirmation mode).
Then, the display data is based on the information of the set value (probability set value) before the transition to the variable setting state, on condition that the generation of the first display data and the second display data is prohibited. It is characterized by including the generated fifth display data.

As a result, since the probability setting value is displayed in a state where the setting change of the probability setting value is prohibited, it is possible to avoid an error in which the probability setting value is unexpectedly changed by touching the setting value change switch 102.

Further, the display unit (state display device 152) is capable of displaying a plurality of digits, and the game control means (game control device 100) displays the fifth display data in a digit different from the first display data. As a result, it is possible to easily identify whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed due to the difference in the display position.

Further, the display unit (state display device 152) is capable of displaying a plurality of digits, and the game control means (game control device 100) displays the fifth display data in the same digits as the first display data. The display data suggests that the set value (probability set value) displayed by the fifth display data is before the transition to the variable setting state, and the display unit (state display device 152) has a fifth display unit. The display data includes the sixth display data (C−−) displayed in different digits from the display data. As a result, it can be easily determined that the displayed probability setting value is being confirmed.

[Third variant of the 14th embodiment]
FIG. 138 is a schematic view showing a third modification of the display mode of the probability set value in the game machine 10 of the 14th embodiment. In the third modification, the probability setting value during the setting change (during the setting change)
The provisional value) and the probability setting value (fixed value) before the setting change (before shifting to the variable setting state) are displayed at the same time, and after the setting change, the probability setting value (fixed value) after the setting change and the setting change The previous probability setting value (fixed value) is displayed at the same time.

In the present embodiment, the setting is variable by turning on the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 shown in FIG. 119 and the like in the ON state (first state) and turning on the power. At this time,
The game microcomputer 111 includes the first lighting data (same as the first display data) and FIG. 137 (the same as the first display data).
The second lighting data (same as the fifth display data) shown in C) is generated at the same time. Further, by turning off the setting key switch 93, the game microcomputer 111 can be subjected to the fourth lighting data (
(Same as the second display data) is generated.

Further, the game microcomputer 111 generates the first lighting data (digit 0) and the second lighting data (digit 3), and also generates the third lighting data to generate the driver 1 of the status display device 152.
It can be transmitted to 50, but this can be omitted.

In the third modification, the second lighting data (digit 0) is generated instead of the second lighting data (digit 3), and the timings (alternately) different from those of the first lighting data (digit 0) are generated. ) Is displayed on the status display device 152, and only the status display device 152 (digit 0) (other digits may be used).
The probability setting value during the setting change and the probability setting value before the setting change may be displayed alternately in. Here, the switching cycle between the probability setting value during the setting change and the probability setting value before the setting change is set to a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 seconds), and the display time of the probability setting value during the setting change (for example, 1 second) is set. )When,
The display time (for example, 1 second) of the probability setting value before the setting change is set to be the same. Further, the display time of the probability set value and the display time of one of the probability set values before the setting change may be lengthened and the display time of the other may be shortened. Further, in order to facilitate the distinction between the probability set value during the setting change and the probability set value before the setting change, it is preferable that the first lighting data includes dot data (Dp = 1).

The third lighting data is the probability that the probability setting value is displayed by the fourth lighting data (first lighting data) from the probability setting value before the setting change displayed by the second lighting data in the setting change. It is suggested to change to the set value, and includes the third lighting data (digit 1) (intermediate digit) and the third lighting data (digit 2) (intermediate digit).

The third lighting data (digit 1) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (for example, 23H (1).
(Hexographic representation)) and a character code (for example, “X0011010B” (−)).

The third lighting data (digit 2) is the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (for example, 24H (1).
(Hexographic representation)) and a character code (for example, “X0011010B” (−)).

The character code of the third lighting data (digit 1, digit 2) is "X00111".
It is also preferable to use "10B"("T" rotated 90 degrees to the right, imitating an arrow pointing to the left).

As shown in FIG. 138, when the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on and the power is turned on, the first lighting data (probability setting value during setting change) of the status display device 152 ( It is displayed in digit 0) and the dot lights up. Further, the third lighting data (digit 1) (-) is displayed on the (digit 1) of the status display device 152, and the third lighting data (digit 2) (-) is displayed on the status display device 152 (digit 2). The second lighting data (probability setting value before setting change) is displayed in (digit 3) of the status display device 152.

When the setting value change switch 102 is pressed, the probability setting value information input from the setting value change switch 102 is updated to "2", "3", ... "6", and the first lighting is performed each time. Data is updated and transmitted toward (digit 0) of the status display device 152, but the status display device 1
The display of (digit 1), (digit 2), and (digit 3) of 52 does not change.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the fourth lighting data (probability setting value after the setting change) is displayed on the (digit 0) of the status display device 152 and the dots are turned off in the same manner as described above. Further, the display of the third lighting data (digit 1), the third lighting data (digit 2), and the second lighting data (digit 3) (probability setting value before the setting change) is maintained. This display is maintained until, for example, a game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening 36 or the like.

In this way, since the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value during the setting change (and after the setting change) are displayed at the same time, it is possible to reduce the setting error of the probability setting value.

[Action / effect of the third modification of the 14th embodiment]
The game machine 10 according to the third modification is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of a start condition, and the stop result of the variable display game is special. When the result is a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
The game machine 10 has a setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing a setting value (probability setting value) according to a setting related to the game, and a set value (probability setting value) by causing a light emitting member (LED or the like) to emit light. ) Is provided with a display unit (status display device 152) capable of displaying information. The setting changing means (setting changing device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value (probability setting value) can be changed, and the switch (setting key switch 93) is The state can be converted into a first state that allows the transition to the variable setting state and a second state that terminates the variable setting state. The game control means (game control device 100) is a storage means (RAM 1) in which information of a set value (probability set value) before shifting to the variable setting state is stored.
11c), set value (probability set value), and switch (setting key switch 9)
Lighting data can be generated based on the state of 3) and transmitted to the display unit (state display device 152). The display unit (status display device 152) can display a plurality of digits, and each digit can be displayed by lighting data. The lighting data includes the first lighting data (probability setting value during setting change) generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state and the switch (setting key switch 93) in the first state. In the case of, the second lighting data (before the setting change) is generated based on the setting value (probability setting value) before shifting to the variable setting state and displayed in digits different from the first lighting data. Probability setting value) and.

As a result, the setting value (probability setting value) during the setting change and the setting value (probability setting value) before the setting change are displayed at the same time on the display unit (status display device 152), so that the setting value before the setting change (probability setting value)
It is possible to surely change the setting value (probability setting value) after grasping the probability setting value).

In the third modification, the display unit (status display device 152) has an intermediate digit (digit 3) between the digit (digit 0) for displaying the first lighting data and the digit (digit 3) for displaying the second lighting data. It has digits 1 and 2), and the lighting data includes a third lighting data (−−) displayed in the intermediate digit. Therefore, the probability setting value displayed by the second lighting data is set to the probability setting value displayed by the fourth lighting data (or the first lighting data) while the setting is being changed by the third lighting data. It can be suggested to change.

In the third modification, the lighting data includes the fourth lighting data generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state, and the fourth lighting data is the first lighting data. Is displayed in the same digit (digit 0) as. As a result, the probability setting value during the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change can be visually recognized without changing the viewpoint.

Further, the game machine 10 according to the third modification is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of a start condition, and is a result of stopping the variable display game. Generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when is a special result. The game machine 10 has a setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing a setting value (probability setting value) according to a setting related to the game, and a set value (probability setting value) by causing a light emitting member (LED or the like) to emit light. ) Is provided with a display unit (status display device 152) capable of displaying information. The setting changing means (setting changing device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value (probability setting value) can be changed, and the switch (setting key switch 93) is The state can be converted into a first state that allows the transition to the variable setting state and a second state that terminates the variable setting state. The game control means (game control device 100) is a storage means (R) in which information of a set value (probability set value) before shifting to the variable setting state is stored.
AM111c) is provided, and lighting data can be generated based on the set value (probability set value) and the state of the switch (setting key switch 93) and transmitted to the display unit (state display device 152). .. The display unit (status display device 152) can be displayed by lighting data. The lighting data includes the first lighting data (probability setting value during setting change) generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state and the switch (setting key switch 93) in the first state. In this case, the second lighting data (before the setting change) is generated based on the setting value (probability setting value) before the transition to the variable setting state, and is displayed at a timing different from that of the first lighting data. Probability setting value) and.

As a result, the setting value (probability setting value) during the setting change and the setting value (probability setting value) before the setting change are alternately displayed on the display unit (status display device 152), so that the setting value before the setting change (probability setting value)
It is possible to surely change the setting value (probability setting value) after grasping the probability setting value).

[Fourth Modified Example of the 14th Embodiment]
FIG. 139 is a schematic view showing a fourth modification of the display mode of the probability set value in the game machine 10 of the 14th embodiment. The fourth modification shows the display mode after the setting change shown in FIG. 138, and changes to (A), (B), and (C) with the passage of time in FIG. 139 to determine the probability set value (determined). Value) is displayed to suggest that it will be updated.

In the fourth modification, the fourth lighting data is a character code (for example, "X0000110B") corresponding to the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the information of the working probability setting value when the setting key switch 93 is turned off. "(6)) and.

After a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 93 was turned off, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates the fourth lighting data based on the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (digit 1) and the character code, and displays the probability setting value. It is stored (overwritten) in the data area, and further, the lighting data related to non-lighting is generated by the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code "X0010000B" related to non-lighting, and is stored in the probability set value display data area. Memory (overwrite)
To do.

As a result, the second lighting data (digit 3) (probability setting value before setting change), the third lighting data (digit 2), and the fourth lighting data (digit 1) (probability setting value after setting change). , The non-lighting lighting data (digit 0) is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. Therefore, the 8-bit latch 167b is overwritten with the character code related to the probability setting value (6) after the setting change, and the 8-bit latch 167a is overwritten with the character code related to non-lighting.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), (digit 3) and (digit 2) of the status display device 152
) Is maintained, the probability setting value (6) after the setting change is displayed on the (digit 1) of the status display device 152, and the (digit 0) of the status display device 152 is turned off.

After the predetermined time, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates the fourth lighting data by the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (digit 2) and the character code, stores (overwrites) it in the probability set value display data area, and further. , The lighting data related to non-lighting is generated by the address of the 8-bit latch 167b and the character code related to non-lighting, and stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area. As a result, the second lighting data (digit 3) (probability setting value before setting change), the fourth lighting data (digit 2) (probability setting value after setting change), and non-lighting lighting data (digit 1) ), The non-lighting lighting data (digit 0) is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. Therefore, the 8-bit latch 167c is overwritten with the character code related to the probability setting value after the setting change, and the 8-bit latch 167b is overwritten with the character code indicating no lighting.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), the display of the (digit 3) of the status display device 152 is maintained, while the probability setting value (6) after the setting change is displayed on the (digit 2) of the status display device 152. Is displayed, and the (digit 0) and (digit 1) of the status display device 152 are turned off.

Further, after a predetermined time, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates the fourth lighting data by the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (digit 3) and the character code, and stores (overwrites) it in the probability set value display data area. Further, the non-lighting lighting data is generated by the address of the 8-bit latch 167c and the character code related to the non-lighting, and is stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area. As a result, the 4th lighting data (digit 3) and the non-lighting data (digit 3)
Digit 2), non-lighting lighting data (digit 1), and non-lighting lighting data (digit 0) are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. Then, the character code related to the probability setting value after the setting change is overwritten on the 8-bit latch 167d, and the character code related to non-lighting is overwritten on the 8-bit latch 167c.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 139 (C), the probability setting value (6) after the setting change is displayed on the (digit 3) of the status display device 152, and the (digit 0) and (digit 0) of the status display device 152 are displayed. 1), (digit 2
) Turns off.

In the fourth modification, when the display of FIG. 139 (C) is displayed, the working probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is stored in the probability setting value area as the probability setting value after the setting change. (Overwrite. Alternatively, even in the stage before the display of FIG. 139 (C), for example, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the like, the working probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is set. It is stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value area as the changed probability setting value.

[Action / effect of the fourth modification of the 14th embodiment]
In the fourth modification, the lighting data includes the fourth lighting data generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state, and the game control means (game control device 100).
) Indicates the fourth lighting data, the digit (digit 0), the intermediate digit (digit 1), which displays the first lighting data.
The display unit (digit 2) moves in the order of the middle digit (digit 2) and the digit (digit 3) displaying the second lighting data.
It is transmitted to the status display device 152).

As a result, it is possible to visually grasp that the probability setting value is updated (overwritten) from the probability setting value before the setting change to the probability setting value after the setting change due to the setting change.

[Fifth Modified Example of the 14th Embodiment]
FIG. 140 is a schematic view showing a fifth modification of the display mode of the probability set value in the game machine 10 of the 14th embodiment. Similar to the fourth modification, the fifth modification shows the display mode after the setting change shown in FIG. 138, and the probability changes from (A) to (B) with the passage of time in FIG. 139. The display suggests that the set value (confirmed value) has been updated.

In the fifth modification, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates the fifth lighting data (AFt) suggesting that the probability setting value displayed by the fourth lighting data is the probability setting value after the setting change.

The fifth lighting data includes the fifth lighting data (digit 3), the fifth lighting data (digit 2), and the fifth lighting data (digit 1), which are ROM111b or RAM111c and RA.
It is stored in an area that is not initialized by the M initialization switch 112.

The fifth lighting data (digit 3) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167d and the character code (“X000110B” (A)).

The fifth lighting data (digit 2) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167c and the character code (“X0001111B” (F)).

The fifth lighting data (digit 1) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167b and the character code (“X0011100B” (t)). Note that, unlike FIG. 72, the character code “X0011100B” corresponds to the character “t”.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the game microcomputer 111 is 8
The sixth lighting data representing the probability setting value before the setting change by the address of the bit latch 167a and the character code (for example, "X0000001B" (1)) corresponding to the probability setting value information stored in the probability setting value area. To generate.

Further, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes (digit 3), (digit 2), and (digit 1) of the status display device 152.
Is used to generate the 7th lighting data (bEf) suggesting that the probability setting value displayed by the 6th lighting data is the one before the setting change.

The 7th lighting data includes the 7th lighting data (digit 3), the 7th lighting data (digit 2), and the 7th lighting data (digit 1), which are also ROM111b or RAM111c and RA.
It is stored in an area that is not initialized by the M initialization switch 112.

The seventh lighting data (digit 3) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167d and the character code (“X0001011B” (b)).

The seventh lighting data (digit 2) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167c and the character code (“X0001110B” (E)).

The seventh lighting data (digit 1) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167b and the character code (“X0001111B” (F)).

After turning off the setting key switch 93 (second state), the gaming microcomputer 111
The sixth lighting data (digit 0) is generated by the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (digit 0) and the character code (for example, "X0000110B" (1)) corresponding to the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Then, it is stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area, and the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (digit 1) and the character code (for example, "X0001111B") are stored.
(F)), the seventh lighting data (digit 1) is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area (may be another display data area).

Further, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (digit 2) and the character code (for example, "X0001110B" (E)) to provide the seventh lighting data (digit 2).
Is generated and stored in the probability setting value display data area (may be another display data area) (overwrite)
Then, the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (digit 3) and the character code (for example, "X00").
The seventh lighting data (digit 3) is generated by "01011B" (b)) and stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area (may be another display data area). As a result, the sixth lighting data (digit 0) and the seventh lighting data (digit 1, digit 2, digit 3) are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152.

As a result, the character code "X0000001B" (1) related to the sixth lighting data (digit 0) is overwritten on the 8-bit latch 167a, and the seventh on the 8-bit latch 167b.
The character code "X0001111B" (F) related to the lighting data (digit 1) is overwritten, and the character code "X" related to the seventh lighting data (digit 2) is applied to the 8-bit latch 167c.
"0001110B" (E) is overwritten, and the character code "X0001011B" (b) related to the seventh lighting data (digit 3) is overwritten on the 8-bit latch 167d.

Therefore, after turning off the setting key switch 93 (second state), FIG. 140 (A)
) Is displayed on the status display device 152, and it can be recognized that the probability setting value before the setting change is “1”. Further, in the fifth modification, it may be configured to be displayed as "1bEF" (1Before).

After that, the game microcomputer 111 uses the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (digit 0) and the character code (for example, “for example,”
The fourth lighting data (digit 0) is generated by "X0000110B" (6)) and stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area, and the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (digit 1) and the character code ("X0011100B"). (T)), the fifth lighting data (digit 1) is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area (may be another display data area).

Further, the game microcomputer 111 uses the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (digit 2) and the character code (for example, "X0001111B" (F)) to provide the fifth lighting data (digit 2).
Is generated and stored in the probability setting value display data area (may be another display data area) (overwrite)
Then, the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (digit 3) and the character code (for example, "X00").
The fifth lighting data (digit 3) is generated by "01010B" (A)) and stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area (may be another display data area).

As a result, the fourth lighting data (digit 0) and the fifth lighting data (digit 1, digit 2, digit 3) are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. Then, the character code "X0000110B" (6) related to the fourth lighting data (digit 0) is overwritten on the 8-bit latch 167a, and the character related to the fifth lighting data (digit 1) is overwritten on the 8-bit latch 167b. The code ("X0011100B" (t)) is overwritten, the character code "X00011111B" (F) related to the fifth lighting data is overwritten on the 8-bit latch 167c, and the 8-bit latch 167d is overwritten with the fifth lighting data. The relevant character code "X0001010B"
"(A) is overwritten.

As a result, after FIG. 140 (A), as shown in FIG. 140 (B), the status display device 152
"AFt6" (After6) is displayed in, and it can be recognized that the probability setting value after the setting change is "6". Further, in the fifth modification, it may be configured to be displayed as "6AFt" (6After). In particular, by displaying the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change in the same digit (a digit other than the digit 0 may be used), the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability after the setting change are displayed. The set value can be easily identified.

In the fifth modification, when the display of FIG. 140 (B) is displayed, the working probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is stored in the probability setting value area as the probability setting value after the setting change. (Overwrite. Alternatively, even in the stage before the display of FIG. 140 (B), for example, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the like, the working probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is set. It is stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value area as the changed probability setting value.

[Action / effect of the fifth modification of the 14th embodiment]
In the fifth modification, the lighting data suggests that the set value (probability setting value) displayed by the fourth lighting data is after the setting change, and has a digit different from that of the fourth lighting data. Includes the displayed fifth lighting data (AFt). Further, the lighting data is the sixth lighting data generated based on the setting value (probability setting value) before the transition to the setting variable state when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state. including. In addition, the lighting data suggests that the set value (probability setting value) displayed by the sixth lighting data is before the transition to the variable setting state (before the setting change), and the sixth lighting data. The seventh lighting data (bEF) displayed in a digit different from the above is included. The game control means (game control device 100) is
When the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state, the sixth lighting data (probability setting value before setting change) and the seventh lighting data (bEF) are output, and then the fourth lighting data (bEF) elapses. The lighting data (probability setting value after changing the setting) and the fifth lighting data (AFt) are output.

As a result, the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change are displayed with a time difference together with a display suggesting them, so that the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change can be easily displayed. Can be identified.

Further, the fourth lighting data and the sixth lighting data are displayed in the same digit (digit 0). As a result, the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change can be easily identified without moving the line of sight.

[15th Embodiment]
The fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 151. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourteenth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fourteenth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The fifteenth embodiment relates to setting a fluctuation pattern of a special figure fluctuation display game and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
With reference to FIG. 141, the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 18) and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 18)
The details of the fluctuation pattern setting process (A3406, A3506) in FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process according to the fifteenth embodiment executed by the game control device 100.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group table (distribution table, variable pattern group) based on information (here, variable pattern group number) that is drawn and determined at the end of the big hit by the big hit end process described later. (A4301). Specifically, the corresponding fluctuation group table is set according to the fluctuation pattern group number. The fluctuation pattern group number functions as a parameter (index value, parameter value) that is associated with the fluctuation group table and determines the fluctuation group table. In addition to the fluctuation pattern group number, the fluctuation group table is also based on the current game state (probability change state, normal state, etc.) and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game to be started (missing, small hit, big hit). Is set.

Then, a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of hold 1) and prepared (A4302). Then, the 2-byte distribution process is executed (A4303), the address of the variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the variation selection table is prepared (A4304).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and prepares a random number from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4305). Then, the sorting process is executed (A430).
6) Obtain the variable number obtained as a result of sorting and save it in the variable number area (A4).
307).

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4303) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 142A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 2-byte distribution process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the selection table (variable group table prepared in A4301) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (A4401). Here, the variable group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variable selection table, but a variable group table (for example,) that defines only the variable selection table whose variation pattern is “no reach”. , In some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need to sort, so the sort value "
"0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the head data of the selection table (variable group table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. (A4407), the 2-byte distribution process is completed. On the other hand, if the first data of the selection table (variable group table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "N"), the selection table (variable group table)
Obtain the one distribution value specified first in (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A4302 (A4404).
, It is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403, which is followed by the process. Subsequent processing is performed. That is, a new random number value is obtained by acquiring the distribution value specified next in the selection table (variable group table) (A4403) and then subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in the previous step A4405. Is calculated (A4404)
), It is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

In step A4405, it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4).
Execute until the result of 405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the variable selection tables (variable pattern selection table) is selected from at least one variable selection table defined in the selection table (variable group table). Then, in step A4405, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result (A4407), and 2 bytes. The sorting process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution process (A4306) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 142B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sorting process. The distribution process is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) based on the variation pattern random number 2.

First, the game control device 100 checks whether the head data of the target selection table (variation selection table prepared in step A4304) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A4501). Here, the variation selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern (variation number), but in the case of a selection table that does not need to be distributed, the distribution value is "0", that is, The code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the head data of the target selection table (variable selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. Then (A4507), the sorting process is completed. On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (variable selection table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is "N"), the first data specified in the target selection table (variable selection table) is one. Acquire the distribution value (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 calculates a new random number value by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random number value (value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2) prepared in step A4305 (A4504). It is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), step A4.
The process proceeds to the process of 503, and the subsequent processes are performed.

That is, a new distribution value is obtained by acquiring the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (variable selection table) (A4503), and then subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in the previous step A4505. A random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). Perform the above process in step A4
It is executed until it is determined in 505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the at least one fluctuation pattern (variation number) defined in the target selection table (variation selection table) is (variation number).
Is selected.

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result. (A4507), the sorting process is completed.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 143, details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3407, A3507) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 18) and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process according to the fifteenth embodiment executed by the game control device 100.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 (A4601). Next, the fluctuation time value table is set (A4602), and the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation number is acquired (A4603).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation time value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4604). After that, the variable command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variable number.
Is prepared as an effect command (A4605), and the effect command setting process is performed (A460).
6). Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (A4607), and then
The address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (A4608). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4609), and the free area after the shift is cleared (A46).
10), the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Big hit end processing]
With reference to FIG. 144, the jackpot end process (A) in the above-mentioned special figure game process (FIG. 12).
The details of 2614) will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end processing according to the fifteenth embodiment executed by the game control device 100.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability fluctuation determination data is high probability data (A6201). In this embodiment, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 25)
In step A4008 of the above and step A4108 of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 26), the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is set. The probability fluctuation judgment data becomes high probability data when it is a stop symbol number of a probability variation jackpot that becomes a probability variation state after the end of the jackpot, and becomes low probability data when it is a stop symbol number of a normal jackpot that becomes a time saving state after the end of the jackpot. ..

The game control device 100 executes the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6202) when it is not high-probability data (the result of A6201 is “N”), and when it is high-probability data (the result of A6201 is “Y”). , The jackpot end setting process 2 is executed (A6203).

In the jackpot end setting process 1, in order to shorten the time after the jackpot ends (low probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game), the normal figure high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area, and the special figure game mode flag is saved. Save the special figure low probability & time saving flag in the area. Further, in the jackpot end setting process 1, the initial value of the time reduction fluctuation number is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number region.

In the jackpot end setting process 2, in order to set the probability change state (high probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game) after the jackpot ends, the normal figure high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area, and the special figure game mode flag is set. Save the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the area.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the general electric support (time reduction) is generated after the big hit is completed (FIG. 14).
6), the latent probability change state without the normal electric support is not generated in the jackpot end setting process 2. However, when the latent probability change state is generated, in the jackpot end setting process 2, the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area, and the special figure high probability & no time reduction is obtained in the special figure game mode flag area. Save the flag.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table (A6204).
), Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set in the stop symbol setting process (especially A4009, A4109) at the start of fluctuation (A6205), and the effect set after the end of the special game state (big hit state). Acquire and save the effect mode number (effect mode number) of the mode (A6206).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the remaining production speed (initial value) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (A6207), and sets the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Acquires and saves the next mode transition information of (A6208).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number (A6209), and saves the prepared probability information command as an effect command in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A6209). A6210), the effect command setting process is executed (A6211).

Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state after the end of the special game state (big hit state), the presence / absence of the time saving (Public electric support), and the effect mode. As a probability information command, one of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "high probability / no time saving"
In addition, there are multiple commands that include information about the production mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed as an effect command (A6212), and executes the effect command setting process (A6213).
Then, a time reduction fluctuation number command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared as an effect command (A6214), and the effect command setting process is executed (A6215).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a time reduction (Public electricity support) after the end of the big hit (A6216). When there is a time saving (Public electricity support) (A6216 result is "Y")
, The process proceeds to step A6219. When there is no time saving (Public electricity support) (A6216)
The result is "N"), and a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as a production command (A6217).
, The effect command setting process is executed (A6218), and the process proceeds to step A6219.

Next, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing (A).
6219), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A6220).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, one jackpot signal is off, three jackpot signals are off, and four jackpot signals are off) in the external information output data area (A6221), and the jackpot hit. The end signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area. (A6222).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the information in the time reduction determination flag area (A622).
3) Clear the information in the pointer area of the round LED that indicates the number of jackpot rounds (
A6224), the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (A6225). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag evacuation area is cleared (A6226), and the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6227).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not to enter the specific game state after the end of the big hit (
A6228). In the present embodiment, the specific gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), but may include a time saving state or a general electric support state. In the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2, a time saving state (with normal power support) or a probable change state (with normal power support) is set as a specific game state after the big hit state ends (see FIG. 146). When the big hit is a probable big hit, the probable change state is reached after the end of the big hit state, and when it is a normal big hit, the time is shortened.

When the game control device 100 does not enter the specific game state after the end of the big hit (the result of A6228 is "N"), the game control device 100 normally sets the variation pattern group number (number of the variation group table) corresponding to the variation pattern group (A6229). .. In the normal setting, the production mode information,
The variable distribution information is derived based on the stop symbol pattern, etc., the address of the variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information is acquired, and the variable group table number is set (FIG. 1 described later).
63, see FIG. 164).

When the game control device 100 enters a specific game state after the end of the big hit (the result of A6228 is "Y"), the game control device 100 draws and sets the fluctuation pattern group number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern group (variation group table) according to the set value. (A6230). The variation pattern group number is a parameter that defines the variation pattern group. Here, the numbers of the variable group tables A to E (variable pattern group numbers) are set by lottery at a selection rate according to the set value as defined in the selection rate table (see FIG. 147). It should be noted that the process of step A6230 may be started in consideration of conditions other than the state of the specific game after the end of the special game state.

In this way, in the case of the specific game state (the result of A6228 is "Y"), the variable group table number is set by a method (aspect) different from the normal setting by the Fuden support of the specific game state. This corresponds to the occurrence of "small hit RUSH" (small hit rush). Therefore, when the latent probability changing state without the normal electric support occurs after the jackpot state ends, the latent probability changing state may not be included in the specific gaming state in the determination in step A6228. As shown in FIG. 145 (described later), in the present embodiment, a small hit occurs only in the special figure 2 variable display game, and a small hit occurs with a high probability in each special figure 2 variable display game. Small hit R
"USH" occurs. Further, if a small hit occurs only in the special figure 1 variable display game instead of the special figure 2 variable display game as in the first embodiment, when the normal game state is reached after the big hit state ends, the normal setting is set. It is also possible to set the variable group table number by a different method (aspect).

In each of the fluctuation group tables A to E, the distribution value (rate of distribution of the fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation selection table (variation pattern selection table) is defined (see FIG. 148).
.. Therefore, the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game executed in the specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is determined by lottery according to the set value. Therefore, apart from the jackpot probability, the rate of increase in the number of acquired ball of the game ball acquired by the player can be flexibly adjusted through the variation pattern (that is, the variation time value) drawn according to the set value. The increasing speed of the number of acquired balls (ball ejection speed) is the number of acquired balls of the game ball that the player can acquire per unit time.

After that, the game control device 100 ends the jackpot end process.

[Big hit probability and small hit probability]
FIG. 145 illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as a result of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22) and the small hit determination process (FIG. 23) for each setting (each set value). It is a table to do.

In the present embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment, the small hit occurs as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game and does not occur as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game (small in the special figure 1 variable display game). The hit probability is 0 for each setting). The jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process are also the same as those in the eleventh embodiment (FIGS. 104C and 104D).

In the fifteenth embodiment, the jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot occurring, increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. Therefore, the expected value of the number of acquired balls (total of the number of balls to be played and the number of prize balls) obtained by the jackpot in a unit time increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. The rate of increase in the number of acquired balls increases.

On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, the small hit probability, which is the probability that a small hit occurs, is constant regardless of the set value. Further, as shown in the small hit determination process (FIG. 23), there is no distinction between the low probability state and the high probability state in the small hit probability. It is also possible to provide a slight setting difference in the small hit probability and slightly change the small hit probability according to the set value. Small hit probability is normal (about big hit probability)
It is set higher than, and in the normal power support state (probability change state, time saving state), a small hit occurs with a high probability (about 60% here) every time the special figure 2 variable display game is played. RUS
"H" (small hit rush) occurs.

[Example of special figure jackpot symbol distribution]
FIG. 146 is a table illustrating the jackpot symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure variation display game for each setting.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol numbers (types of jackpots, symbols 1 to 5) is constant regardless of the set value, and the probability variation inrush rate is also constant regardless of the set value. Special figure 2
The variable display game is more likely to generate a 16R jackpot than the special figure 1 variable display game, which is advantageous to the player.

[Variable group table selectivity]
FIG. 147 shows the variable group tables A to selected by the lottery in step A6230.
It is a selection rate table (distribution table) that defines the selection rate (ratio, distribution rate) of the number E (variation pattern group number). As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable pattern group number is drawn according to the set value when the specific game state is reached after the end of the big hit (A6230 in FIG. 141). In this way, a variation group table (distribution table) that defines the ratio of distributing the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game executed after the special game state is drawn with a probability (selection rate) according to the set value. ..

Regarding the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation group tables A to E, the expected value of the fluctuation time is A.
It decreases in the order of>B>C>D> E. That is, the average fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes smaller in the order of A>B>C>D> E with respect to the selected fluctuation group tables A to E. The average fluctuation time is the longest when the variable group table A is selected and the shortest when the variable group table E is selected.

In this way, the average fluctuation time (expected value of the fluctuation time) of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed differs for each selected fluctuation group table (distribution table). In the selectivity table of FIG. 147, the lower the set value is, the easier it is to select the variable group table E having a small expected value of the fluctuation time, and the variable group table B having a relatively large expected value of the variable time is selected. It becomes difficult to be done. Therefore, the lower the setting, the smaller the average fluctuation time (expected value of the fluctuation time) of the special figure fluctuation display game during the operation of the game machine 10.

In this way, the lower the set value, the smaller the average fluctuation time (expected value of the fluctuation time) of the special figure fluctuation display game, so even if the small hit probability is constant, it is in a specific game state (probability change here). The expected value of the number of acquired balls (total of the number of balls to be played and the number of prize balls) obtained by "small hit RUSH" in the unit time of (state) is set 6 <setting 5 <setting 4 <setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1 It increases in order, and the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls increases as the setting is lower. In addition, the lower the setting, the smaller the average fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game in the specific game state, so that the hold is digested faster, and the increase speed of the number of acquired balls obtained by "small hit RUSH" is increased. As the number of balls increases, the number of launching balls for which the special figure fluctuation display game does not start even if the hold reaches the upper limit and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) is won is reduced. In this way, the lower the setting for small hits, the more advantageous it is for the player. Therefore, the higher the setting for large hits, the more advantageous it is for the player. To.

[Example of variable group table and variable selection table]
148 and 149 illustrate the variable group tables A to E and the reachless variable selection tables that can be selected in each variable group table. Note that FIG. 148 is an example in which the special figure variation display game is out of the probabilistic state, and FIG. 149 is an example in which the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the probabilistic state. The specific fluctuation group table as shown in FIGS. 148 and 149 is shown in step A4301 of the fluctuation pattern setting process.
In addition to the fluctuation pattern group number, it is set based on the current game state and the result (missing, small hit, big hit) of the special figure fluctuation display game to be started.

In FIGS. 148A-E, the fluctuation group tables A to E constitute a fluctuation pattern group including fluctuation patterns of no reach system, normal reach system, and SP1 reach system. As a result of the 2-byte distribution processing (A4303) by the set variation group tables A to E, the variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) of the non-reach system, the normal reach system, and the SP1 reach system is selected at a predetermined ratio. Further, as a result of the sorting process (A4306) by the selected variation selection table, the variation number (variation pattern number) is selected at a predetermined ratio. In addition, in FIG. 148, for the sake of simplicity, an example in which one variation number is selected at a rate of 100% by the variation selection table is shown for a non-reach system, but FIG. 148A (FIG. 148A)
As shown in another example), a plurality of variation numbers may be selected at a predetermined ratio by the variation selection table.

As shown in FIGS. 148A-E, the expected value of the fluctuation time when the variation selection tables of the non-reach system, the normal reach system, and the SP1 reach system are selected increases in the order of no reach system <normal reach system <SP1 reach system. Is set. For example, the expected value of the fluctuation time may be set to 7 seconds for the non-reach system, 15 seconds for the normal reach system, and 30 seconds for the SP1 reach system.

The selected ratio of the variation selection table of the non-reach system is variable group table A <variable group table B <variable group table C ≤ variable group table D, E (D', E).
The ratio increases in the order of'), and the ratio of the normal reach system or SP1 reach system variable selection table selected is variable group table A> variable group table B> variable group table C.
≧ Fluctuation group table D, E (D', E') decreases in this order. Furthermore, the expected value (mean value) of the fluctuation time when the fluctuation selection table of the same reach system (one of the same one of the non-reach system, the normal reach system, and the SP1 reach system) is selected is the fluctuation group table A> the fluctuation group. It is set to decrease in the order of table B> variable group table C> variable group table D (including D')> variable group table E (including E'). Therefore, the expected value (average value) of the fluctuation time decreases in the order of fluctuation group table A> fluctuation group table B> fluctuation group table C> fluctuation group table D> fluctuation group table E, and the special figure fluctuation display game Becomes a short fluctuation.

The fluctuation group tables D and E and the fluctuation selection table attached thereto are the fluctuation pattern groups when the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game after the end of the jackpot state exceeds a predetermined number of times n (here, 100 times). By switching the numbers (parameters), the variable group tables D'and E'and the accompanying variable selection tables are switched. That is, these are switched according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed after the jackpot state ends. For example,
The fluctuation pattern group numbers corresponding to the fluctuation group tables D'and E'are, for example, numbers 6,
When the number of executions of the special figure variation display game exceeds a predetermined number of times n (here, 100 times), the variation pattern group number is changed from the numbers 4 and 5 to the numbers 6 and 7. In the variable group table E', the expected value of the variable time is significantly shorter than that of the variable group table D'.

In this way, the expected value of the fluctuation time is a normal length (for example, the same as the fluctuation group table C) from 1 to n times (here, 100 times) of the special figure fluctuation display game after the jackpot ends. However, the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game after the big hit is n + 1 times (10 here)
(1 time) or more, the expected value of the fluctuation time becomes short. Therefore, if the special game state (big hit state) does not easily occur (so-called hobby state) continues for more than a predetermined number of times (100 times in this case), the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls is increased to give the player a privilege. Can be given, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, in the specific game state (probability change state, time saving state, normal electric support state) in which the influence of the fluctuation time on the increase speed of the acquired balls is large, the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is executed after the jackpot ends is a predetermined number (here). When it exceeds 100 times), the expected value of the fluctuation time can be shortened, and the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls can be remarkably improved.

In this way, when a specific game state (here, a probabilistic state) in which a special game state is more likely to occur than in a normal state occurs after the special game state, execution of the special figure variation display game executed after the special game state The variation group table (distribution table) is switched by changing the parameter (variation pattern group number) corresponding to the variation group table (distribution table) according to the number of times. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to estimate the set value from the fluctuation pattern.

The expected value (mean value) of the fluctuation time when the fluctuation selection table of the same reach system is selected is the fluctuation group table A (7.0 seconds) for only the fluctuation selection table of the non-reach system shown in FIG. 148. > Variable group table B (5.0 seconds)> Variable group table C
Decrease in the order of (3.0 seconds)> variable group table D (3.0 seconds to 2.0 seconds)> variable group table E (3.0 seconds to 0.5 seconds), normal reach system or SP1 reach system. Then it may not change.

FIG. 149 is the same as that of FIG. 148, but when the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the probability variation state, the variation selection table that can be selected in each variation group table A to E is
There are only non-reach type and normal reach type. Further, the fluctuation time value of the fluctuation of the non-reach system defined by the variation selection table of the non-reach system is different from that of FIG. 148. The fluctuation time value of the variation of the non-reach system is shorter than that of FIG. 148 in FIG. 149, but may be longer. Special figure 2 Since the small hit probability in the variable display game is higher than the probability of loss, if the fluctuation time value when a small hit occurs is shorter than the case of loss, the speed of pending digestion in "small hit RUSH" will increase. As the speed increases, the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls increases.

Further, in the case where the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the probability variation state, the contents of the variation group tables A to E and the variation selection table may be the same, and the data capacity of the table may be reduced.

[Modified example of the 15th embodiment]
A modified example of the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151. This modification relates to the lottery / setting of the variable group table (variable pattern group).

The jackpot end process (A2614) in the special figure game process (FIG. 12) according to the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end processing according to the modified example of the fifteenth embodiment. The same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents as those in FIG. 144, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (A7201). In addition, step A400 of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 25)
8 and special figure 2 In step A4108 of the stop symbol setting process (FIG. 26), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is set. In addition, when there is a general electric support after the big hit, the time reduction determination data becomes the time reduction operation data, and when there is no general electric support after the big hit, the time reduction determination data is not the time reduction operation data.

First, when the game control device 100 is not the time saving operation data (the result of A7201 is "N").
) Is the case where the jackpot end setting process 3 is executed (A7202) and the time saving operation data is obtained (A7).
When the result of 201 is “Y”), the jackpot end setting process 4 is executed (A7203).

In the big hit end setting process 3, in order to make the latent probability change state after the big hit ends, the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area, and the special figure high probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. To save. Further, in the jackpot end setting process 3, the initial value of the high probability fluctuation number is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region. In this modified example, since the normal power support is always generated after the big hit ends, the big hit end setting process 3 is not executed and the latent probability change state does not occur. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a latent probability change state is generated after the end of the big hit is also possible.

In the jackpot end setting process 4, in order to put the probability change state (not the latent probability change state) after the jackpot ends, the normal figure high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area and the special figure height is set in the special figure game mode flag area. Save the flag with probability & time reduction. Further, in the jackpot end setting process 4, the initial value of the high probability fluctuation number is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region.

Further, after step A6213, the game control device 100 prepares a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number as an effect command (A7214), and executes the effect command setting process (A6215).

Then, when the game control device 100 enters a specific game state (here, a probability change state) after the end of the big hit (the result of A6228 is "Y"), the change pattern group number (and thus the change group table) is set according to the set value. Set according to the jackpot symbol drawn with a high probability (A)
7230). In this modified example, it is configured to be in a specific game state (here, a probable change state) after the end of the big hit.

In this way, the jackpot symbol (big hit stop symbol) is a parameter (index value, parameter value) associated with the variable group table in order to define the variable group table (distribution table). In step A4004 of the 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 25) and step A4104 of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 26), lottery is performed according to the set value as the jackpot stop symbol number.

FIG. 151 is a jackpot symbol table illustrating the jackpot symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure variation display game for each setting in the modified example of the fifteenth embodiment. Similar to FIG. 27, this jackpot symbol table defines jackpot symbols A to E (each corresponding to a jackpot stop symbol number) indicating the type of jackpot and its distribution rate (selection rate). In this embodiment, all types of jackpots are probabilistic jackpots, and the game machine 10 is an ST machine having a predetermined number of high probability fluctuations (for example, 300 times).

Big hit symbol A ~ that was drawn (sorted) based on the distribution rate (selection rate) of the jackpot symbol table
Numbers (variation pattern group numbers) of fluctuation group tables A to E are set correspondingly to E, respectively (A7230).

Regarding the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation group tables A to E, the expected value of the fluctuation time is A.
It decreases in the order of>B>C>D> E. In the jackpot symbol table of FIG. 151, the lower the setting, the easier it is to select the fluctuation group table E having a smaller expected value of the fluctuation time, and the more difficult it is to select the fluctuation group table B having a relatively large expected value of the fluctuation time ( Similar to FIG. 147). Therefore, the lower the setting, the smaller the average fluctuation time (expected value of the fluctuation time) of the special figure fluctuation display game during the operation of the game machine 10.

[Action / Effect of the 15th Embodiment]
The game machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment is a control means (game control device 1) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, winning a prize in a starting winning opening).
00, the effect control device 300) is provided, and when the stop result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special game state (big hit state) advantageous to the player is generated. The game machine 10 has a setting changing means (for example, a setting key switch 93) capable of changing a setting value according to a setting related to the game.
And a setting value change switch 102). The control means determines a variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the special gaming state (for example, a big hit) by drawing a lot according to a set value.

Therefore, apart from the probability of occurrence of the special game state (big hit probability), the rate of increase in the number of game balls acquired by the player is flexible through a fluctuation pattern (that is, a fluctuation time value) drawn according to the set value. Can be adjusted to. In particular, usually, after the special game state, the specific game state (probability change state, time saving state, normal electric support state) is reached, so that the fluctuation pattern (that is, the fluctuation time value) has a large influence on the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls. ..

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) is
A parameter (for example, a fluctuation pattern group number or a jackpot symbol) associated with a distribution table (for example, a fluctuation group table) that defines a ratio for distributing a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation display game executed after a special game state is set as a set value. It will be decided by lottery with a probability according to.

Therefore, the distribution table can be selected by drawing the parameters associated with the distribution table with a probability according to the set value, and the fluctuation pattern can be further distributed by the distribution table. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern can be preferably drawn according to the set value. Also,
If the ratio (selection rate) of distributing fluctuation patterns is different for each distribution table,
More preferably, the fluctuation pattern can be drawn according to the set value.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the expected value of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern distributed by the distribution table differs for each distribution table. Therefore, for a set value with a low jackpot probability,
By facilitating the lottery of the distribution table having a short expected value of the fluctuation time, the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls can be increased and the setting difference (difference due to the set value) with respect to the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls can be reduced. On the contrary, by making it easier to draw a distribution table with a short expected value of fluctuation time for a set value with a high jackpot probability, the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls is increased, and the setting difference with respect to the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls. (Difference depending on the set value) can be increased.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, a parameter corresponding to the distribution table (for example, for example, so as to switch the distribution table according to the number of executions of the variable display game executed after the special game state).
Change the fluctuation pattern group number). Therefore, by switching to the distribution table with a short or long expected value of the fluctuation time according to the number of executions of the fluctuation display game after the special game state, the player estimates the set value from the fluctuation pattern as compared with the case without switching. It becomes difficult to do.

Further, for example, the number of times the variable display game is executed after the special gaming state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 10).
By switching to a distribution table with a shorter expected value of fluctuation time when it becomes larger than 0 times), a state in which a special game state (big hit state) does not easily occur (so-called hamari state) continues for more than a predetermined number of times. In this case, the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls can be increased to give a privilege to the player, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, when the stop result of the variable display game is the first special result, the control means generates the first special game state (big hit state), and the stop result of the variable display game is the second special. When the result is obtained, a second special game state (small hit state) in which the game value that can be acquired by the player is smaller than that of the first special game state is generated. The control means determines a variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the first special gaming state by drawing a lot according to a set value. The control means is in a gaming state (for example, in a specific gaming state) in which a second special gaming state (small hit state) is likely to occur after the first special gaming state when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of a probability variation big hit). It is possible to generate a small hit RUSH). Therefore, if the variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the first special game state (big hit state) is drawn so as to be shortened according to the set value, the second special game state (small hit state) is likely to occur. The speed of hold digestion in a state (for example, small hit RUSH in a specific game state) is increased, the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls in the second special game state (small hit state) is increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the control means draws a parameter associated with the distribution table that defines the distribution ratio of the variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the special gaming state with a probability according to the set value. .. The control means determines the variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the special gaming state by lottery based on the distribution table corresponding to the selected parameter drawn. The control means is after the special game state when a specific game state (probability change state, time saving state, normal electric support state) in which a special game state is more likely to occur than in the normal state occurs after the special game state (big hit state). The parameter corresponding to the distribution table (for example, the variation pattern group number) is changed so as to switch the distribution table according to the number of times the variable display game is executed. Therefore, for example, by switching to a distribution table in which the expected value of the fluctuation time is short according to the number of executions of the fluctuation display game, the specific game in which the fluctuation time has a greater influence on the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls than in the normal game state. In the state, the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls can be greatly improved.

[16th Embodiment]
The sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 166. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifteenth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fifteenth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

The 16th embodiment relates to changing the effect pattern (effect mode) according to the above-mentioned set value (setting). In particular, in the 16th embodiment, even when the jackpot probability is the same among the plurality of set values, the appearance rate (appearance mode) of the predetermined effect is different for each set value among the plurality of set values. As will be described later, the predetermined effects include a normal notice, a reach effect, a look-ahead effect, a special number notification effect among the lucky number notification effects, a character effect, a background effect, and the like. The appearance rate of the effect may be the probability (appearance probability) that the effect appears per one special figure variation display game, or the appearance of the effect per unit time (for example, 10 minutes, 1 hour, 1 day). It may be the number of times (appearance speed).

[Game board]
FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the 16th embodiment. The game board 30 according to the 16th embodiment is a game board 30 (FIG. 2A) of the 1st embodiment to which a lucky number display device 82 is added. The lucky number display device 82 is controlled by the effect control device 300, and performs a lucky number notification effect that notifies a number (lucky number, here 1 to 9) selected by lottery when a big hit occurs. The lucky number display device 82 may be controlled by the effect control device 300 so as to continuously notify the selected number (lucky number) when a big hit occurs until the next big hit occurs.

Further, in the lucky number display device 82, when a special number notification effect (special notification effect) for notifying a specific number (for example, 3, 7) among the lucky numbers (1 to 9) appears, the game hall (game). Benefits are given to the players by the staff and managers of the store). Benefits include the right not to exchange the prizes of the acquired game balls for each big hit, points that can be used at the game hall, and the like. As a result, the player pays attention to the numbers (display contents) of the lucky number display device 82, and the interest of the game is improved.

In FIG. 152, the position of the lucky number display device 82 is, but is not limited to, the lower right side of the game board 30 and the lower side of the special variable winning device 39. When the lucky number display device 82 is provided adjacent to (opposite) to the special variable winning device 39 as shown in FIG. 152, the special variable winning device 39 is caused by the light emission of the lucky number display device 82 and the big hit.
The player can visually recognize that the open state is continuously or simultaneously, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, as shown in FIG. 152, when the lucky number display device 82 is provided adjacent to (opposite) to the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 of the batch display device 50,
The special figure variation display game on the first special figure variation display unit 51 or the second special figure variation display unit 52 and the light emission of the lucky number display device 82 can be visually recognized continuously or simultaneously, and the fun of the game is improved. To do.

In the present embodiment, the lucky number display device 82 corresponds to LE corresponding to each number 1 to 9.
An LED that has a D lamp as a light emitting unit and corresponds to a number selected from numbers 1 to 9.
The lamp is turned on or blinked to notify the player of the selected number. For example, when the number 3 is selected, the LED lamp of the number 3 of the lucky number display device 82 emits light.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting unit is an LED lamp that illuminates a number described as a form on a surface cover from the back by the light of a light emitting member (LED), and a plurality (9 pieces) as shown in FIG. 152. ) Provided. However, the lucky number display device 82 may be one 7-segment type lamp or one liquid crystal display device (display device 41 can also be used) that lights or blinks the selected number.

[Big hit probability and production pattern]
FIG. 153 is a table exemplifying the jackpot probability and the effect pattern for each setting (each setting value). The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot occurring in the special figure variation display game, is the same in settings 1, 2, and 3, and is the same in settings 4, 5, and 6. Settings 4, 5, 6
The jackpot probability of is higher than the jackpot probability of settings 1, 2, and 3. Even if the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of set values (1, 2, 3 or 4, 5, 6), the effect control device 300 sets an effect pattern for each set value among the plurality of set values. Make it different. In the present embodiment, the effect pattern is a predetermined effect (normal notice, reach effect, look-ahead effect, special number notification effect,
Appearance mode (appearance rate, etc.) of character effect, background effect, etc.

In the same jackpot probability settings 1, 2 and 3, setting 1 is the effect pattern 1 and setting 2
Is the effect pattern 2, and the setting 3 is the effect pattern 3, which is different for each set value. In the same jackpot probability settings 4, 5 and 6, setting 4 is the effect pattern 1, setting 5 is the effect pattern 2, and setting 6 is the effect pattern 3, and the effect patterns are different for each set value.

FIGS. 154 (A) and 154 (B) show another example of the jackpot probability and the effect pattern according to the set value. In FIG. 154 (A), in the same jackpot probability settings 1 and 2, the setting 1 is the effect pattern 1 and the setting 2 is the effect pattern 2, and the effect patterns are different for each set value. In the same jackpot probability settings 3 and 4, the setting 3 is the effect pattern 1, the setting 4 is the effect pattern 2, and the effect pattern is different for each set value. Setting the same jackpot probability 5
In No. 6, the setting 5 is the effect pattern 1, the setting 6 is the effect pattern 2, and the effect pattern is different for each set value. In FIG. 154 (B), the same jackpot probability setting 1
In 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, setting 1 is the effect pattern 1, setting 2 is the effect pattern 2, setting 3 is the effect pattern 3, setting 4 is the effect pattern 4, and setting 5 Is the effect pattern 5, and the setting 6 is the effect pattern 6, and the effect pattern is different for each set value.

As described above, even if the jackpot probability is the same among the plurality of set values and there is no difference in the number of acquired balls (setting difference) due to the set value, the player can see the difference in the effect pattern depending on the set value (the difference in the production pattern). It is possible to expect a difference in production), and it is possible to select a game machine in which a predetermined production occurs frequently. Then, in the amusement park, the operation of the amusement machine is improved.

Further, for example, in the effect pattern 1, the appearance rate (for example, New Year) of the character effect by the character A (for example, Daruma) and the background effect (for example, New Year) matching the character A as a predetermined effect (
The selection rate) is set to 100%, the appearance rate (selection rate) of the character effect by character B (for example, Santa Claus) and the background effect (for example, Christmas) that matches character B is set to 0%, and conversely, in the effect pattern 2. , Character production by character A and character A
The appearance rate of the background effect that matches the character B can be set to 0%, and the appearance rate of the character effect by the character B and the background effect that matches the character B can be set to 100%. If you do this
Depending on the set value, the atmosphere of the production of the game machine can be drastically changed, giving the impression that it is a different game machine, and the types of game machines installed in the game hall can be apparently increased. it can.

The character effect may be an effect of displaying the character on the display device 41, an effect of including the decorative identification symbol, an effect of operating a movable accessory imitating the character, or the like. The background effect is an effect of displaying the background on the display device 41.

[Variable effect setting process]
With reference to FIG. 155, the variation effect setting process according to the 16th embodiment (B1905 in FIG. 43).
The details of. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. The same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents as those in FIG. 44, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

For simplicity of explanation, FIG. 155 corresponds to steps B2002 and B2004 of FIG.
In steps B2002a and B2004a of the above, the first half advance notice distribution group address table is set independently of the set value. Therefore, the notice lottery (selection rate, notice appearance rate) that appears during the first half fluctuation does not depend on the set value.

In step B2007a, the effect control device 300 determines the number of effect points.
Set the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type. For the sake of simplicity, unlike step B2007 in FIG. 44, the latter half notice distribution group address table does not depend on the set value. Next, the address of the second half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT section of the variable command is acquired (B20).
08).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes a second half advance notice distribution group table change process that can change the second half advance notice distribution group table by changing the address acquired in step B2008 (B2008a). Changing the second half notice distribution group table is synonymous with changing the address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, based on the changed second half notice distribution group table (may not be changed), a lottery for the second half notice, which is a notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach), is performed (B2009).

Further, after step B2018, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the decorative special figure variation display game started by the variation system command (variation command) received this time is a big hit (B2019). Whether or not it is a big hit can be known from the symbol type (B1802). When the decorative special figure variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B2019 is "N"), the variation effect setting process is terminated.

When the decorative special figure variation display game is a big hit (the result of B2019 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the lucky number distribution table according to the set value and the previous lucky number (B2020). Set lucky number distribution table (see Fig. 161)
Lucky numbers are drawn from the numbers 1 to 9 based on (B2021). The previous lucky number is the lucky number selected at the time of the previous jackpot. After that, a notification setting is made to notify the lucky number display device 82 of the lucky number selected by the lottery (B2022). The set value included in the set value information command is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM in the set value reception processing (B1324).

As a result, the lucky number notification effect is executed. Here, as a notification setting, the LED lamps of each number of the lucky number display device 82 are periodically turned on during the execution of the decorative special figure variation display game (or the lucky number when one 7-segment type lamp is used). The display device 82 may be set to cyclically display the lucky numbers 1 to 9), and the lucky number display device 82 may be set to notify the lucky number selected immediately before the end of the decorative special figure variation display game.

It is also possible to configure the process of steps B2019-B2022 to be executed when the command to stop the symbol is normally received (when the result of B1329 in FIG. 39 is "Y" and the result of B1330 is "Y"). is there. In this configuration, when the decorative identification symbol is stopped, the selected lucky number is notified to the lucky number display device 82.

Further, the process of steps B2019-B2022 is the fanfare effect setting process (B2).
The configuration executed in 102) is also possible. In this configuration, the selected lucky number is notified to the lucky number display device 82 as part of the fanfare effect.

Further, the process of steps B2019-B2022 is the stop symbol setting process (B2012).
It is also possible to configure it to be executed in. In this configuration, the display device 41 is used as the lucky number display device 82, and the jackpot stop symbol of the decorative special figure variation display game becomes the number of the selected lucky number. That is, the jackpot stop symbols are "1,1,1", "2,2,2" ... "9,9,9" corresponding to each of the lucky numbers 1 to 9. In other words, the number of the jackpot stop symbol of the decoration special figure variation display game is used as the lucky number.

[Second half notice distribution group table change processing]
With reference to FIG. 156, the latter half notice distribution group table change process according to the 16th embodiment (
The details of B2008a) of FIG. 155 will be described. FIG. 156A corresponds to FIG. 153, and is a flowchart showing a procedure of the latter half advance notice distribution group table change process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. 156B corresponds to FIG. 154 (A), and is another example of a flowchart showing a procedure of the latter half advance notice distribution group table change process executed by the effect control device 300.

In FIG. 156A, the effect control device 300 first executes a branching process according to the set value (B5201).

When the set value is 1 or 4, the effect control device 300 ends the second half advance notice distribution group table change process without doing anything, and the second half advance notice distribution group table set by the address in step B2008 is not changed. ..

FIG. 157 (A) illustrates a normal second half notice distribution group table with no change. In addition, in the order of button operation system notice, character movement system notice, character light emitting system notice, group notice, the lower the table, the more lively impression the player has and the second half notice (appears during reach) Notice).

When the set value is 2 or 5, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the time measured by the time measuring means (RTC338 or the time timer) is within a predetermined period (B52).
02). The predetermined period may be a period provided regularly every hour (for example, 5 minutes every hour) or a specific period of the day (for example, a period from 2:00 pm to 2:30 pm). But it may be. If the time is not within the predetermined period (the result of B5202 is "N"), the second half notice distribution group table change process is terminated without doing anything. When the time is within the specified period (B5)
The result of 202 is “Y”), the latter half advance notice distribution group table is changed (address change) referred to in the later step B2009 (B5203), and the latter half advance notice distribution group table change process is completed.

FIG. 157 (B) illustrates a latter half notice distribution group table when the set value is changed to 2 or 5. In addition, in FIG. 157 (B), in the normal case of FIG. 157 (A) (the set value is 1).
Or in the case of 4), the lively second half notice under the table (notice that appears during reach)
The selectivity (ratio) of is increased. In addition, the selection rate without notice is reduced compared to the normal case. Therefore, when the set value is 2 or 5, the advance notice during the reach within the predetermined period gives the player great expectations and does not make the player bored.

When the set value is 3 or 6, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is currently waiting for a customer (that is, when receiving a variable command) (B5204). If the customer waiting demo command is received and the customer waiting demo is being executed on the display device 41, it can be determined that the customer is waiting. If the customer is not waiting (the result of B5204 is "N"), the second half notice distribution group table change process is terminated without doing anything. When waiting for customers (the result of B5204 is "Y"), change the second half notice distribution group table (address change) referred to in step B2009 later (B5205), and then change the second half notice distribution group table (B5205). End the change process.

FIG. 157 (C) illustrates a latter half notice distribution group table when the set value is changed to 3 or 6. In addition, in FIG. 157 (C), in the normal case of FIG. 157 (A) (the set value is 1).
Or 4) or when the set value is changed to 2 or 5 as shown in FIG. 157 (B).
The selection rate of the lively second half notice (notice that appears during reach) under the table is further increased. In addition, the selection rate without notice is further reduced. Therefore, when the set value is 3 or 6, the notice during the first reach immediately after the end of waiting for customers becomes lively and gives the player great expectations, so that the player tends to continue the game after that. Become stronger.

As described above, the effect pattern as the appearance mode of the notice (predetermined effect) that appears during the latter half fluctuation has a set value of 1 or 4 and an effect pattern 1 and a set value of 2 or 5, corresponding to FIG. 153. When the effect pattern 2 and the set value are 3 or 6, the effect pattern 3 is obtained.

FIG. 156B is another example of a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half notice distribution group table change processing. In FIG. 156B, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents as those in FIG. 156A.

In FIG. 156B, the effect control device 300 first executes a branching process according to the set value (B5201).

When the set values are 1, 3, and 5, the effect control device 300 ends the second half notice distribution group table change process without doing anything, and the second half notice distribution group table set by the address in step B2008 is displayed. Not changed.

When the set values are 2, 4, and 6, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the time measured by the time measuring means is within a predetermined period or is currently waiting for a customer (B5202a).
). When the time is not within the specified period and waiting for customers (the result of B5202a is "N")
, End the second half notice distribution group table change process without doing anything. If the time is within a predetermined period or is currently waiting for a customer (the result of B5202a is "Y"), the subsequent step B20
Change (address change) the second half notice distribution group table referred to in 09 (B5)
203), the second half notice distribution group table change process is completed.

The second half notice distribution group table when the set values are changed in 2, 4 and 6 is shown in Fig. 157.
It may be the same as (B), and the selection rate of the latter half notice that gives the expectation of the lower side of the table increases more than in the normal case (when the set values are 1, 3, and 5). In addition, the selection rate without notice is reduced compared to the normal case.

As shown in FIGS. 156A and 156B, the effect control device 300 (effect appearance rate setting means) has the same jackpot probability among a plurality of set values, but under predetermined conditions (for example, when the time is within a predetermined period). (When waiting for customers), change the second half notice distribution group table according to the set value, and set the appearance rate of the notice (predetermined effect) that appears during the second half fluctuation differently for each set value. To do. Therefore, only under a predetermined condition, it is possible to intensify or make the notice that appears during the latter half fluctuation for a specific set value violent or lively.

In addition, in FIGS. 156A and 156B, step B5202 (B5202a) and step B5
By omitting 204, the second half notice distribution group table is changed according to the set value regardless of the predetermined conditions, and the appearance rate of the notice (predetermined effect) that appears during the second half fluctuation is always set for each set value. It is also possible to set different settings.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
With reference to FIG. 158, the look-ahead variable system command processing according to the 16th embodiment (B1 of FIG. 38).
The details of 216) will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300. Note that FIG. 158 is shown in FIG.
Only step B1711a is added to No. 1, and the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents as those in FIG. 41, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The effect control device 300 loads the hold information to be read ahead from the look-ahead variation command area in step B1711, and then executes the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process for setting the look-ahead effect distribution table for each set value (B1711a). After that, a look-ahead lottery process for drawing a look-ahead effect based on the set look-ahead effect distribution table and the hold information of the look-ahead target is executed (B1712).

[Look-ahead effect distribution table setting process]
With reference to FIG. 159, the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process according to the 16th embodiment (FIG. 15).
The details of B1711a) of No. 8 will be described. FIG. 159A corresponds to FIG. 153, and is a flowchart showing a procedure of the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. 159B corresponds to FIG. 154 (A), and is another example of a flowchart showing a procedure of the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

In FIG. 159A, the effect control device 300 first sets a normal look-ahead effect distribution table (B5401), and then executes a branch process according to the set value (B5402).

When the set value is 1 or 4, the effect control device 300 ends the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process without doing anything, and the look-ahead effect distribution table set in step B5401 is not changed.

FIG. 160 (A) illustrates a normal look-ahead effect distribution table without change. In addition, FIG.
In No. 60, a look-ahead effect distribution table relating to the pending change notice is illustrated. Hold (start memory)
The display mode of the hold display (starting memory display) displayed on the display device 41 or the like corresponding to the above is a lottery with a different distribution rate (selection rate) depending on whether the hold of the look-ahead target is a big hit or not. .. The display mode of the hold display is, in the order of white (normal mode), blue (first color change mode), and red (second color change mode), which is easy to be selected in the case of a big hit and difficult to be selected in the case of a miss. Expectations for big hits increase in this order.

When the set value is 2 or 5, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the time measured by the time measuring means (RTC338 or the time timer) is within a predetermined period (B54).
03). The predetermined period may be a period provided periodically every hour, or may be a specific period of the day. If the time is not within the predetermined period (the result of B5403 is "N"), the look-ahead effect distribution table is terminated without doing anything. When the time is within the predetermined period (the result of B5403 is "Y"), the look-ahead effect distribution table referred to in the later step B1712 is changed from the normal one (B5404), and the look-ahead effect distribution table is changed. finish.

FIG. 160B illustrates a look-ahead effect distribution table when the set value is changed to 2 or 5. In addition, in FIG. 160 (B), in the normal case of FIG. 160 (A) (set value is 1 or 4).
(In the case of), the fraction (selection rate) of the hold display (red hold, blue hold) with high expectation of big hit at the bottom of the table increases. Here, in particular, when the hold of the look-ahead target occurs more frequently than the jackpot, the selection rate of the hold display with a higher expectation than the normal mode increases.
Therefore, when the set value is 2 or 5, the pending change notice to the display mode with high expectation is generated more than usual within a predetermined period, and the player has great expectations, so that the player does not get bored.

When the set value is 3 or 6, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is currently waiting for a customer (that is, when receiving a variable command) (B5405). When not waiting for customers (
The result of B5405 is "N"), and the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process ends without doing anything. When waiting for customers (the result of B5405 is "Y"), the look-ahead effect distribution table referred to in the later step B1712 is changed from the normal one (B5406), and the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process is performed. finish.

FIG. 160C illustrates a look-ahead effect distribution table when the set value is 3 or 6 and there is a change. In addition, in FIG. 160 (C), in the normal case of FIG. 160 (A) (set value is 1 or 4).
(In the case of) and Fig. 160 (B), the selection rate of the hold display (red hold, blue hold) with higher expectation of big hit at the bottom of the table than when the set value is changed to 2 or 5. Will increase further. Therefore, when the set value is 3 or 6, the look-ahead effect immediately after the end of waiting for the customer becomes particularly lively and gives the player great expectations, so that the player tends to continue the game even after that.

As described above, the effect pattern as the appearance mode of the look-ahead effect (predetermined effect) is shown in FIG. 153.
Corresponding to, when the set value is 1 or 4, the effect pattern 1 is set, and when the set value is 2 or 5, the effect pattern 2 is set.
When the set value is 3 or 6, the effect pattern 3 is obtained.

FIG. 159B is another example of a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process. In FIG. 159B, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents as those in FIG. 159A.

In FIG. 159B, the effect control device 300 first sets a normal look-ahead effect distribution table (B5401), and then executes a branch process according to the set value (B5402).

When the set values are 1, 3, and 5, the effect control device 300 ends the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process without doing anything, and the look-ahead effect distribution table set in step B5401 is not changed.

When the set values are 2, 4, and 6, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the time measured by the time measuring means is within a predetermined period or is currently waiting for a customer (B5403a).
). When the time is not within the specified period and waiting for customers (the result of B5403a is "N")
, Ends the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process without doing anything. When the time is within a predetermined period or is currently waiting for a customer (the result of B5403a is "Y"), the look-ahead effect distribution table referred to in the later step B1712 is changed from the normal one (B5404). , Ends the look-ahead effect distribution table setting process.

The look-ahead effect distribution table when the set values are changed in 2, 4 and 6 is shown in FIG. 160 (B).
The same as the above, and the selection rate of the highly expected hold display (red hold, blue hold) at the bottom of the table is increased as compared with the normal case (when the set values are 1, 3, and 5).

As shown in FIGS. 159A and 159B, the effect control device 300 (effect appearance rate setting means) has the same jackpot probability among a plurality of set values, but under predetermined conditions (for example, when the time is within a predetermined period). (When waiting for customers), change the look-ahead effect distribution table according to the set value, and set the appearance rate of the pending change notice as the look-ahead effect (predetermined effect) differently for each set value. .. Therefore, only under a predetermined condition, the look-ahead effect can be made violent or lively with respect to a specific set value.

In addition, in FIGS. 159A and 159B, step B5403 (B5403a) and step B5
A configuration in which 405 is omitted, the look-ahead effect distribution table is changed according to the set value regardless of a predetermined condition, and the appearance rate of the look-ahead effect (pending change notice) is always set to be different for each set value. Is also possible.

[Lucky number distribution table]
FIG. 161 shows a lucky number distribution table set in step B2020 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 155).

The lucky number distribution table I of FIG. 161 (A) is normally used, and the distribution (selectivity) of each lucky number is the same. In the lucky number distribution table II of FIG. 161 (B), the distribution (selectivity) of the predetermined numbers (4, 9) is lower than the other numbers. In the lucky number distribution table III of FIG. 161 (C), the distribution of a specific number (for example, 3, 7) to which the privilege is given is higher than the other numbers. In the lucky number distribution table IV of FIG. 161 (D), specific numbers (for example, 3, 7) to which the privilege is given.
The distribution of is lower than other numbers and is zero.

[Lucky number distribution table change pattern]
FIG. 162 shows a change pattern of the lucky number distribution table (B2020) set corresponding to the set value and the previous lucky number when a big hit occurs.

When the set value is 1 or 4, the lucky number distribution table is not changed and the normal lucky number distribution table I is always set, and the lucky number effect pattern, which is the appearance mode of the lucky number, is the effect pattern 1. It becomes.

When the set value is 2 or 5, and the previous lucky number (the one selected at the time of the previous jackpot) is a specific number (for example, 3, 7), the lucky number distribution table starts from the normal I. Change to II and then return from II to I (change pattern of I → II → I)
.. As a result, when a specific number (for example, 3, 7) to which the privilege is given is selected as the lucky number, a predetermined number (4, 9) to which the privilege is not temporarily given at the next big hit is selected. It becomes difficult. Therefore, the lottery (appearance rate) of the lucky number will be sharpened and the interest of the game will be improved. As described above, when the set value is 2 or 5, the lucky number effect pattern, which is the appearance mode of the lucky number, becomes the effect pattern 2.

From the normal lucky number distribution table I to the lucky number distribution table II
After being changed to, the lucky number distribution table II may be set not only once but also several times in succession. Also, when a particular number (eg 3, 7) is selected, the lucky number distribution table may return from II to I.

When the set value is 3 or 6, the lucky number distribution table III in which the distribution of a specific number (for example, 3, 7) to which the privilege is given is higher than the other numbers is selected by default.
The last lucky number (the one selected at the time of the last jackpot) is a specific number (for example, 3,
In 7), the lucky number distribution table was changed from III to IV, and then
Return from IV to III (change pattern of III → IV → III). As a result, once a specific number (for example, 3, 7) to which the privilege is given is selected as a lucky number, a specific number (for example, 3, 7) for which the privilege is temporarily given at the next big hit is temporarily given. Is difficult to select. Therefore, the lottery (appearance rate) of the lucky number will be sharpened and the interest of the game will be improved. As described above, when the set value is 3 or 6, the lucky number effect pattern, which is the appearance mode of the lucky number, is the effect pattern 3.

After changing from the normal lucky number distribution table III to the lucky number distribution table IV, the lucky number distribution table IV may be set not only once but also several times in succession. Also, when a predetermined number (4, 9) is selected, the lucky number distribution table may return from IV to III.

As described above, the effect control device 300 (effect appearance rate setting means) is used when the result mode of the special figure variation display game is a big hit (special result mode) even if the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of set values. , The appearance rate of the special number notification effect (predetermined effect) for notifying a specific number (for example, 3, 7) among the lucky numbers (1 to 9) is set differently for each set value (see FIG. 161). For this reason, the lucky number production is sharpened and the interest of the game is improved.

[Modified Example of 16th Embodiment]
A modification of the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 166. In this modification, the game control device 100 has an appearance rate (appearance mode) of a predetermined effect according to a set value (setting).
To be different. Here, the predetermined effect is a reach effect.

[Special figure information setting process]
With reference to FIG. 163, the special figure information setting process according to this modification (A3404 of FIG. 18, FIG. 19).
The details of A3504) will be described. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process executed in the special figure 1 variation start process (FIG. 18) and the special figure 2 variation start process (FIG. 19) by the game control device 100.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection pointer table (A42).
01), acquire the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202).
.. Next, the variable group selection offset table is set (A4203), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4204).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the added value in the variable distribution information area (A4206). As a result, the variable distribution information generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information area. This variable distribution information is a table pointer,
It will later be used to select a variable group table (variable pattern group).

With reference to FIG. 164, the variation pattern setting process (A340) according to the modified example of the 16th embodiment.
6. Details of A3506) will be described. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process executed in the special figure 1 variation start process (FIG. 18) and the special figure 2 variation start process (FIG. 19) by the game control device 100. The same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents as those in FIG. 141, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (A43).
00). Next, with reference to the variable group selection address table, the address of the variable group table (variable pattern group) corresponding to the variable distribution information is acquired, and the variable group table is prepared (A4301a). After that, the variable group table change process that can change the variable group table is executed (A4301b).

Then, the game control device 100 loads and prepares a random number from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4302). Then, the 2-byte distribution process is executed with reference to the variable group table prepared in step A4301a or the variable group table changed in step A4301b (A4303).

[Variable group table change processing]
With reference to FIG. 165, the variable group table change process according to the modified example of the 16th embodiment (
Details of A4301b) in FIG. 164 will be described. FIG. 165A corresponds to FIG. 153 and is a flowchart showing a procedure of the variable group table change process executed by the game control device 100. FIG. 165B corresponds to FIG. 154 (A).
This is another example of a flowchart showing a procedure of a variable group table change process executed by the game control device 100.

In FIG. 165A, the game control device 100 first executes a branching process according to a set value (A4801).

When the set value is 1 or 4, the game control device 100 ends the variable group table change process without doing anything, and the variable group table set by the address in step A4301a is not changed.

FIG. 166 (A) illustrates a case where the normal fluctuation group table without change is out of the special figure fluctuation display game in the normal state (normal game state). The variable group table is
A fluctuation pattern group consisting of fluctuation patterns of no reach system, normal reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, and SP3 reach system is formed. In addition, the fluctuation time becomes longer toward the lower side of the table in the order of the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach system, the normal reach system, the SP1 reach system, the SP2 reach system, and the SP3 reach system, which makes the player expect a big hit. As a result of the 2-byte distribution processing (A4303), the variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) of the non-reach system, the normal reach system, the SP1 reach system, the SP2 reach system, and the SP3 reach system.
Is selected at a predetermined rate. Further, as a result of the sorting process (A4306) by the selected variation selection table, the variation number (variation pattern number) is selected at a predetermined ratio.

When the set value is 2 or 5, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of games (rotation speed) of the current special figure variation display game is within a predetermined range (A4802). The predetermined range may be a range provided periodically every 300 rotations (for example, 50 rotations every 300 rotations) or a specific rotation speed range (for example, a range from 1000 rotations to 1100 rotations) in a day. .. The number of games of the special figure variation display game may be the number of games from the power-on of the game machine 10 or the number of games from the end of the big hit. If the number of games is not within the predetermined range (the result of A4802 is "N"), the variable group table change process is terminated without doing anything.
When the number of games is within the predetermined range (the result of A4802 is "Y"), the fluctuation group table referred to in the subsequent 2-byte distribution process (A4303) is changed (address change) (A4803), and the fluctuation is performed. End the group table change process.

FIG. 166 (B) shows a variable group table when the set value is changed to 2 or 5.
An example shows a case where the special figure variation display game is out of the normal state (normal game state). In addition, in FIG. 166 (B), the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern (long-time reach) in which the fluctuation time on the lower side of the table is longer than in the normal case (when the set value is 1 or 4) in FIG. 166 (A). Will increase.
Therefore, when the set value is 2 or 5, a large number of fluctuation patterns (long reach effects) that are expected even on the display device 41 appear with the number of games within a predetermined range, and the player is not bored.

When the set value is 3 or 6, the game control device 100 is currently (that is, at the start of fluctuation).
It is determined whether or not the customer is waiting (A4804). If the customer waiting demonstration flag (A3210) is set, the game control device 100 can determine that the customer is waiting. When the customer is not waiting (the result of A4804 is "N"), the variable group table change process is terminated without doing anything. When waiting for a customer (the result of A4804 is "Y"), the variable group table referred to in the subsequent 2-byte distribution process (A4303) is changed (address changed) (
A4805), the variable group table change process is terminated.

FIG. 166 (C) illustrates a variable group table when the set value is 3 or 6 and there is a change. In addition, in FIG. 166 (C), than in the normal case of FIG. 166 (A) (when the set value is 1 or 4) or when the set value is changed to 2 or 5 as in FIG. 166 (B). However, the selectivity of the fluctuation pattern (long-term reach) with a long fluctuation time at the bottom of the table increases. Therefore, when the set value is 3 or 6, the reach effect on the display device 41 immediately after the end of waiting for the customer becomes particularly long and lively, and the player has great expectations. Therefore, the player tends to continue the game even after that. Becomes stronger.

FIG. 165B is another example of a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable group table change processing. In FIG. 165B, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents as those in FIG. 165A.

In FIG. 165A, the game control device 100 first executes a branching process according to a set value (A4801).

When the set values are 1, 3, and 5, the game control device 100 ends the variable group table change process without doing anything, and the variable group table set by the address in step A4301a is not changed.

When the set values are 2, 4, and 6, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of games of the special figure variation display game is currently within a predetermined range or whether or not the customer is currently waiting. Judge (A4
802a). When the number of games is not within the specified range and waiting for customers (A4802)
The result of a is "N"), and the variable group table change process is terminated without doing anything. When the number of games is within the predetermined range or is currently waiting for customers (the result of A4802a is "Y"), the variable group table referred to in the subsequent 2-byte distribution process (A4303) is changed (address change). (A4803) to end the variable group table change process.

The variable group table when the set values are changed in 2, 4 and 6 may be the same as in FIG. 166 (B), and the table may be more than in the normal case (when the set values are 1, 3 and 5). The selectivity (ratio) of the fluctuation pattern (long-term reach) that holds expectations for a long fluctuation time on the lower side increases.

As shown in FIGS. 165A and 165, the game control device 100 (effect appearance rate setting means) has the same jackpot probability among a plurality of set values, but under predetermined conditions (for example, the number of games of the special figure variation display game). If is within the specified range or waiting for customers), change the fluctuation group table according to the set value, and if the appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern (long-time reach) with a long fluctuation time is different for each set value. Let me set it. Therefore, only under a predetermined condition, the player can have a great expectation of a big hit.

[Action / Effect of 16th Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the 16th embodiment generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result mode of the variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner is the special result mode. The game machine 10 includes setting changing means (for example, a setting key switch 93 and a setting value changing switch 102) capable of changing a setting value according to a setting related to the game. Further, when the probability of occurrence of the special gaming state is the same among the plurality of set values, the game machine 10 has a predetermined effect (normal notice, reach effect, etc.) for each set value among the plurality of set values. It is provided with effect appearance rate setting means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for different appearance rates of pre-reading effect, special number notification effect among lucky number notification effects, character effect, background effect, etc.).

Therefore, even if the jackpot probability is the same among the plurality of set values and there is no difference in the number of acquired balls (setting difference) due to the set value, the player can perform the difference in the effect pattern (effect difference) depending on the set value. It is possible to select a game machine that frequently produces a predetermined effect. Then, the operation of the game machine is improved in the game hall (game store).

According to the 16th embodiment, the effect appearance rate setting means (game control device 100, effect control device 3).
00) makes the appearance rate of a predetermined effect different for each set value under a predetermined condition (for example, when the time is within a predetermined period or when a customer is waiting). Therefore, the appearance of a predetermined effect can be increased or decreased with respect to a specific set value only under a predetermined condition.

According to the 16th embodiment, the game machine 10 includes a timekeeping means for timing the time. The effect appearance rate setting means makes the appearance rate of a predetermined effect different for each set value when the time measured by the time measuring means is within a predetermined period. Therefore, when the time is within the predetermined period, the appearance of the predetermined effect can be increased or decreased with respect to the specific set value, and the interest of the game within the predetermined period can be remarkably improved. By providing a predetermined period on a regular basis, the operation of the game machine can be improved.

According to the 16th embodiment, when the variable display game is started while waiting for a customer, the effect appearance rate setting means makes the appearance rate of a predetermined effect related to the variable display game different for each set value. Therefore, for a specific set value, it is possible to increase the appearance of a lively (flashy) predetermined effect after the end of waiting for customers, to arouse the expectations of the player, and to lengthen the operating time of the game machine.

According to the 16th embodiment, the effect appearance rate setting means makes the appearance rate of a predetermined effect different for each set value when the result mode of the variable display game is a special result mode. Therefore, for a specific set value, the appearance of the effect (special number notification effect) related to the special result mode (for example, the big hit mode) and the effect (fanfare effect, the big hit medium effect) related to the special game state (big hit state). It is possible to increase the number of players' expectations and increase the operating time of the game machine.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and content equivalent to the claims.

10 Game machine 12 Front frame (game frame)
25 Direction button 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 1st start winning opening (1st start winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 42 Setting change device 44 Board effect device 44a, 44b Internal accessory (inner movable member)
46 Board decoration device 50 Batch display device (LED)
51 1st special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display)
52 2nd special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 display)
80 Lamp display device 82 Lucky number display device 93 Setting key switch 95a External accessory (outside movable member)
102 Setting value change switch 143 Probability setting value display device 150 driver 152 Status display device 153 LED driver 100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Production control device (sub-board)
400 Power supply 510 Parts 513 Identification board 516 Parallel serial conversion unit 519 Wiring (electric wire)
630 Hold display area 640 Hold digestion area 640A Start memory display background 641 Direction display area 815 I2CI / O expander

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine provided with a control means capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a game value to the player when the display result of the variable display game that fluctuates the identification information becomes a special result.
The first display device that can display the display related to the game,
And set Teite stage capable of setting a set value for the game condition,
A second display device capable of displaying a display related to the state display information calculated based on the number of acquired game media is provided.
The control means
A storage means that can retain the stored information even when the power is cut off,
When the power is turned on, it is provided with a validity determination means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid before the timer interrupt becomes possible.
The storage means includes a game work area and a game stack area related to information related to game control, and a state display information work area and a state display information stack area related to the state display information.
The validity determination means sets the game work area as the target of the determination, excludes the game stack area, the state display information work area, and the state display information stack area from the target of the determination.
Characterized in that said control means, in response to the set value by the setting Teite stage is a configurable state settable, it is possible to make the first display device on a predetermined display state A game machine to be.

Images